OptiTex PDS User Manual PDF

SGS Digitize™, PDS™ & Grade™
User’s Manual
SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This agreement gives you certain rights and duties regarding the Software Program, the User’s Guides and the
copy protection key (the “Key”) that you are licensing from Scanvec Garment Systems Ltd. (“Scanvec Garment
Systems”). The Software Program, the User’s Guides and the Key will be referred together here as the “Licensed
Materials”.
1. License grant and termination. Scanvec Garment Systems grants you personal, non-transferable, non-exclusive
license to use the Licensed Materials for the ordinary purposes of your business. If you breach any terms of this
Agreement, this license will immediately terminate and you must promptly return the Licensed Materials to
Scanvec Garment Systems. The Licensed Materials are proprietary products of Scanvec Garment Systems, and
Scanvec Garment Systems retain title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials.
2. Scanvec Garment Systems copyright, etc. no copies or transfer, etc. You acknowledge that the Licensed
Materials are protected by copyrights held by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You acknowledge
that Licensed Materials embody trade secrets owned by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You may
not copy any part of the Licensed Materials for any purpose. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse
engineer or otherwise modify, tamper with or make changes to the Licensed Materials under any circumstances.
You may not rent, lease, loan, assign or transfer the Licensed Material to any third party. You may not allow any
third party to use the Licensed Materials or to make copies of them. You may not use the Software Program
without the Key. You may not emulate, duplicate, replace or modify the Key.
3. Warranty, disclaims, remedies. Scanvec Garment Systems warrants that the Media containing the Software
Program (the “CD’s”) are free from defects of materials and workmanship. SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS
DISCLAIM ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CD’s AND THE
LICENSED MATERIALS. You agree that your only remedy for any breach of the above warranty will be that if
you discover any defects in the CD’s within three months after receiving them, Scanvec Garment Systems will
replace the defective CD’s with non-defective CD’s.
4. No damages beyond Purchase Price. You agree that if, in connection with your use of the Licensed Materials,
you incur direct or indirect injury of any kind, including injury to persons or property or lost profits, Scanvec
Garment Systems shall be liable to you only for the Product Price. In no event will Scanvec Garment Systems,
its stockholders, directors, officers or employees be liable to you for any damages, including lost profits or other
incidental or consequential damages arising out of your use or inability to use the Licensed Materials.
Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVE
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1

Welcome to OptiTex! ____________________________________________________ 1
How to Use This Book ___________________________________________________ 2
Package Contents _______________________________________________________ 3
Registration ____________________________________________________________ 3
Help Services Provided __________________________________________________ 3
Technical Support ______________________________________________________ 4
Installing OptiTex_______________________________________________________ 5
Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter _______________________________________ 9
Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger _________________ 12
Setting Up a Plotter ____________________________________________________ 15
Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars_______________________________________ 17
The Tools _____________________________________________________________17
Grading Toolbar _______________________________________________________21
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E) __________________________________________24
System Toolbar ________________________________________________________31
Insert Toolbar _________________________________________________________34
Edit Notch Dialog Box: __________________________________________________39
The Edit Toolbar ______________________________________________________ 73
The Modify Toolbar ____________________________________________________ 85
The Darts Toolbar _____________________________________________________ 90
The General Toolbar ___________________________________________________ 95
The Advanced Toolbar_________________________________________________ 102
The Dimensional Toolbar ______________________________________________ 103
The Accessories Toolbar _______________________________________________ 107
The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar: _____________________________________ 123
The Template Toolbar: ________________________________________________ 124
Chapter 3: File Menu______________________________________________ 125
New (Ctrl+N): ________________________________________________________ 125
Open (Ctrl+O)________________________________________________________ 126
Merge Style File ______________________________________________________ 128
History ______________________________________________________________ 131
File Finder ___________________________________________________________ 134
Save ________________________________________________________________ 144
Save As______________________________________________________________ 145
Digitize ______________________________________________________________ 147
Digitizer Setup _______________________________________________________ 163
OptiTex Panel commands:______________________________________________ 166
Digitizer Dialog Box: __________________________________________________ 194
Export to CAD/CAM files ______________________________________________197
Import from CAD/CAM Files ___________________________________________201
Layers Table Dialog Box: _______________________________________________212
Dictionary Dialog Box: _________________________________________________214
SGS Modulate ________________________________________________________217
Plot _________________________________________________________________219
Plotting Options for Graded Pieces _______________________________________243
Plotter Setup _________________________________________________________244
Print ________________________________________________________________246
Printer Setup _________________________________________________________248
Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities ______________________________________249
Exit (Alt+F4) _________________________________________________________253
Chapter 4: Edit Menu _____________________________________________ 255
Undo (Ctrl+Z) ________________________________________________________255
Redo (Ctrl+Y) ________________________________________________________255
Cut Current Piece (Ctrl+X) _____________________________________________255
Copy Pieces __________________________________________________________256
Paste Piece (Ctrl+V) ___________________________________________________257
Copy/Paste Internals___________________________________________________258
Clear Selected Pieces___________________________________________________258
Clear Selected Piece ___________________________________________________259
Replace Old: _________________________________________________________259
Remove Current ______________________________________________________260
Make New ___________________________________________________________260
Move Base Line _______________________________________________________261
Delete Piece (Del)______________________________________________________263
Attributes (Enter) _____________________________________________________265
Add Relative _________________________________________________________268
Align Points __________________________________________________________274
Round Corner ________________________________________________________275
Extend Internal _______________________________________________________276
Segment _____________________________________________________________277
Make Pieces __________________________________________________________283
Video________________________________________________________________285
Chapter 5: Piece Menu_____________________________________________ 287
Info (Ctrl + I) ________________________________________________________ 287
Global Info __________________________________________________________ 295
Style Area and Perimeter Values Dialog Box_______________________________ 297
Global Change Internals _______________________________________________ 299
Global Notch Grading _________________________________________________ 300
Order of Internals_____________________________________________________ 301
Modify ______________________________________________________________ 301
Rotate_______________________________________________________________ 301
To Rotate the Baseline: ________________________________________________ 303
Flip Horizontal _______________________________________________________ 305
Flip Vertical _________________________________________________________ 305
Mirror ______________________________________________________________ 306
Scale and Shrink ______________________________________________________ 308
Optimize Cutter Ordering ______________________________________________ 311
Points Cleanup _______________________________________________________ 312
Set (0,0) Point ________________________________________________________ 314
Start Point ___________________________________________________________ 314
Base Parallel to Segment _______________________________________________ 315
Make New Base Line __________________________________________________ 317
Guideline Parallel _____________________________________________________ 318
Seam________________________________________________________________ 318
Reseam (F6)__________________________________________________________ 319
Update Notches _______________________________________________________ 320
336 Digitize, PDS & Grade Manual
Work on Seam (F5) ____________________________________________________320

Switch all Pieces to Cut (F5 + Ctrl) _______________________________________322
Switch all Pieces to Sew (F5 + Shift) ______________________________________322
Unseam______________________________________________________________322
Walk ________________________________________________________________323
Switch Direction (F11) _________________________________________________326
Notch Both (F12) ______________________________________________________327
Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl) ___________________________________________327
Notch Moving (F12 + Shift) _____________________________________________327
Fabric and Stripes_____________________________________________________327
Fabric Pattern ________________________________________________________328
Relate Piece to Stripes__________________________________________________332
Set Group____________________________________________________________334
Ungroup _____________________________________________________________334
Chapter 6: Grading Menu __________________________________________ 335
Stack Point ___________________________________________________________336
Load Sizes ___________________________________________________________337
Reshape Variation Grading _____________________________________________338
Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C) _____________________________________________339
Relative (Ctrl + G, R) __________________________________________________339
Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P) _____________________________________________340
Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X) ___________________________________________340
Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y) ___________________________________________340
Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A) _____________________________________________340
Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F) ____________________________________________341
Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L) ____________________________________________341
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E) __________________________________________341
Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q) __________________________________________342
Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z) _______________________________________________342
Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N) _____________________________________________343
Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O) _____________________________________________343
Sizes (Ctrl + G, S) _____________________________________________________344
Change Size Order ____________________________________________________347
Base Size_____________________________________________________________347
Sizes Variation: _______________________________________________________348
Graded Nest __________________________________________________________352
Grade Proportional____________________________________________________354
Chapter 6: Grading Menu __________________________________________ 335
Stack Point ___________________________________________________________336
Load Sizes ___________________________________________________________337
Reshape Variation Grading _____________________________________________338
Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C) _____________________________________________339
Relative (Ctrl + G, R) __________________________________________________339
Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P) _____________________________________________340
Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X) ___________________________________________340
Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y) ___________________________________________340
Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A) _____________________________________________340
Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F) ____________________________________________341
Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L) ____________________________________________341
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E) __________________________________________341
Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q) __________________________________________342
Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z) _______________________________________________342
Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N) _____________________________________________343
Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O) _____________________________________________343
Sizes (Ctrl + G, S) _____________________________________________________344
Change Size Order ____________________________________________________347
Base Size_____________________________________________________________347
Sizes Variation: _______________________________________________________348
Graded Nest __________________________________________________________352
Grade Proportional____________________________________________________354
Chapter 7: Pleats Menu ____________________________________________ 371
Add Pleat Lines ______________________________________________________371
Add Pleat By Angle ___________________________________________________371
Remove Pleat Lines ___________________________________________________372
Create Box or Knife ___________________________________________________372
Chapter 8: Darts Menu_____________________________________________ 373
Open Dart ___________________________________________________________373
Open Multiple Darts __________________________________________________373
Create Dart __________________________________________________________374
Edit Dart ____________________________________________________________375
Remove Darts ________________________________________________________375
Copy Darts __________________________________________________________375
Paste Darts __________________________________________________________376
Rotate Dart to Point ___________________________________________________376
Rotate Around Center _________________________________________________377
Fix Darts ____________________________________________________________378
Reform Dart _________________________________________________________379
Chapter 9: Design Menu ___________________________________________ 381
Create Parallel________________________________________________________381
Cut Parallel __________________________________________________________383
Segment Length_______________________________________________________384
Hole to Piece / Piece to Hole _____________________________________________387
Point Connection______________________________________________________388
Equal Segments _______________________________________________________390
Custom Fit ___________________________________________________________392
Custom fit tools _______________________________________________________398
Industrial Fabrics _____________________________________________________405
Hole By measure ______________________________________________________408
Create Parallel Cutting_________________________________________________410
Scatter Pieces_________________________________________________________411
Unscatter Pieces ______________________________________________________411
Arrange For Plot ______________________________________________________411
Chapter 10: Template Menu_________________________________________ 413
Open Library_________________________________________________________413
Add To Library_______________________________________________________415
Save As ______________________________________________________________416
Choose ______________________________________________________________417
Primitive Tools Bar: ___________________________________________________418
Chapter 11: View Menu ____________________________________________ 421
Template Window_____________________________________________________421
Screen Coordinates ____________________________________________________421
Rulers _______________________________________________________________422
Pieces Bar____________________________________________________________422
Piece in one scale ______________________________________________________423
Piece List ____________________________________________________________423
Piece Attributes _______________________________________________________424
Bubble Info __________________________________________________________427
Colors by Mode _______________________________________________________427
Base Only (F4) ________________________________________________________429
Show Seam (Ctrl + F6) _________________________________________________429
Grading Table ________________________________________________________429
Grading Rules Library _________________________________________________429
Compare Length ______________________________________________________430
Calculator ___________________________________________________________434
Tool Bars ____________________________________________________________435
Status Bar ___________________________________________________________438
Chapter 12: Options Menu __________________________________________ 439
Snap and Selection ____________________________________________________439
Draft Setup __________________________________________________________440
Grid and Stripes ______________________________________________________443
Colors and Line Types _________________________________________________444
Fonts________________________________________________________________447
Working Units ________________________________________________________447
Grading Manually by Edit Tool _________________________________________450
Open Move Point Dialog _______________________________________________450
Open Move Piece Dialog________________________________________________451
Open Create Dialog____________________________________________________451
Auto Reseam _________________________________________________________451
Auto Update Notches __________________________________________________452
Lock Piece (F3) _______________________________________________________452
Preferences___________________________________________________________453
Chapter 13: Help Menu ____________________________________________ 459
Index (F1)____________________________________________________________459
Keyboard Map _______________________________________________________459
Scenario (Ctrl + F1) ___________________________________________________460
Using Help ___________________________________________________________460
Check Plug Protection _________________________________________________460
SGS on Line__________________________________________________________461
Tip of the Day ________________________________________________________461
About OptiTex PDS ___________________________________________________461
Send File_____________________________________________________________462
How to Contact SGS ___________________________________________________464
Chapter 14: Using the Mouse________________________________________ 465
Right Mouse Button ___________________________________________________465
Select Tool ___________________________________________________________466
Edit _________________________________________________________________467
Insert _______________________________________________________________468
Tools ________________________________________________________________469
Zoom _______________________________________________________________470
Transform ___________________________________________________________471
Move Base Line _______________________________________________________473
Delete _______________________________________________________________473
Attribute ____________________________________________________________473
Segment _____________________________________________________________474
Grading _____________________________________________________________475
Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands ____________________________________ 477
SGS Keys commands __________________________________________________477
Cursor Movement Keys ________________________________________________480
Dialog Box Keys ______________________________________________________480
Editing Keys _________________________________________________________481
Help Keys____________________________________________________________481
System Keys__________________________________________________________482
Text Selection Keys ____________________________________________________482
keyboard shortcuts ____________________________________________________483
PDS ShortCut Keys____________________________________________________487
Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation ____________________________________ 491
Installing the Numonics AccuGrid _______________________________________491
Configuring the GTCO Calcomp Drawing Board 3 Digitizer _________________495
Installing the Altek Digitizer For Use With SGS Software ___________________496
Installing the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer For Use In SGS software ______________502
Installing the SummaSketch II For Use In the SGS software _________________507
Installing the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer For Use In SGS _________________511
software _____________________________________________________________511
Installing the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer For Use In SGS software___________516
Installing the MicroGrid IV Digitizer For Use In SGS software _______________521
Installing the MicroGrid II Digitizer For Use In SGS software _______________526
Installing the Summagraphic 4 Button Digitizer For Use In SGS software ______530
Installing the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer For Use In SGS software____534
Digitizer Manufacturers _______________________________________________539
Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation_______________________________ 541
Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software _____________________________ 541
Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter _______________________________ 544
Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter____________________________________ 551
Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter ____________________ 560
Ioline 28 Plotter ______________________________________________________ 568
Ioline 600 Plotter _____________________________________________________ 578
Ioline Studio Plotter___________________________________________________ 588
Ioline Stylist Plotter ___________________________________________________ 597
Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software ___________ 605
Plotter Technology Plotter _____________________________________________ 619
Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter ___________________________________________ 626
Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters_______________________________________ 632
Gerber AP700 Plotter _________________________________________________ 637
NovaJet Plotter_______________________________________________________ 642
Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter ___________________________________ 650
Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter _______________________________ 657
Lectra plotter ________________________________________________________ 664
Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter ____________________________________ 669
Eastman Cutter ______________________________________________________ 673
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 ____________________________________ 677
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 _____________________________________ 679
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 _____________________________________ 682
Glossary Terms ___________________________________________________ 685
Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 1
Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures
Welcome to OptiTex!
OptiTex is your complete software solution for computerized pattern design,
grading and marker making. It was created specifically for the manufacturer of
the apparel, transportation interiors, upholstery and sewn products industries.
OptiTex’s powerful CAD tools enable you to draft pattern scratch or modify
existing pattern quickly and accurately. Simply import a pattern from your
favorite CAD/CAM program, create a new pattern using OptiTex’s freehand
design tools or utilize OptiTex’s unique digitizing capabilities.
With OptiTex’s digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computer

screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake, simply erase it with the click of
a button. The OptiTex digitizing system is designed to work the way you want
to work. You can enter piece perimeters first, then enter notches, internals and
other piece information later. It’s quick, easy and compatible with industry
standard digitizers.
Once your patters have been created and entered, OptiTex provides a
multitude of interactive editing tools. The most commonly used design and
editing tools are represented as icons in the OptiTex toolbar so you can access
commands with the click of a mouse; there’s no need to navigate through a
series of pull down menus. Add or remove different types of notches, create
darts, add seam allowances pleats and buttons and view everything on screen
as you are working.
Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern to

quickly lengthen or shorten pieces. And obtaining measurement has never
been easier. Whether you’re measuring vertically, horizontally, diagonally or
between pattern pieces, OptiTex’s measuring tool is as easy to use your own
tape measure.
OptiTex Makes grading pattern pieces quick, simple and automatic is just as
interactive as the editing process. Grade any pattern, point by point or globally
according to previously stored rules. OptiTex enable you to witness the results
immediately on screen. With OptiTex , it’s easy to create your own rule
libraries, add new rules or remove old ones. You can even grade internals such
as notches, dart, pleats, buttons and lines.
When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual and

automatic nesting capabilities to help you design markers quickly and
efficiently. In addition, OptiTex gives you the flexibility to change order
quintets, substitute size, change marker dimensions and additional patterns to
your marker from other styles. Match your pattern piece to specific locations
on your striped, plaid or printed materials.
With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services we

offer, we are confident you will find OptiTex to be most users Friendly
production tool you have experienced.
Thank you choosing OptiTex.
How to Use This Book

This manual is design to mirror your computer interface. The chapters are
based on the pull down menus and tool icons. To find information in this book,
use the index, table file, which allows you to view, print or save pertinent
information.
The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different training

and technical support services SGS offer. Lastly, we offer complete
installation directions with pictures.
Feel confident knowing that you not only purchased the most complete
software package for computerized pattern design, grading and marker
making, but also that SGS will continue to support you in every way we can.
Package Contents
Security Lock
** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the Security

Lock!
Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) will replace your CD if it is lost, but WILL
NOT replace lost or stolen Security Lock. If the Security lock becomes
defective it will be replaced, but only after it has been returned to SGS. If you
must return the security lock, the package should be insured.
CD
The OptiTex Program Disk.
Documentation
OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans
Registration
Before you begin, send in the Product Registration card to register yourself as
an owner of OptiTex. This card can be faxed or mailed to the address on the
card.
As a registered owner, you’ll be informed of updates, upgrades and training

seminars; you’ll be on the mailing list for technical bulletins and product
information.
Help Services Provided

SGS offers extensive customer service. Below are the operational support
services available to you as a Registered OptiTex user.
Technical Support
Our US and Canada Technical Support department will provide assistance for
problems of a technical nature. If you are having problems printing or plotting,
for example, technical support will assist you.
When calling for technical support, please be at your computer with the
following information:
• OptiTex Version Number.
• OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock).
• Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording of

any error messages.
Technical Support offices

USA
Tel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI
Fax: 610-521-1564
ISRAEL
Tel.: 972-3-904-9979
Fax: 972-3-904-2710
Internet
Messages can be sent via Internet to our support at the following address:
E-Mail Technical Support: support@optitex.com
E-Mail Sales & Marketing: sales@optitex.com
Web Page
http://www.optitex.com
Installing OptiTex
Before you run the installation program for OptiTex, make sure your computer
meets the minimum requirements to run the software.
OptiTex Requirements
Pentium or better processor
16 MB of RAM
Microsoft Windows ™ 95
Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space
Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device
SVGA 15’’ monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors,
1 parallel port, 1 serial port
Recommended Equipment
Pentium II – 350 or better processor
64 MB of RAM
Microsoft Windows ™ 95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT
Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space
Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device
AGP display card with 4 MB of memory

17’’ monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors,
1 parallel port, 2 serial ports
USB port
SGS recommends using a Bus mouse if you intend to install a serial plotter or
digitizer, since most computers are only equipped with two serial outlets.
In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following:
• Attach the OptiTex Security.
• Install the OptiTex Software.
• Configure your Plotter.
Attach the OptiTex Security Lock
There are five steps, which must be performed in order to attach the OptiTex
Security Lock.
• Turn your computer off.
• Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected to

your printer (LPT1 – the printer port is a female slot at the rear
panel of your computer).
• Plug the male side of the OptiTex Security Lock into the printer
port (LPT1).
! Note: Before plugging in the Security Lock you may want to write down
the serial number located on the plug. This number will be necessary
when calling for Technical Support and is required on the Product
Registration Card.
• Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer into

the back end of the OptiTex Security Lock.
! Note: If you have a printer connected to the back of the OptiTex Security
Lock make sure the printer is properly grounded. If it is not grounded
correctly, the printer can short out your Security Lock. Do not connect
the Security Lock to an A/B switch box or a cable, as this also short out
the Security Lock (you may find that it will work for a while, but it will
eventually destroy the Security Lock). The OptiTex Security Lock
MUST be plugged DIRECTLY into the printer port (LPT1).
! Note: SGS does not guarantee that its copy protection and software are
compatible with all kind of computers.
Install the OptiTex Software
• Start Microsoft Windows 95.
• Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
• The installation screen will display on the screen automatically.
• Select “Install Optitex 8.0.”
• In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT.
• Select the Optitex language.
! Note: The installation will take few minutes to copy the necessary files to
your hard drive.
• The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. The

default installation path will be set to C:\Program files\Optitex8.
Click Browse button to select a different path. Click Next.
• Select the options that you would like to have install and click
next.
The program will begin installing the files to the selected drive and directories.
After the installation is complete, a dialog box will display thanking you for
installing the latest version of SGS software. Click OK and icons will be
placed on the desktop of your computer for OptiTex PDS and OptiTex Mark.
To open PDS or Mark, double click on the correct icon. You must restart you
computer after first OptiTex installation (no need to restart it if you upgrade
the existing OptiTex software).
Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter

There are several steps to configuring your plotter. You must set up your
communication parameters, configure the plot manager, and use the plotter
setup command in the File menu.
You can use the plot manager of your choice. OptiTex supplies you with
OutMan (output manager) which supports different standard and non-standard
plotters as well as OCC. The OutMan uses Windows communication routines
and has its own Queue of file to plot.
Set Up Communication Parameters
You must first set up the communication parameters for the Com port to which
your plotter is connected (there is no need to configure parallel port). Refer to
your plotter’s manual to find its particular communication parameters.
! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters for

the Com port to which your plotter is connected.
Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger
To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on the

station connected to the plotter. This way all users can share the plotter. Do not
load the Output manager on stations without a plotter connected.
The OutMan installation will copy all relevant files to your disk and place the
OutMan icon in your Startup group. OutMan displays a complete review of the
file being plotted, including the amount of paper left on the roll and other
useful information.
You must perform the following steps for each plotter you will be using.
• On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutMan

icon. The OutMan dialog box will be displayed.
• In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication command

in the Options menu. The Communication dialog box will then
be displayed.
• Select the proper communication port and set the correct

communication parameters for it.
OutMan Dialog Box

Stop Action
Stop Action command is used to stop the current plot job.
Exit
Exit command is used to close the output manager.
Communication
Used to set up the port, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, flow, and
protocol.
Working Units
Allows you to choose the working unit of your choice: mm, cm, inches, or
feet.
Font
Allows you to change the font size and type.
About
Displays information about the version of software.
Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger

The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your plotter or
cutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs.
The OCC supports plotters in local computer or on any other computer on

your network. OCC (Output Control Center) is a 32 Bit application,
native to windows, and it's main usage is for arranging a queue to plotters.
OCC can control all kind of output devices, regardless of how they are
connected to your computer. You can use serial, parallel & network plotting
with it at a great ease.
The following document comes to explain to you how to use this application.
Note that it's possible to set the OCC in the same way from our "Plot" dialog
in OptiTex 8.0
The OCC user interface
The Occ application is built mainly from two windows.
The first one is the "Plotters and Queue window" and the second one is the
"Jobs and Info. In queue"
The Toolbar is made of buttons which are always the same.
Make Job Ready
Making a plot job ready, and sending to plot
Hold Job
Leaves the job in the queue in order to plot it later.

Restart Job
Use this button to restart a stuck job or a job you want to re-print it.
You can also "restart" jobs that are already done and are in the done folder
of the selected plotter.
Delete Job
Removes the plot job from the queue.
Move Up
Move the job one level up in the queue.
Move Down
Move the job one level down in the queue.
Move to Top
Move the job to the top of the list.
Move to Bottom
Move the job to the bottom of the list.
Pause Job
Pausing the plot job, may be resume at any time.
Abort Job
Aborts the plotting job, but leaves it on the queue.

Setting Up a Plotter
• Open the OCC and choose "setup -> Plotters" from the file
menu.
• The “Plotter Setup” dialog appears:

Press the "ADD" button, to add a new plotter
Choose the way the plotter is connected and press "Next"
If your plotter is connected directly to your computer, choose
"My computer"
• And if it's a plotter that's connected to another computer on your

network, choose "Network computer".
Choose the way the plotter is set. Choose the port (LPT,COM or
File),
• Choose if you want to print to Lectra, Gerber or Standad

plotting protocol, and choose the data bits, stop bits, parity and
baud rate as they are in your plotter's manual. In your plotter
manual you should also have the switches (communication
parameters) for your specific plotter.
• After setting up everything press on the "Next" button.
• In the plotter name dialog, write the name of your plotter (or any
name you want) and choose a path where you want to keep your
queue files (file to plot), and then press on Finish.
• If you want other people on your network to be able to plot with

your plotter, you have check the "Shared Plotter" box.
In the new window you can see your plotters, and the name of the computer
that they are connected to. On the lower part of this window, you can see
which plotter is the Default one, If you want to change the default plotter, all
you have to do is to click once on the plotter you want to make as default and
then press on the "set Default" button.
When you're satisfied with your plotter settings press the "Close" button, to get
into the main window of the OCC application again.
Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 17
Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars
The Tools
Tools are small icons or pictures that represent different features within the
software. Tools are displayed across the top of the screen in bars (rows)
located below the pull down menus and above the piece bar. There are five
different Toolbars in the PDS and GRADE software:
! Note: Toolbars may vary in appearance and number of available tools on each
Toolbar based on software modules that were purchased. For example, the
Advanced Toolbar may have fewer icons if the Custom Fit software module was
not purchased. This section covers all tolls on all Toolbars.
The Grading Toolbar:
The System Toolbar:
The Insert Toolbar:

The Edit Toolbar:
The Modify Toolbar:
The General Toolbar:
The Advanced Toolbar:
The Custom Fit Toolbar:
The Accessories Toolbar:

The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar:
Toolbars may be viewed on the screen, or they may be hidden from view.
When all Toolbars are displayed, the size of the working area is reduced. To
control the display of Toolbars on the screen, use the Toolbars command in the
View menu. To display a particular Toolbar on the screen, place a check mark
next to the name of the Toolbar. To hide a particular Toolbar, uncheck the
name of the Toolbar. To check or uncheck a selection, click on the name of
the Toolbar in the Toolbar menu. Toolbars toggle from on to off each time the
mouse clicks on the name of the Toolbar.
To Customize a Toolbar:
• From the View menu, select Tool Bars.
• Click on Customize.
• Click on New. Name the new toolbar.
• Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and
on the working screen.
• Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed for
the highlighted toolbar on the left.
• Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description

of that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.
• Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbar
• Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeat
this until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.
• Click OK.
! Note: The buttons from the Template Basic Shapes toolbar cannot be transferred
to a customized toolbar.
To Reset a Toolbar:
Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default
toolbar.
• Highlight the desired toolbar.
• Click Reset.
• Click Close.
! Note: The Reset command changes to the Delete command when a customized
toolbar or a Template toolbar is highlighted.
To Create a Template Toolbar:
A Template Toolbar is a toolbar in which the buttons are pattern pieces, which
can be stretched to a desired length and width.
• Save your file as a Template (From the Template menu, select

"Save As".)
• Exit PDS.
• Open PDS.
• From the View menu, select Tool Bars. The Template will be
added to the bottom of the Toolbar list.
Engaging a Tool
Clicking once on the tool activates most tools. The cursor changes from the
normal pointer (an arrow) to another type of pointer that coincides with the
selected tool. For example, when the Walk tool is activated, the normal
pointer turns into a cross hair line with two small feet. The two small feet
remind the user that the walk feature is currently activated.
Disengaging a Tool
Returning to the normal arrow pointer disengages a tool. To return to the

normal arrow pointer, either click on the tool that looks like an arrow, or click
the right mouse button, and select the first option in the pop up menu, “Select
Tool” using the left mouse button.
Selecting another tool from one of the Toolbars also disengages tools currently
in use.
Grading Toolbar
The Grading Toolbar consists of tools that are directly related to the grading
commands in the Grading pull down menu. These commands are also covered
in the Grading chapter.
Previous Point
Use Previous Point to select the next grading point in the counterclockwise
direction from the currently selected grading point. This tool eliminates using
the mouse to select grading points.
Copy Grading (Ctrl + G + C)
Use Copy Grading to place the X and Y grading increments of a selected

Grade point on the Windows clipboard. After clicking on the Copy Grading
tool, the X and Y grading increments are copied to the clipboard and remain
on the clipboard until another item is copied. Typically, the Copy Grading tool
is used as the first step in pasting grading increments from one point to
another.
Paste Relative (Ctrl + G + R)
Paste Relative is used to automatically apply opposite grading on a piece when

using the Paste command related to the position of the point; left, right, up,
down to the point where the grading value came from. Opposite grading refers
to grading increments that reverse in the negative or positive direction. A
check mark next to Relative in the Grading menu indicates that the Relative
option is activated. Another way to activate the Paste Relative option, is to
click on the Paste Relative icon in the Grading Toolbar. The Paste Relative
icon appears highlighted when activated.
Paste Grading (Ctrl + G + P)
Use Paste Grading to paste the X and Y grading increments from the Windows
clipboard onto the selected point. Select the point where the same X and Y
grading increments are desired and then click the Paste Grading tool. After
clicking on the Paste Grading tool, the X and Y grading increments are pasted
on to the selected point. Typically, the Paste Grading tool is used as the second
step for pasting grading increments from one point on to another.
Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G + X)
Use Paste X grading to paste only the X grading increment that was copied
onto the clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.
Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Y)
Use Paste Y grading to paste only the Y grading increment that was copied
onto the clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.
Paste Grading Around (Ctrl + G +A)
Use Paste Grading Around to paste the average of a specific grading value
around a selected piece.
Zero Grading (Ctrl + G + Z)
Use Zero Grading to nullify a grading value of a selected point(s).
Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G + F)
Flip X Grading of the current selected point, reverses the direction of X

grading values. If the X value for a grade point is +1/2” for each larger size,
Flip X reverses the X so that it is -1/2” for each larger size.
Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G + L)
Flip Y Grading reverses the direction of Y grading values. If the Y value for a
grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip Y reverses the Y so that it is -
1/2” for each size larger.
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E)
Use Equal X Grading so that only one grading value must be entered for an
entire size range on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious and
repetitive typing.
To Use Equal X Grading:
• Type in the X growth amount for the next larger size from the
base size.
• Move the cursor to the top of the X column in the grading table.
• Click the cursor with the left button one time to highlight the
entire X column in black.
• Select Equal X Grading from the Grading menu or use the Equal
X tool
• All sizes are now equally graded.
! Note: If the grading is not visible or only partially visible on the screen, press the
F4 key on the keyboard to activate all grading.
Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Q)
Use Equal Y Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire size
range on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious and repetitive
typing.
• Type in the Y growth amount for the next larger size from the
base size.
• Move the cursor to the top of the Y column in the grading table.
entire Y column in black.
• Select Equal Y Grading from the Grading menu or use the Equal
Y icon.
! Note: If the grading is not visible or only partially visible on the screen, press the
F4 key on the keyboard to activate all grading.
Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G + Z)
Zero X Grade of the selected point, quickly makes all grade values for all
sizes, zero in the X column. This command is commonly used to remove
grading from a particular point.
To Use Zero X Grade:
• Select one or more grading points with the arrow tool. If

selecting multiple points, drag the arrow in the clockwise
direction from the first point to the last point.
• Select Zero X Grade from the Grading menu or use the Zero X
icon.
• All sizes on the select point/s are now grading zero in the X
direction.
Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G + O)
Zero Y Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the Y
column. This command is commonly used to remove grading from a particular
point.
To Use Zero Y Grade:
• Select one or more grading points with the arrow tool. If

selecting multiple points, drag the arrow in the clockwise
direction from the first point to the last point.
• Select Zero Y Grade from the Grading menu or use the Zero Y
icon.
• All sizes on the select point/s are now grading zero in the Y
direction.
Graded Nest
Allows building a graded nest using pieces that came from another CAD
application via a DXF, AAMA or any other file format where grading value
information and relationships between pieces is lost. For example, if a marker
is imported that contains a men’s shirt style including sizes S, M, and L, all the
pieces are imported into SGS OptiTex software as separate pieces. No
relationships between sizes are imported with the data. The Graded Nest tool
provides the ability to stack all same pieces of different sizes into a graded nest
and relates the pieces as the same piece but different sizes.
To Use the Graded Nest Tool:
• First, sizes must be defined using the Size command under the
Grading Menu. Define the Base size and size range to be used.
(See the Grading Chapter.)
• Display the point numbers for each pattern piece using the
Display Piece Attributes dialog box in the View menu. Make
sure that the zero point to be used for each size is set to the same
number. In the example below, all pocket pieces use point #1 as
the zero point. If the zero point for each size is not set to the
same number, use the Start Point command in the Piece Menu.
(See the Piece Chapter).
• Click on the Graded Nest tool. Notice that the status line at the
bottom of the screen prompts the user to select the Base size
first.
• Click on point #1 of the medium sized pockets (the base size).
• Click on point #1 of the small sized pocket.
• Click on point #1 of the large sized pocket.

• The pocket pieces should now display as a graded nest. If the

graded nest is not visible, press the F4 key on the keyboard.
Grade Proportional
Grade Proportional is used to apply grading on curved pattern edges. For

example, proportional grading is commonly used on the hemline of a circle
skirt or on scalloped edges.
To Apply Proportional Grading:
• Select the Grade Proportional tool.
• Click on the first point from which the proportional grade

originates. In the example above, select point #3.
• Click on the last point from which the proportional grade

• Click on the point to receive the proportional grade. In the

example above, select point #4.
Next Point
Use Next Point to select the next grading point in clockwise direction from the
currently selected grading point. This tool eliminates using the mouse to
select grading points.
System Toolbar
The System Toolbar consists of many standard Windows type tools as well as
several SGS specific tools.
Pointer
The Pointer tool (sometimes called the Selection tool or the Arrow tool) is the
default tool used in the PDS software. This tool is used to select pieces, points,
and line segments.
! Tip: Double click the Pointer tool to redraw the screen.
! Note: To access the Pointer tool without clicking on the Pointer icon, click the
right mouse button one time. With the left button, select the Pointer tool
from the pop-up menu.
New (Ctrl + N)
Use the new tool to start a new design (DSN) file. A DSN file contains all the
pieces necessary to make one complete garment or other sewn product. When
the New tool is selected, the Make Rectangle dialog box displays by default.
Enter specific length and width values for the new pattern piece or select
Cancel to bypass the Make Rectangle dialog box.
The number of pieces in a DSN file is limited only by the amount of memory
available on your computer.
! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.
Open
The Open tool opens an existing SGS pattern file
! Note: SGS pattern files have the extension, .DSN.
! Note: The last directory where design files have been saved becomes the default
directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse button to select a
different directory.
Save
The Save tool saves the file displayed on screen to the current path under the
current name, replacing the old file. If a new file has been created, but the new
file has not been previously saved, a dialog box prompts for a file name to be
entered.
! Note: The DSN extension is added to the file name automatically.
! Note: The last directory where design files have been saved becomes the default
directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse button to select
a different directory.
! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.

Print
Use the Print Tool to activate the Print dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter
for in depth information.
Plot
Use the Plot Tool to activate the Plot dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter for
in depth information.
Digitize
Use the Digitize Tool to activate the Digitize dialog box. Refer to the File
Chapter for in depth information.
About OptiTex PDS
Choose the About OptiTex PDS tool to find the version of OptiTex PDS you
are currently using and your security lock number. This information is
necessary when contacting Technical Support for help with your SGS
software.
Context Help
Use the Context Help tool to get information about any item or feature in the
SGS software. Select the Context Help tool and then click on any item on the
screen to get information about the selected item. Information regarding the
selected item displays on the screen.
Insert Toolbar
The Insert Toolbar consists of tools used for editing pieces such as adding
fullness, deleting elements from a piece, adding notches, seam allowances,
pleats and more.
Delete
The Delete tool is used to delete points, notches, darts, and inner elements on a
piece. When the tool is selected, the pointer changes to an eraser with a black
dot on its end.
! Tip: Be careful when deleting curve points as removing a point may cause the
curve to look very different.
! Tip: Select the Undo command from the Edit menu to undo the deleting of a point.
To Delete Elements from a Piece:
• Select the Delete tool.
• Place the black dot on the eraser over the element to be deleted.
• Click the mouse button.
• A dialog box pops up on the screen and asks if you are sure you
want to delete.
• Click OK to complete deleting the element.
! Tip: Another way to delete elements is to select the element with the pointer tool,
and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Point On
Use the Point On tool to add a point onto the perimeter of a piece. You can
also decide on a point type when adding the new point.
To Add a Point on a Piece’s Perimeter:
• Select the POINT ON tool.
• Move the tool to the area where the point is to be added.
• If the Move Point dialog box is enabled, it allows the user to

specify a distance from the previous or next point to place the
added point.
• Click OK.
! Tip: If the attributes are not changed, the point receives the same attributes of the
last point selected. Use the ‘Point On’ tool to add points to an internal as
well.
! Note: Refer to Move Point section in the Edit Chapter for more information on the
Move Point Dialog Box.
Point Beside
Use the Point Beside tool to add a point beside the perimeter of a piece. This
tool changes the shape of the piece. When the point is added outside or inside
the piece’s perimeter, the line segment closest to the point snaps onto the
point, changing the shape of the piece and breaking the original line segment
into two line segments. The diagram below illustrates an example.
To Add a Point Beside a Piece’s Perimeter:
• Select the Point Beside tool.
• Move the tool to the area where the point is to be added.
• The Move Point dialog box displays, the user can specify a
distance from previous or next point to place the added point.
• Click OK.
• Notice that the shape of the piece changes based on where the
point is placed.
! Note: Refer to Move Point section in the Edit Chapter for more information on the
Move Point Dialog Box.
Notch
Use the Notch tool to add a notch to a piece’s perimeter. This tool provides an
easy way to add or edit notches once the digitizing process is finished. A notch
is a marking point positioned on the boundary of a piece
and is used to accurately align one piece to another piece indicating how
pieces are sewn together. There are three parameters that define a notch
location on the piece’s boundary and the size of the notch. These parameters
are depth, width, and angle. The Notch’s parameters are defined and can be
changed in the Edit Notch dialog box.
Notches are also used in the PDS software to define stripe adjust points for
stripe matching on the marker. Stripe adjust points are set in the Notch
Attributes dialog box which is accessible through the Edit Notch dialog box.
(See the subsection, “Attributes” below in the Edit Notch section).
! Note: The default notch type can be changed using the Options Menu,
Preferences, Default Sizes, and Notch Parameters.
To Add a Notch:
• Select the Notch tool.
• Place the tool where the notch is to be applied.
• The Edit Notch dialog box displays allowing the user to specify
the type, size, and exact placement of the notch.
! Note: See the section below for more information on the Edit Notch dialog
box.
• Click Apply. Then click Close.

! Note: Corner notch direction is global command for all the notches in the DSN
file!
! Note: All values displayed in the Notch Attributes dialog box refer to the base size.
See also the Attributes section in the Edit menu.
! Note: You can crate as mach notches, with same attribute, as you need without
clicking on the "Create" button in the crate notch dialog box.
Note that when you will click on the "cancel" button only the last notch
will remove. To remove all the notches hold the CTRL key while clicking on
the cancel button.
Edit Notch Dialog Box:

Reconnect
The Reconnect Button is used to reset a notch to relate with the original point
from which it was established. It is usually used in case the original point is
deleted and a new grade point should be related to the notch.
! Note: The reconnect command is enabled only when the value in the proportional
window is not between 0 and 1! Using the reconnect command will change
the notch link to relate to the nearest grading point with distance
proportions in the normal range (0 to 1).
Type
There are six types of notches available to choose: T, V, I, L, U, Box. Pieces

may have more than one type of notch. Use the down arrow next to the Type
box, to see a list of available notch types and to make the appropriate
selection.
Size
The size box indicates the size piece for which information is currently
displayed. This information is only important if the pattern is graded.
Depth
Depth indicates the length of the notch. A typical notch depth is .25”,
however this measurement varies depending on the type of pattern piece, and
on individual standards set by each company.
Width
Width indicates the width of the notch. Width does not apply to Slit notches
(also called I notches).
Angle
Angle indicates the angle of the notch from the line where the notch is placed.
To apply a notch on the outside of a pattern piece, use an angle setting of 180
degrees. Other way to edit the notch angle, is using the mouse click. Click on
the "Angle by mouse click" and click again on the general direction of the
selected notch. It will be move to the click direction.
Attributes
The Attributes button activates the Notch Attributes dialog box. This dialog
box is used to establish parameters for an automatic cutter and to establish
stripe adjust points when working with stripe, plaid, or repeated print fabrics.
Parameters for the cutter include notch type: draw, cut, or punch. Additionally,
this area is used to establish operational stops (op stops) for temporarily
stopping an automatic cutter before or after cutting a piece.
! Tip: Under Commands: to prevent cutting the notch use Draw, to cut the notch
use Cut, to cut the notch with a special head use Punch (in Gerber cutters it
will be the M68 command). In the None mode the notch will not be plotted
or cut. This mode is used in notches that are used for stripe adjust or
OpStop the marker.
Proportional
When Proportional is checked, the notch is placed proportionally between two

grading points before and after the notch.
! Note: See the Attributes section in the Edit chapter.
From Previous
When From Previous is selected, the notch is placed a specified distance from
the previous grading point.
! Note: It is possible to assign different positions and attributes to each notch on the
piece perimeter.
! Note: Refer to the Attributes section in the Edit chapter.
From Next
When From Next is selected, the notch is placed a specified distance from the
next grading point. (See diagram above).
Regrade
Use Regrade to regrade and move a notch in case you have changed its
position value in the previous three fields (Proportional, From Previous, From
Next) have been made.
Regrade All
Use Regrade All to regrade the notch on all sizes to follow the grade position
of the current notch on the base size after changes in the previous three fields
(Proportional, From Previous, From Next) are made.
Copy to All
Copy to All is used to copy the attribute of the current notch to all sizes
(proportional, from previous, from next).
Distance from Grading Points
When this box is selected, all measurements originate from the previous or
next grading point only. If this box is not selected, all measurements originate
from the previous or next point regardless of whether it is a grading point or a
non-grading point.
! Note: While this dialog box remains open, different notches may be selected and
changed. After each notch is changed, click the Apply button. No changes
are implemented unless the Apply button is clicked. After editions are final,
click Close to exit.
! Tip: To create a notch that is the same distance from a point for all sizes
(sometimes referred to as a notch with a tangent rule), use either the From
Previous, or from Next options. Use APPLY to apply changes, then use
COPY TO ALL to copy the notch to all sizes, then use REGRADE ALL, so
that the notch behaves the same on all sizes.
Seam
Use the Seam tool to add seam allowance to piece.
! Note: Refer to the Seam section in the Piece chapter for more information.
To Add Seam Allowance:
• Select the Seam Allowance tool.
• Either select a point on a piece indicating that seam allowance is

to be added to the entire piece, or select the segment on the
piece on which to apply seam allowance.
• To select a single point for adding a constant seam allowance to

the entire piece, point the Seam Allowance tool at a point on the
piece and click the mouse twice.
• To select a segment or multiple segments, point the Seam

Allowance tool at the first point and click the mouse, then drag
the Seam Allowance tool to the last point of the segment and
click the mouse.
! Note: It is not recommended to choose a curve point as a start or end point for a
seam.
• When the Point Attributes dialog box displays, enter the amount
of the allowance in the Seam Width box at the lower left of the
dialog box. If the seam allowance is added to the entire piece,
select the appropriate corner type by clicking on the
corresponding corner icon. If the seam allowance is added to a
segment of the piece, choose the type of corner to apply to the
start of the seam and to the end of the seam from the Start Seam/
End Seam boxes. The icons illustrate available corner types. To
leave the corner types as standard corners, it is not necessary to
make a corner selection.
• Click OK after appropriate information is added.

! Note: If any changes are made to piece after the seam allowance is applied, press
the F6 key to recalculate the seam values.
! Note: Refer to the Attributes Section in the Edit chapter for more information.
! Note: Negative or positive seam allowances may be applied depending on how a

piece was created or digitized.
! Tip: To quickly see if seam allowance has already been applied to piece, select a
point on the piece, and press the Enter key. When the Point Attributes
dialog box displays, notice the value in the Seam Width field.
Delete Seam
Use tool to delete seam from your pieces.
• Select “Delete Seam” tool.
• From “Unseam” dialog box select which pieces seam to delete.

• Use “OK” button to delete the seam from the selected pieces or
use “Cancel” button to cancel to delete command.
Dart
Darts are based on four points. If the dart is digitized, the Start, Middle (the
overlap extension) and End points are on the piece’s boundary. The fourth
point is the apex of the dart and is digitized while defining the dart. Just below
the apex, the drill hole should also be indicated.
The first point of the dart is placed on the pattern contour by pressing the letter
‘D’ on the 16-button digitizer. The second point is placed internally at the apex
of the dart. The other two points are automatically inserted.
! Note: See the File Chapter for details on digitizing a dart.
! Tip: If a dart is not digitized during the digitizing process, it can easily be added to
piece on the screen using the Dart tool.
To Create a New Dart:
• Select the Dart tool.

• Click the left mouse button on the first point of the dart (See the
diagram below).
! Note: There must be existing points on the first and last dart points on the piece’s
boundary. If points do not exist where the dart is to be placed, use the Add
Relative command in the Edit menu. (See the Edit chapter).
• Click the left mouse button again on the last point of the dart.
The cursor automatically becomes the center point (apex) of the
line created between the two selected points.
• Drag the cursor internally to create the dart depth and click the
mouse button a third time. After clicking the mouse button a
third time the Dart Attributes dialog box will appear.
! Note: The dart is always created symmetrically.
• When the Dart Attributes dialog box displays, select the desired
options.
• Click OK.
Dart Attributes Dialog Box:
Name
Use name field to give a name for the dart apex point.
! Note: If your dart apex point as a name, you will be able to apply a grading rule
(by using “Apply Rule by name” command from grading menu) for the
dart apex without selecting the dart apex point.
Direction
Select the direction to fold the dart, clockwise, or counter clockwise. The
Overlap box below must be checked in order to select a direction.
Overlap
Check the Overlap box to establish that the dart is to be folded in a specific
direction. Checking this box activates the Direction options above.
Depth
Use the Depth field to view the current depth of the dart or enter a specific
depth for the dart.
Equal for All Sizes
If the dart should not grade with the pattern piece, check this box. If the dart
should grade with each size, uncheck this box.
Drill, Draw, Cut, None
Select the desired option for the drill hole.
Distance
Enter the distance to place the drill from the apex of the dart. To place the drill
hole one half inch below the apex, enter .5 in the Distance box.
To Pivot a Dart to a New Location:
• Select the Dart tool.
• Click and hold the left mouse button on the center point of the
dart.
• Drag the cursor to the new location along the perimeter of the
pattern piece where the dart is to be pivoted Click the mouse a
second time.
• As shown in the diagram, click on point #1 and drag to #3. Click

the mouse button again at point #3 to pivot the entire dart to the
side seam. This step directly relates manual pattern making
when closing a dart after the pattern has been slashed.
• To pivot part of the original dart to the side seam, click on point
#1 and drag toward point #2. Click the mouse again at point #2.
The Move Dart dialog appears. To move 50% of the original
waist seam dart to the side seam enter 50 in the percent box.
! Tip: To move the entire dart from the waist seam to the side seam, enter
100 or 0 in the Percents box.
Combining Darts
Combining two darts is possible if both darts have the same pivot (Apex)
point. This situation occurs when a dart has previously been divided using the
dart tool. To combine the two darts use the same method used to pivot a dart to
a new location.
To Change the Position of the Dart Apex:
• To change the location of the dart Apex, select the Dart tool and
click on the apex of the dart. Drag in the direction where the
apex is to be relocated. Click the mouse a second time.
• When the Move Dart Origin dialog box appears, enter the
desired X and Y values.
• Click OK to activate the new location of the dart apex.

Add Fullness
Use the Add Fullness tool to slash and spread a piece to add more fullness.
This feature is commonly used in the apparel industry. The diagram below
illustrates an example of adding fullness.
To Add Fullness:
• Select the Add Fullness tool.
• Click the left mouse button on the first point. The first point is
position on a pattern where slashing would begin.
• Drag the cursor to the second point and click the mouse button.
The second point is where the pattern is cut to (not through).
This point is sometimes referred to as the pivot point.
• When the Move Point Dialog Box is displayed, enter specific

values for exact placement of the fullness. This step is optional
and only necessary in order to place the first and second slash
points at an exact location relative to other points on the pattern.
• Click OK.
• When the Values to Open dialog box displays, enter the amount
of fullness to add. This amount can be a linear distance or an
angle. Fullness may be added as balanced fullness (equal
fullness on both sides of the slash line), or fullness may be
added to only one side of the slash line.
• Click OK.
Pleat
The Pleat tool is used to create pleats. Both Box pleats and Knife pleats may
be added using the Pleat tool. The Pleat tool allows for even and variable
(uneven) pleating. Pleat depth and the amount of spacing between each pleat
may also be specified in the Pleat dialog box.
! Note: Error messages appear if a pleat is placed over a sharp curve or

corner. Error messages also appear if the number, depth, and
distance between each pleat exceed the existing piece’s dimensions.
Error messages indicate that the values entered into the Pleat dialog
box are incorrect.
To Make a Pleat:
• Select the Pleat tool.
• Click the mouse on the piece at the point where the pleat is to
start.
• When the Move Point dialog box displays, either confirm the
values in the Move Point dialog box by pressing Enter, or enter
the desired values and click OK.
• Click the mouse on the piece at the point where the pleat is to
end. Repeat step 3.
• When the Define Pleat Characteristics dialog box displays, enter

the desired pleat information. (See the Pleat Characteristics
Dialog Box section below).
• Click OK.
Pleat Characteristics Dialog Box:
Box
Select Box Pleat in order to create box pleats. This type of pleat has four
folds. When Box Pleat is checked, an image of the pleat displays on the upper
right side of the dialog box.
Knife
Select Knife Pleat in order to create knife pleats. This type of pleat has two
folds. When Knife Pleat is checked, an image of the pleat displays on the
upper right side of the dialog box.
CCW Folded
This option is activated only when the Knife Pleat box is selected. Selecting
this option makes the knife pleats fold in the counter clockwise direction. If
this option is not selected, the pleats fold in the clockwise direction.
Variable Pleat
The variable pleat option is used to create uneven pleats. For example, a
variable pleat may be 1” at the top of the pleat and .5” at the bottom of the
pleat. If this option is not selected, the pleat is even or parallel from top to
bottom. See the diagram below for illustration.
Depth
Depth refers to the size (thickness) of the pleat. For example, a pleat may be
1” in depth.
First
First is activated only when the Variable option is selected. The depth of the
pleat on the first line is entered in this box, and the depth of the pleat on the
second line is entered in the above box. The above box, “Depth,” changes to
“Second” when the variable option is activated. This prompts the user to enter
a pleat depth for the second line.
Number of Pleats
Enter the number of pleats in this box.
Pleats Distance
This option is only activated when 2 or more pleats are entered in the Number
of Pleats box above. Enter the distance between pleats. For example, there
may be two pleats on a pattern piece that are spaced 2” apart.
Pleats First Distance
This option is only activated when 2 or more pleats are entered in the Number
of Pleats box and when the Variable option is selected. Enter the distance
between pleats on the first pleat line in this box. In this case, the distance
between pleats on the second pleat line is entered in the Pleats Distance box
above.
Counter Clockwise
This option controls the direction that the pleats are placed from the original
defined pleat line (see step #2 in the “To Make A Pleat” section). If this box is
checked, pleats are placed in the counterclockwise direction from the original
line. If the box is unchecked, pleats are placed in the clockwise direction from
the original line.
! Note: See the following diagram for the results of the above options on a
skirt pattern.
Circle
Use the Circle tool to create a circular line on a piece. Circles may be created
with a specific radius, and they may also be duplicated.
To Make a Circular Line:
• Select the Circle tool.
• Click the mouse on the piece where the center of the circle is to
be placed.
• Drag the mouse away from the center point to the approximate
size of the desired circular line, and click the mouse again.
• When the Edit Circle dialog box displays, confirm the existing
radius by pressing Enter, or specify an exact radius by entering a
specific value in the Radius box.
! Note: Use the Name filed to give a new to your circle

! Note: If your circle as a name you will be able to apply a grading rule (by
using “Apply Rule by name” command from grading menu) for the
dart button without selecting the dart apex point.
• OPTIONAL: To create duplicate circles, press the Duplicate
button and enter the necessary information in the Duplicate
dialog box.
• Press OK.
Button
Use the Button tool to create drill holes. Buttons are also used to mark a match
point, for stripe matching on a marker when working with stripe, plaid, or
repeated print fabrics. Buttons may be duplicated quickly and easily without
having to recreate each button. The button tool can also be used to mark a drill
hole for pockets or as OpStop for the cutting machine.
Buttons can be graded or they can serve as stack points. (Refer to the Stack
Point command in the Grading chapter.)
To Create a Button (drill hole):
• Select the Button tool.
• Click the mouse on the piece where the button is to be placed. If

the mouse is clicked on an existing point, the Add Point Relative
dialog box displays which allows the user to specify a specific
distance from the existing point where the button is to be placed.
If the mouse is not clicked on an existing point, the Button
Attributes dialog box displays.
• When the Button Attributes dialog box displays, select the type
of button to create and the desired Operation Stop Cutting
Option. (See note below). Also, indicate the stripe adjust
number if the button is for stripe matching.
• OPTIONAL: To create duplicate buttons, press the

DUPLICATE button and enter the necessary information in the
Duplicate dialog box.
• Click OK.
! Note: Op Stop options control whether the cutter stops before, after, or does
not stop before or after a drill.
! Note: Buttons are also created using the Add Relative command from the
Edit pull down menu. This method of adding buttons allows
placement of the buttons a specific distance from an existing point.
(Refer to the Edit chapter for details).
Buttons on Distance
Use Buttons on Distance to add several buttons on equal distance.
• Select the Button on Distance tool.
• Place the Button on Distance tool directly over a point, if the

buttons are to be
related to that point, where the buttons will begin. If not, place
the Button on
Distance tool to the desired location on the piece. Click with the
mouse button.
• Drag the tool to the point where the buttons will end. Click with
the mouse button.
• The Set Buttons on equal distance dialog box will display.

• Enter the Number of buttons desired
• Between - the number of buttons in between the first and last

button
• Before - the number of buttons before the first button
• After - the number of buttons after the last button
• Distance shows the distance between the first & last button.
• Enable the Set First option in order to display the first button.
• Enable the Set Last option in order to display the last button.
• Enter a value for the Radius of the buttons.
• Select the Command for either a plotter or cutter.
• Click OK.
Text
Use the Text tool to add text. This tool is commonly used to add instructions
or other information to a piece to aid the cutting process. The text is plotted on
the pieces either from the PDS software, or it is plotted from the Marking
software. Text may be added at an angle.
! Note: It is not necessary to use the text tool for standard piece information
such as the piece name, style name, piece code, piece description, size
name, or sequence number. Standard piece information in entered
using the Piece Information dialog box. (See the Piece Chapter for
details). This information is controlled in the Marking software. It is
optional to plot all, some, or none of this “standard” information. See
the SGS Marking Manual for more details.
To Place Text:
• Click the Text tool. The arrow becomes a text cursor.
• Move the cursor to the desired position within the selected

pattern piece and click the mouse button.
• When the Enter Text at Screen Position dialog box displays,

type the appropriate text in the dialog box.
• Click OK. The text displays on the screen.

To Change or Delete Text:
• Select the Text tool.
• Select the text to be changed or deleted by clicking on top of the

text.
• When the Enter Text at Screen Position dialog box displays,

either change the existing text or use the delete key or the
backspace key to remove unwanted text.
• Click OK.
! Note: There are limitations to the text size according to your output device.
The text size and font are changed through the Fonts command in
the Options menu.
Pleat Lines
The Pleat Lines command has three sub options: Add, Add by Angle &
Remove. Pleat lines are a special line type that runs between 2 points. It is a
dashed line that is attached to its end points. If you move on of these points,
the Pleat line will move with it.
To define an Pleat line between two points:
• Using the Pleat Lines tool, select the two points by clicking on
the first point, and then hold down the Shift key while selecting
the second point.
Or
• Using the Pleat Lines tool, click on a point and then drag the
cursor to the next point and click again with left mouse button.
To remove the Pleat line either select the two points and choose
the ‘Remove’ option from the Pleat command, or select the Pleat
line with the pointer (arrow) and use the ‘Delete’ (Del) key from
the keyboard. Remember that any selected element becomes
RED while the cursor is close to that element.
The Edit Toolbar

Tools in this Toolbar are used to reposition pieces on the screen such as flip
and rotate pieces. It also allows you to edit the contour of the piece by using
the move point tools.
Move Point
Select the Move Point Tool to move a single point.
To Move a Single Point:
• Select the Move Point tool.
• Click on the point to be moved. The selected point is now

attached to the cursor.
• Move the point to the desired position and click the mouse again
to anchor the point. The Move Point dialog box displays with
the new point coordinates.
• OPTIONAL: Enter the desired values to move the point to a

specific location.
• Click OK.
! Note: The display of the Move dialog box may be turned off by clicking the
Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not displayed until this
option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog Box command in the
Options menu.
Move Proportional
Select the Move Proportional tool to move a section proportionally between

two grading points.
To Move Points Proportionally Between Two Grading Points:
• Select the Move Proportional tool.
• Click on the grading points on each end of the segment to be

moved proportionally.
• Move the points to the desired position and click the mouse
again to anchor the points. The Move Segment Proportional
dialog box displays.
• OPTIONAL: Enter the desired values to move the points to a

specific location.
• Click OK.
! Note: Segments may be moved proportionally between non-grading points,

however, the results are different. Grading point’s function as
anchoring points for the segment that is being proportionally moved.
! Note: The display of the Move dialog box may be turned off by clicking the
Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not displayed until this
option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog Box command in the
Options menu.
Move Parallel
The Move Parallel tool moves a segment of a piece. For example, this tool is
commonly used to extend or lengthen one side of a pattern piece.
To Move Parallel:
• Select the Move Parallel tool.
• Click and drag the cursor in a clockwise direction to select the

points to move.
! Tip: After selecting points, the Move Point command from the Edit menu
may also be used to move the selected group of points.
• Click on any of the selected points and move the segment to the
desired location.
• Click the left mouse button to anchor the position. The Move
Parallel dialog box displays.
• OPTIONAL: Enter values for the exact placement of the

segment in the X and Y directions.
• Click OK.
! Note: The display of the Move Parallel dialog box may be turned off by
clicking the Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not
displayed until this option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog
Box command in the Options menu.
Round Corner
Round Corner is used to create a curved intersection where two lines intersect
on a boundary line as well on a multiple point selection.
To Create a Rounded Corner:
• Select the intersection point(s) to create a rounded corner.
• Select ROUND CORNER from the EDIT menu.
• Enter a value for the radius of the rounded corner in the dialog
box.
! Note: Round corner command supports multiply corners point selection.

! Tip: To undo the rounded corner, select Undo from the Edit menu.
Align Points
The Align Points command aligns a selected group of points horizontally,

vertically or by a specified angle.
When choosing the Align Points command, more than one point must be
selected. To select points, click and drag the cursor clockwise along the piece
contour until the appropriate points are selected (always select points in a
clockwise direction).
To Align Points
• Click and drag to select the points to be aligned.
• From the EDIT menu choose ALIGN POINTS.
• When the Align Points dialog box displays, select the alignment
mode: Horizontal, Vertical, or enter a value in the Angle box to
align points on an angle.
• Click OK.
Set Point (0,0)
Select the Set (0,0) Point command to change the start measuring point for the
selected pattern piece in the working area. This command is used in
conjunction with the Coordinates command in the Display menu. This
command is particularly useful during the freehand editing of points with the
mouse because it shows the relative moving position of the cursor in any
direction.
! Tip: Use this command to add notches, add or move points, etc. with the
mouse by opening the Coordinates window in the Display menu.
To set (0,0) Point:
• Select the point to use as the new start point.
• From the PIECE menu choose SET (0,0) POINT.
! Note: Changing the 0,0 point causes the grid to align itself to the 0,0 point.
(To view the grid, check the Grid and Stripes option in the Options
pull down menu.)
Start Point
Select this command to define which grading point will become the first point.
The first grading point and the order of all other grading points is especially
important when using All Point (Global) Grading rules. To display point
numbers, select Point Numbers from the Display pull down menu.
! Note: While using the All Point Grading (Global) rules, point numbers play
an important role.
To Set the Start Point:
• Select the point to set as the first piece point.
• From the GRADING menu choose START POINT.
• The selected point is now the first point. Number one Global
Grading rules will apply to this point.
Move
This tool resembles a hand and is used to move pattern pieces around on the
working area.
To Move a Pattern Piece:
• Select the Move Piece tool.
• Click on the pattern piece to be moved. The piece is now

attached to the mouse and can be moved in any direction.
• Move the piece to the desired location.
• Click mouse button a second time to anchor the piece at the new
location.
! Tip: The keyboard shortcut for the Move Piece tool follows: Click the
pattern piece to be moved, then press the Space Bar once. The cursor
changes to a hand and the piece can be moved to the desired location.
Move Internal
The Move Internal tool is used to move any internal element, lines, buttons,
circles and texts on a pattern piece.
To Move an Internal Element on a Pattern Piece:
• Select the Move Internal command.
• Click on the internal element to be moved. The internal element

is now attached to the mouse and can be moved in any direction.
• Move the internal element to the desired location.
• Click mouse button a second time to anchor the piece at the new
location.
! Note: You can also copy internal elements to any location on the pattern by
using the Shift + move Internal tool.
Select Rectangle
Selects several internal elements at once (including the baseline).
• Select the piece with the internals to be highlighted.
• Select the Select Rectangle tool.
• Click with the mouse button and drag the cursor so that a
rectangle is defined around the desired internals.
• Lift the mouse button up to reveal which internals are

highlighted.
• The Copy / Paste Internals (Edit Menu) function can now be

performed.
Rotate Segment
Select the Rotate Segment tool to alter a section by rotating it around a pivot
point. The pivot point can be placed anywhere on the piece. You can use the
rotate segment for slash and spread purposes.
To Rotate a Segment:
• Select the Rotate Segment tool.
• Click the mouse at the location to place the pivot point. A small
red X displays to mark the spot.
• Click and drag the cursor in a clockwise direction to select the

segment to Rotate.
• Click on one of the selected points and drag in the desired

direction. The segment rotates around the pivot point as
it is dragged.
• Click the left mouse button to anchor the rotated segment.
The Rotate Angle dialog box displays.

• OPTIONAL: Enter new values to define specific measurements.
• Click OK.
! Tip: To change the cursor back to the normal pointer (arrow), click the
right mouse button and select Previous from the pop up menu.
Rotate Piece
Use the Rotate Piece command to rotate the entire piece around a pivot point.
To Rotate a Piece:
• Either select a point with the pointer, and then select the
ROTATE PIECE tool to establish a specific pivot point. Or,
simply select the ROTATE PIECE tool to rotate from the center
of the piece.
• The piece is now controlled by the cursor. Move the cursor to

the location where the piece is rotated as desired. Click the
mouse button.
• When the Rotate Internal Angel dialog box displays, click OK to

accept the rotation angle, or enter specific angle values for the
rotation.
! Note: Pieces are also rotated by selecting the Rotate option from the Piece
menu. (Refer to the Rotate command in the Piece Menu).
Flip Horizontal
This command flips the current pattern piece 180ø along the Y-axis (Back and
Forth).
Flip Vertical
This command flips the current pattern 180ø along the X-axis (Up and Down).
The Modify Toolbar
This toolbar is used to modify the piece or elements of the piece according to
the base line.
Rotate
Select the Rotate command to rotate a piece, internal element or baseline by a

specified number of degrees to the left or right.
To Rotate a Pattern Piece:
• Select the piece to rotate.
• From the PIECE menu choose ROTATE.
• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box displays,

check the Piece box.
• Enter the desired rotation value.
• Select the rotation direction, left or right.
! Note: The selected piece rotates each time the Left or Right button is
selected. The piece and the base line rotate as if they are locked
together.
To Rotate a Selected Element:
• Select an internal element (internal line, text, circle, etc.).
• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box is displayed,

check the Selected Element box.
• Enter the desired rotation angle.
! Note: The selected element rotates each time the Left button or Right
button is selected.
To Rotate Piece Over Base:
• Select the baseline or the piece.

check the Baseline box.

! Note: The outcome of Rotate when using the Baseline Only option is the
same regardless of whether the baseline or the entire piece is selected.
! Note: The piece rotates and the baseline remains in its original position
each time the Left or Right button is selected.
Rotate to Baseline
The Rotate to Initial Base line command is used to rotate the piece back to its
original positioning. The base line, or grain line, is a line (usually horizontal)
which ensures the placement of the piece is in the correct direction on the
screen and on the marker.
To Rotate to Initial Base line:
• Make sure everything is ungrouped.
• From the PIECE menu choose ROTATE TO INITIAL BASE

LINE.
• The pattern piece is returned to its original position, and all

internal elements are rotated along with the piece. This
command also sets the current base line to a horizontal position.
The ratio between the base line and the contour remains
constant.
Rotate Line Parallel to Segment
Use Base Parallel to Segment to realign the base line to another internal line or
to a line segment on the piece’s boundary.
To Make the Base Line Parallel to a Segment:
• Select the 2 point internal line or line segment to which the base
line will be aligned.
• From the PIECE menu, select BASE PARALLEL TO

SEGMENT.
• The base line realigns with the selected segment.
! Note: When using a line segment from the piece’s boundary, the direction
and sequence of choosing the two points is important affects the
direction of the base line. If the base line is placed outside the piece
after using this command, use the Make New Base line command to
move it inside the piece (See the following section).
New Base Line
This command is used to edit base lines that run off a piece. Sometimes base
lines move to the outside of the piece while working with the Cut tool or using
the Create Parallel to Segment command.
This command is useful if the base line was not digitized, or if two pieces were
joined resulting in an odd shaped piece. This command places the current base
line inside the piece close to the center.
! Note: The length of the base line may change during this process.
To Make a New Base line:
• From the PIECE menu choose MAKE NEW BASE LINE.
• The Base line is placed closer to the center of the pattern piece.
Mirror
This command creates a new piece exactly the same as the selected piece
except the new piece has two symmetrical halves made from the original
piece. Note that this command creates an exact symmetric duplicate, which is
the same on both sides.
To Mirror a Pattern Piece:
• Select two consecutive points by clicking on the first point, then

dragging (clockwise) to the next point.
• From the PIECE menu choose MIRROR.
• A new piece is created which is symmetrically placed according

to the selected points. The new piece displays in the furthermost
right-hand box in the Piece Display Bar. See the diagram below.
The Darts Toolbar
This toolbar is used to create, multiply, copy and paste, close and fix darts.
Create Dart
The Crate Dart tool crates a close dart.

• From the DART menu chose CREATE DART.
• The Dart Attributes Dialog Box Appears.
• When the Dart Attributes dialog box displays, select the desired
options.
• Click OK.
Multiply Dart
The Multiply Darts command creates several darts on a selected segment at the
same time.
To create a multidart:
• Click and drag to the points on a segment where the darts are to
be created.
• From the Darts menu select Open Multiple Darts.
• The Open MultiDart dialog box will display.
• Enter the desired multiple dart information and click OK.
• The darts will be created on the first and last selected points. If
more than 2 darts are created, they will be equally distributed
between the points.
The below dialog will be displayed so you can make any specifications that
will apply to all new darts.
Copy Dart
Use the Copy Dart command to copy selected Dart to the clipboard. Then use
the Paste Dart command to paste the copied Dart into the same DSN file or to
different DSN file. The copied selection can continue to be pasted until
something else is placed onto the clipboard.
• Select the Dart to be copied.
• From the DART menu choose COPY DART.
• Open the layout where the object is to be pasted.

• From the Dart menu choose PASTE DART. The selected

objects is placed into the file and displayed in the working area
Paste Dart
Use the Paste Dart command to paste the last dart cut or copied onto the
clipboard into the current DSN file or into a different .DSN file. The
cut/copied selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placed
onto the clipboard.
To Paste a Dart into a DSN file:
• Cut or copy the selected Dart by choosing the appropriate

command from the Dart menu.
• Open the layout where the object is to be pasted
• From the DART menu choose PASTE DART. The selected Dart
is placed into the piece
Close Dart
The Close Darts command closes the selected dart(s).
• Select the apex of the dart to close.
• From the Darts menu select Close Darts. The pattern will adjust
as if the dart was physically closed.
• To reopen the dart, select the Undo tool.

Fix Dart
The Fix Darts command fixes an existing dart by changing the direction of the
dart apex.
! Note: It is important to note the four options in this dialog box to turn the
dart triangle to and even sided triangle.
The General Toolbar
This toolbar is used for most general functions of the software such as
zooming in and out, undo and redo functions as well as cutting and pasting.
Zoom In
The Zoom tool is used to display a selected area in a maximized view.
To Zoom In on an Area of the Screen:
• Click the Zoom tool.
• Click and drag a box around the area to zoom.
! Tip: To return to the normal view of the screen, use the Zoom All tool
Zoom Out
The Zoom tool is used to Zoom Out After zooming in to get a full Image
display.
Click On The Zoom Out Tool several times to achieve the correct zoom.
! Note: You can use the Zoom Out Tool also for zooming In, by holding the
Shift key while clicking on the Zoom Out Tool.
Zoom All
The Zoom all Tool is used To achieve the max possible view of All the pieces
in the Working Area.
! Note: Use Zoom All + ALT key, for zooming selected piece only.
Zoom Real Scale
Views a selection up close by clicking on it to receive the maximum “filling”

when the piece is edited.
• Select the Zoom Real Scale tool.
• With the Zoom Real Scale tool, click on the area to zoom in.
• The desired area will then center on the working area.
. ! Tip: To return to the normal view of the screen, use the Zoom All tool.
Separate
Use this tool to perform a zoom on a selected piece while leaving the rest of
the pieces off the working area.
• Select the Separate tool.
• With the Separate tool, click on the piece to zoom in on.
• A dialog box will display to Replace Old (Yes) or Remove

Current (No) of the other pieces on the working area
Undo (Ctrl+Z)
Use the Undo tool to reverse the most recent action performed in the design
file. The Undo tool may be selected up to 20 times undoing the 20 most recent
operations, back to adding a piece to the working area. Undo does not work to
undo the loading of the file.
! Tip: Press the Control key and the Z key to undo.

! Note: Refer to the Edit Chapter for more information
Redo (Ctrl+Y)
Use the Redo tool to reverse any operation changed by the Undo command.
Continue to choose the Redo tool until all of the “undone” operations have
been reversed.
!Tip: Press the Control key and the Y key to redo.

! Note: Refer to the Edit Chapter for more information.
Cut (Ctrl + X)
Cut is used to cut a pattern piece from a file. The cut piece is transferred to the
clipboard and remains on the clipboard until another item is placed on the
clipboard. This tool is often used to cut one piece out of an existing design file
and paste it into another design file.
Copy (Ctrl + C)
Copy is used to copy a pattern piece from a file. The Copied piece is
transferred to the clipboard and remains on the clipboard until another item is
placed on the clipboard. This tool is often used to copy one piece from an
existing design file and pastes it into another design file.
Paste (Ctrl + V)
Paste is used to paste an item from the clipboard into another file. The Paste
command is used as a secondary step to either the Copy command or the Cut
command.
Swap Pieces
Swap pieces exchanges a piece on the working area for the original piece in
the piece bar. This feature is used to compare the original piece (the piece in
the piece bar) with the piece that is being changed (the piece in the working
area) during the editing process.
Remove Current
Remove Current removes piece in the working area without updating the
original pieces. Use this option to clear the working area of all pieces without
keeping any edits.
! Note: Refer to the Clear Pieces section in the Edit Chapter for more
information.
Make New
Make New removes pieces from the working area and simultaneously creates
a new piece in the Piece Display Bar of pieces that were previously in the
working area. However, if a piece is placed in the working area and changed,
the Make New command will create a new piece which contains the changes.
Use this option to clear the working area and create New pieces. (See diagrams
below).
! Tip: To place pieces that have been cleared back into the working area, use
the Undo command from the Edit menu.
Replace Old
Replace Old replaces the piece in the piece bar with the current piece on the
working area. Use this option to clear the working area of a selected piece
while updating the original piece with the newly edited piece. Using the
Replace Old tool keeps the edits made to the selected piece.
! Note: Refer to the Clear Pieces section in the Edit Chapter for more
information.
The Advanced Toolbar
The Advanced Toolbar consists of tools used for Advanced Features in PDS,
specifically, the Custom Fit Feature and the Fabric Feature. The Fabric feature
is covered in the Piece chapter and the Custom Fit feature is covered in the
Design chapter.
Hide Fabric Pattern
Hide Fabric Pattern hides a selected fabric pattern from display on the screen.
Show Fabric Pattern
Show Fabric Pattern shows a selected fabric pattern on the screen. The fabric
displays on the entire working area of the screen.
Clip Fabric Pattern
Clip Fabric Pattern shows the selected fabric only on the pieces that are
displayed in the working area of the screen.
Show/Hide Control Points
This tool toggles between displaying the control points of a piece and not
displaying the control points of a piece. Fabric appearance is cleaner when the
control points are hidden from view.
The Dimensional Toolbar
The Custom Fit Toolbar gives you the right tools to take almost any kind of
garment and create a set of parameters, that by definition, if these parameters
will be changed, the specific garment will fit any customer measurements.
Horizontal Measurement Tool
The Horizontal tool is used to fix the Horizontal measurement between pair of
points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of
numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:
Side_Seam+1 and means that the distance is the side-seam body measurement
plus one inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be
points of the external contour (the current version supports custom fitting of
external contour only, future versions will support internals as well).
In order to create a Horizontal Measurement:
Select the Horizontal tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2nd point (one by
one, the order is not important,).
Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and click again. An
Edit Dimension dialog will open.
In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required Expression.
After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule will appear on
the screen.
You can also take the Horizontal rule tool and add a new rule between points
which sets the vertical distance between them to 0.0 as they should align (pay
attention that we set the Horizontal distance to 0.0 and not the vertical
distance).
Vertical Measurement Tool
The vertical tool is used to fix the vertical measurement between pair of points
to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of
BACK_SHOULDER/2+1 and means that the distance is a half of the shoulder
to shoulder body measurement plus one inch. The points must belong to the
same pattern and can only be points of the external
Contour (the current version supports custom fitting of external contour only,
future versions will support internals as well).
In order to create a Vertical Measurement:
Select the vertical tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2nd point (one by
one, the order is not important).
Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and click again. An
Edit Dimension dialog will open.
In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required Expression.
After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule will appear on
the screen.
You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rule between points
attention that we set the vertical distance to 0.0 and not the horizontal
distance).
Diagonal Measurement Tool
The Diagonal Measurement tool is used to fix the diagonal measurement

between a pair of points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any
expression made of numbers and body measurements, for example, an
expression can be: SHOULDER/2 and means that the distance is the shoulder
measurement divided by 2. The points must belong to the same pattern and
can only be points of the external contour.
In order to create a Diagonal Measurement:
• Select the Diagonal tool from the Dimension toolbar.
• Click on the first point, and then click on the last point.
• Drag the mouse to the place on the screen where the rule should
appear. Click again.
• An Edit Dimension dialog box will open. In the Expression

filed of this dialog, enter the required Expression.
• After the Expression has been added, click OK. The new rule
will appear on the screen.
Curve Measurement Tool
The Curve Measurement tool is used to fix a curve measurement between a

pair of points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression
made of numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:
ARMHOLE + ½ and means that the distance is the armhole measurement plus
½ an inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be points
of the external contour.
In order to create a Curve Measurement:
• Select the Curve tool from the Dimension toolbar.
• Click on the first point, and then click on the last point.
• Drag the mouse to the place on the screen where the rule should
appear. Click again.
• An Edit Dimension dialog box will open. In the Expression

filed of this dialog, enter the required Expression.
• After the Expression has been added, click OK. The new rule
The Accessories Toolbar
This toolbar contains a group of tools that you can use to manipulate pieces as
well as its segments.
Walk
The Walk tool is used to walk two pieces against each other. This tool is used
after the pieces to be walked have been locked together on a shared point using
the Move (hand) tool.
! Tip: To back up one step, use the Undo command in the Edit menu or use
Ctrl + Z.
! Note: Refer to the Piece chapter for a detailed description of the Walk
feature.
Measure
Select the Measure tool to measure distances between any two points. The
points can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal.
To Measure Distances:
• Select the Measure tool.

• Click the point to begin the measurement.
• Move the cursor to the point where the measurement is to end

and click the mouse.
• The All Dimension Values dialog box displays showing the

measurement.
• Click OK.
Trace Piece
Select the Trace tool to create a new pattern piece out of two or more pieces
laying on top of each other, thereby creating a conjunction of the pieces. This
tool traces the intersecting lines of the pieces in order to create a new piece.
(See the diagram below).
To Create a New Piece with the Trace Tool:
• Place the pieces to be joined overlapping in the working area.
• Select the TRACE tool.
• Click the mouse button on any point of the new perimeter. The
whole piece becomes highlighted in red.
• Click the next point in a clockwise direction on the intersecting

segment from the second piece. The PDS software generates a
new piece from the intersections of the original pieces
• Once all segments are traced, shown by the new form

highlighted in red, click the Trace tool on a blank area of the
working screen.
• The newly created piece is displayed in the Piece Display Bar as

an individual piece.
Join Pieces
The Join Piece tool is used to join two different pieces together as one along a
shared segment. If the two pieces have the same length and angle, they are
joined perfectly. If they do not have the same length and angle, and if the line
segments are not parallel, the pieces are joined, but their junction is not
perfect. It may be necessary to edit the intersecting lines on the newly joined
piece. Patterns may be cut multiple times and rejoined.
To Join Pieces:
• Select the Join Pieces tool.
• Click within one piece, near the segment where the pieces are to
be joined.
• Drag the cursor to the other pattern (crossing the common

segments of both patterns).
• Click the mouse button a second time.
• When the join Pieces Alongside dialog displays, click OK to

accept the joining.
! Note: It is recommended to join two pieces at the beginning or end of a

segment. One point will always be shared by both pieces.
Join Pieces Dialog Box:
To join pieces into one single piece, unchecked the "Move Pieces Along Side
Only option
! Tip: Since the join pieces tool is joining two segments even if they do not
have the same length, the direction of pointing is important. The first
clicked piece becomes stationary and the second piece will move
towards the first one. The joining point is the closest point right to the
line that is created by the join tool.
Delete Seam:
Select this option to delete the seam between the joined pieces, making the
joined pieces one individual piece.
Move Piece Along Side Only:
Select this option to move the pieces next to each other only, without deleting
the seam in between the pieces. The two pieces remain separate individual
pieces.
Cut
Use the Cut tool to cut a piece. The Cut tool draws a line across the piece and
splits the piece along the line. The line may be a simple, two point’s line. Or it
may be a multi point curved line. The PDS software has the ability to
automatically grade the piece along the cut if grading is necessary. This
eliminates figuring out difficult grading values.
To Cut a Piece:
• Select the Cut tool.
• Click the mouse on the boundary of the piece where the cut is to
begin.
• When the Move dialog box displays, either enter values to

specify the exact location of the first point, or press OK or the
Enter key to bypass this dialog box.
• Click the mouse where the next point of the cut line is to be
placed. Repeat steps #3 and step #4 until the cut line reaches
another boundary line of the piece.
• When the dialog box displays asking, “Do you want to align
cutting by base size?”select NO to automatically grade along the
cut, or select YES not to grade the cut.
• When the Seam Attributes dialog box displays, enter the desired
seam width and corner types
• Click OK.
! Tip: To create a curved cut line, hold the Shift key down when clicking the
mouse to select a point.
! Tip: If you need to cut the piece along a known angle you can use the F2
key just after you clicked the first (start) point of the piece.
Draft
Use the Draft tool to draft multi point internal lines.
To Draft a Line:
• Select the Draft tool.
• Click the mouse anywhere on the selected piece.
• When the Add A Contour Relative To Current Point dialog box

displays, enter specific values for exact placement of the point
or select OK to bypass this dialog.
• Repeat Steps #2 and #3 until the desired line is constructed.
• To finish drafting the line, click the right mouse button and
select Finish Draft from the pop up menu.
! Tip: To create a curved cut line, hold the Shift key down when clicking the
mouse to select a point.
Cut Along Internal
Use Cut Along Internal to cut (split) a piece along an existing internal line.
The internal line has to start and end exactly on the pieces external perimeter
line.
To Cut Along an Internal:
• Select the Cut Along Internal tool.
• Click the mouse somewhere along the internal line where the
piece is to be cut.
• When the dialog box displays asking, “Do you want to align
cutting by base size?, select NO to automatically grade along the
cut, or select YES not to grade the cut.
• When the Seam Attributes dialog box displays, enter the desired
seam width and corner types.
• Click OK.
Trace Segments
Trace Segments is used to trace segments from an existing piece in order to

create a new piece. For example, this tool is often used to create facing and
lining pattern pieces. It is possible to use the trace tool to create a new piece
from two existing pieces.
To Trace Segments:
• Select the Trace Segments tool.
• Click the mouse on each line segment from which to create the
new piece. Select line segments in the clockwise direction. Each
segment highlights in red during the selection process and an
‘X’ mark will appear on the next grading point.
• When all segments are selected (a closed contour shape has been
defined), a dialog box displays asking, “Finish form contour?”.
Click YES to complete the tracing procedure. Click NO to
continue tracing, or click CANCEL to cancel the procedure
entirely.
• The new piece appears on top of the original piece. Use the
Move (hand) Tool to move the new piece away from the original
piece.
! Note: When you use the draft tool and you want to zoom out, click on the
mouse right button. From the menu that will appear, click on “Select
Tool” with the mouse left button + Ctrl key!
! Note: To delete the line, select the line with the pointer tool and press the
Delete key. Or, select the line with the pointer tool and select Delete
Internal Elements from the Edit menu. Another way to delete the
line is to use the Undo tool, the Undo command in the Edit menu, or
press Ctrl + Z.
Build Piece
Build piece is used to build pieces from an existing pieces in order to create a.
pattern pieces. It is possible to use the trace tool to create a new piece from
two existing pieces.
To Built piece:
• Select the built piece tool.
• Click the mouse on the first area for the new piece. The closed
counter will be highlight.
• Click the mouse on the next area to be joined to the new piece
• The counter of the new piece will highlight.
• In order to place the build piece click on the selected area again.
• The new piece appears on top of the original piece. Use the
Move (hand) Tool to move the new piece away from the original
piece.
Fold Out
Use the Fold out tool to fold out part of a pattern piece. This toll is commonly
used to make pattern pieces with attached facings.
To Use the Fold Out Tool:
• Create an internal line on the pattern piece using the Make

Parallel command in the Design Menu. (see the Design
Chapter).
• Click on the Fold Out tool.
• Click on the mirror line of the pattern piece. (see the diagram
below).
• Click on the newly added internal fold line.
• Delete unnecessary internal lines. (See the diagram below to

review the new pattern piece with the fold out facing).
Fold In Tool
Allows the user to fold the patterns on a selected line in order to check
symmetric pieces.
• Select the Fold In icon.
• Highlight the segment(s) to fold in by clicking and dragging in a

clockwise manner.
• The Move Point dialog box will appear in order to confirm the
end of the segment.
• Click OK.
!Note: Use the Fold Out tool in order to unfold the piece
Flip Along
The Flip along tool is used to manipulate a pattern piece on the screen by
flipping it along a selected line segment.
To Use the Flip Along Tool:
• Click on the Flip Along tool.

• Click on the segment where the piece is to be flipped along.
• Click on the center of the piece.
Swap Segment
Allows the user to swap between internal segment and external segment.
• Select the Swap Segment tool.
• Click on the first point of the external segment.
• Click on the last point of the external segment.
• Click on the first point of the internal segment.
• Click on the last point of the internal segment.
• The Swap Segments of Contours dialog box will appear. Select

the desired information.
First Points Swap/Last Points Swap

Substitute – Switches the internal line with the external line.
Extrapolation – Keeps the internal line an internal, makes the external line an
internal, and draws external lines from their end points until the lines cross.
Choose Segments Dialog Box
The Choose Swap Segments dialog box allows the option to shorten or
lengthen the selected line. Contour Segment is the external line. Segment to
Swap is the internal line.
• Select Choose Segments in the Swap Segments of Contours

dialog box.
• Under the Point section, choose which point to move.
• Click the Shift Point buttons in order to move the selection of

the line.
• Click OK.
The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar:
The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar is a default template toolbar that loads
with the software. Rectangles, triangles, polygons, and circles can be created
from this toolbar.
To Create a Piece from the Template Tool Bar:
• Select the desired piece from the Template Tool Bar.
• On the working screen, click and drag the mouse cursor to

expand the piece to the desired width and length.
• By holding down the Ctrl key while clicking and dragging, the
segment lengths will display on the working screen.
• By holding down the Shift key while clicking and dragging, the
piece will grow proportionally.
• After placing the piece on the working screen, place the cursor
on the edge of the piece until it becomes a two-sided arrow.
• Click and drag the cursor to display the Scale Dialog box in
order to scale the piece to the appropriate size.
• Click OK.
The Template Toolbar:

Template Toolbar can be created from the template libraries to display those
pieces in the template file.
To Create a Piece from the Template Toolbar:
• Select the desired piece from the Template Tool Bar.
• On the working screen, click and drag the mouse cursor to

expand the piece to the desired width and length.
• By holding down the Ctrl key while clicking and dragging, the
segment lengths will display on the working screen.
• By holding down the Shift key while clicking and dragging, the
piece will grow proportionally.
• After placing the piece on the working screen, place the cursor
on the edge of the piece until it becomes a two-sided arrow.
• Click and drag the cursor to display the Scale Dialog box in
order to scale the piece to the appropriate size.
• Click OK.
Chapter 3: File Menu 125
Chapter 3: File Menu
The commands available in the File Menu are used for bringing files into and
out of the PDS program. The File menu is also used to print, plot, and digitize.
To select one of the File menu commands, select the command in the pull
down menu and press the left mouse button, or use the shortcut listed in
parentheses next to the command in the pull down menu. Commands may also
be selected by using the corresponding tool icon displayed on the Standard
Tool Bar.
New (Ctrl+N):
The New command is used when creating a new style (DSN) file. A DSN file
contains all the patterns necessary to make one complete item. Pieces are
added to a style file by digitizing pieces, drafting from scratch, or merging and
editing pieces from existing style files. The number of pieces in a DSN file is
limited only by the amount of memory available on the computer.
To Start a New File:
• From the File menu select New, press CTRL+N, or click on the
New icon from the toolbar. The Make Rectangle dialog box is
displayed.
• Enter the desired values for the length and width of the rectangle.
! Note: The Cancel button may be used to bypass the Make Rectangle
dialog box.
• Click OK.
The new piece is displayed in the Piece Display Bar. The new DSN file is
“Untitled.” To save the file, choose the Save or Save As commands from the
File menu.
! Note: Only one DSN file can be opened at a time. The last 4 opened files
are displayed at the bottom of the File menu.
Open (Ctrl+O)
Use the Open command to open an existing style (DSN) file. A DSN file
contains all the pattern pieces necessary to make one complete item.
No more than one file may be opened at a time. If a DSN file is currently open
and the Open command is chosen, the Save Current Changes dialog box is
displayed. Select Yes to save the changes and close the current file or select
No to close the file without saving any of the changes.
! Note: The last directory where style files have been saved becomes the
default directory for the Open and Save commands.
To Open a File:
• From the File menu select Open, press CTRL+O or click on the
Open icon on the tool bar. The Open dialog box is displayed.
• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive and/or directory to find

the desired file.
• Select the desired file from the File List dialog box.
• Click OK.
! Tip: Double click on the file name to quickly open the file instead of using
the OK button.
Open Dialog Box:
File List and File Name Dialog Box
The File List field displays the DSN files that exist in the current drive and
directory. If there is more information than fits in the box, use the scroll bars
to scroll up and down the list. The File Name field remains empty until a file is
selected. Once a file is selected, the selected file is displayed in the File Name
field and if available a preview is displayed in the Preview field to the right.
! Note: You can also open OptiTex Modulate files (*. cus) directly from
OptiTex PDS open dialog box, just change the file type to *.cus!
Drive and Directory
To change to another directory, click on the arrow to the left of the Look In
field to display a list of the directories or click on the Up One Level icon to
move up one folder. If there is more information than what fits in the field, use
the scroll bars to scroll up and down the list.
Options
The Open button loads the selected file, whereas the Cancel button exits the
Open dialog box without loading a file. If running Windows for Workgroups,
click on the Network button to display the Connect to Network Drive dialog
box.
Merge Style File

Use the Merge DSN File command to load an existing style file into the
current style file.
The merged style file receives all the size characteristics of the already open
style file. If the merged file does not have the same number of sizes or the
same size names as the open file, the merged file automatically takes on the
sizes and size names of the current DSN file (regardless of base size or other
parameters).
To Merge Files:
• From the File menu select Merge Style Files. The Open dialog
box is displayed.
• Select the desired file from the File List box.
• Click Open.
! Note: The number of pattern pieces in any Style file is limited only by the
amount of memory available on the computer.
There are cases when the merged file creates strange grading on a single piece
in the working area. A dotted rectangle displays over the top of the piece with
a small black dot. Simply reset the grading on the piece to zero (0) and begin
the grading process again.
To Reset the Grading on a Piece:
1. From the View menu select Grading Table.
2. Move the cursor to the top of the X column until the standard
select tool (arrow pointer) changes to a black downward arrow.
Now click the left mouse button to select the entire X column.
• From the Grading Menu select Zero X Grading. All values in the
X column should now be zero. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Y
column, except select Zero Y Grading.
• Use the copy and paste commands in the grading table to change
the values on all grading points to zero 0.
• Re-grade the piece.
! Note: Grading commands are covered in detail in the Grading menu.

How to use the "Merge Style Files" dialog box:
The merge style files dialog enables the user to select the desired size list
according to the current size list and the merges size list:
There are three options:
• Use Current Sizes List - Choose this option when you want uses
the current lists (the left column).
• Use Merge Sizes List - Choose this option when you want uses
the merge lists (the right column).
• Merge both Sizes List-Choose this option when you want to work
with both size lists.
Base Size:
The base size is marked with "*" in both size list current and merge list, you
can't select a different base size (to change the base size use "Sizes" dialog in
Grading menu).
Variation grading:
The "Delete variation grading" is enabled only if one of the style files (current
or the merge) has variation grading, only then can you choose to delete sizes:
History
The History command enables the user to save additional information with
each Style file. This information enables the user to follow up or to retrieve the
positioning of a file at a specific point of time. This allows the company to
create a History Log for each style and tracks the changes to a file according to
dates. Two options are offered. One enables the user to add text description
comments to the file, the second option enables the user to make a file
generation with the ‘Save Version’ command allowing the possibility in the
future to retrieve the file layout at certain stages of the design process.
To Enable the History Command:
• Select History from the File menu and activate (check)

Automatically Save History on Close.
• Click the Close button to leave the History dialog box.
• The Save History dialog will open on every Save command.

Comment may be typed in addition to saving the file with all the
information as it is at the moment of the Save command.
To Save History:
• The History dialog box is displayed when a file is saved.
• The date and user name is automatically noted.

• Type comments in the comment field.
• OPTIONAL: Save graphic information by activating (checking)

the Store Version field.
• Click OK.
At any point of time History may be selected from the File Menu to view any
comments attached to the file. Delete messages by clicking the Delete button.
! Note: If a specific layout is saved with the file, the size of the file is going
to be much larger and might cause a delay during File Open. Do
not save information that will not be used, or delete it before the
final save.
File Finder
Find and Update command
This application finds style (DSN) files and pieces in OptiTex PDS. After
finding, the file can be opened or updated according to the style file.
In order to use the Find and Update application select the File Finder
command from the File menu.
! Note: The Find and Update application is also available in OptiTex Mark.
Find
After setting all search parameters, click on the Find button. The found items
will display at the bottom of the dialog box. There are two items that can be
found – Style Files or Pieces in a Style File.
These two choices affect what will display in the list of found items at the
bottom of the dialog box. For example, a search for pieces with a name
beginning with “BA” with the selected item to find as Piece, will result in a list
of all files containing pieces with a name beginning with “BA” . The same file
might be listed a few times, because it has several pieces beginning with a
matching name. If the item to find is a Style File, the file will display only
once even though it has several pieces with a matching name.
! Note: The file finder supports “Regular Expression” (*.*)

Find Tab:
The main function of the Find Tab is to look for Style (DSN) files according to
the OptiTex application it is launched from. When working from the PDS
application, it will manage Style Files and Pieces within the Style Files. While
looking for a style file in the PDS application, the Find dialog box enables the
user to input further search filters, such as Style name, Piece name, Material
type, Piece Description, etc.
! Note: Click on the small arrow with the mouse left click to open a drop list
of the previous fields names or use the mouse right button to open
utility box for editing the previous fields names list:
Search Options:
Style File
Type a file name to search for specific Style Files by file name.
Look in
This field defines the scope of the search to specific directories or sub
directories.
Show file name only
Once the Show File Name Only is checked, the finder will look only for
*.DSN file. Otherwise, when unchecked, the finder will look for pieces from
*.DSN files.
! Note: Whenever this command is unchecked, “Replace Piece” and

“Delete Piece” in the Update property page will be enabled and vice
versa.
Look in sub folders
This option extends the search to sub folders.
Filters:
Piece Name filter
Use this option as a filter. Type the piece name to limit the search to files that
contain a specific piece.
Piece Code filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a piece code to limit the search to files that
contain a specific piece code.
Piece Description filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a piece description to limit the search to files
that contain a specific piece description.
Material filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a material to limit the search to files that
contain a specific material.
Style Name filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a Style Name to limit the search to a specific
style name.
Match case
When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the
case of the characters in the piece name, style name, file name and material
exactly. Otherwise, the command will finds files with either uppercase or
lowercase characters that match the characters in the piece name, style file
name and material strings.
Match whole word only
When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the
specified piece name, style name, file name and material with no extra
characters. Otherwise, the command matches any string, whether it is a
fragment of a larger string or not.
Options:
Find now
Click this button to activate the search process.
Open file
Click this button to open the selected files in the OptiTex PDS program.
Select All
Click this button to select all the files in the current file list.
Stop
Click this button to halt the search operation and return control to the user.
Maximize
Click this button to enlarge the Find & Update dialog box to maximum size.
Cancel
Click this button to quit Find and return to the host application.
! Note: All the parameters entered during the search are saved in the ini
file. This allows you to utilize existing data without having to retype
the data.
Select Tab:
The Select Tab enables you to select and mark the chosen or current piece to
copy or replace in other files. It is also possible to click the Get Style File
button to access the file that is currently marked in the search list (It will be in
gray color). The piece names and pieces will be displayed. The Open button
will prompt the standard Open dialog to open a file in the host application
(PDS). The pieces names and pieces will display. The Open option enables
you to open any file, even if it is not in the File list!
Options:
Get Style File
Click this button to load the selected style file from the file list. The selected
file will be the source file.
Open
Click this button to open a style file.
Update Tab
The Update tab is used in connection with the Select tab. Files may be
updated by adding pieces to a file, replacing a piece in a file, or updating an
existing piece in a file. Multiple files may be selected from the File list to be
updated.
To Add a Piece:
• First select the target files in the File list.
• Select a piece in the source file by using the Select Tab.
• Click on the Add Piece button.
• The piece from the source file is added to the target file or files in
the File list.
Repeat as above for Replace Piece and Delete Piece clicking on the
appropriate buttons.
! Note: The Update tab can not be used until a source file has been chosen
using the Select Tab.
Add Piece
Click on this button to add the selected piece in the Select Tab to the current
style file, selected in the File list.
Replace Piece
Click on this button to replace the selected piece in the Select Tab to the
current style file, selected in the File list.
Delete Piece
Click on this button to delete the piece selected in the file selected in the File
list.
Report Tab
The Report Tab prepares a report describing the contents of one or more DSN
in ASCII (text) format. This report can be imported into applications such as
Word, Excel, Lotus 1-2-3 and Access, for editing and/or printing.
Append File
When the Append File checkbox is selected, the report will be added to the
end of an existing report file, rather than create a new file.
Report File Name
This field is used to specify a new file name for the created report, or choose
an existing file name for appending the report.
Report to Data Base
Click this button to create a report from the currently selected style file and
then, save it under the specified file name.
Save
The Save command saves the file displayed on screen with the current file
name in the specified drive and directory. To ensure that a file is saved with
the correct options, use the Save As command to save the file the first time.
The last directory where design files have been saved becomes the default
drive for the Open and Save commands.
! Note: The DSN extension is added to the file name automatically.

To Save a File:
• From the File menu choose Save or click the Save icon on the tool
bar.
! Tip: It is a good habit to periodically save files while working. Use the
Save command or Ctrl + S every ten to twenty minutes to prevent
loss of data in the event that the computer improperly shuts down
while working.
Save As
The Save As command is used to save a file for the first time to ensure the
current file name and paths are specified. Save As can also be used to save the
current file under a different name. For example, if a user wants to create a
new design based on an existing design, the existing design may be saved as a
different name. The original design file still exists under its original name and
a replica exists under a new name.
To Save As:
• From the File menu select Save As. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
• OPTIONAL: Select the desired drive and directory to save the

file.
• In the File Name field, type the name of the file.
! Note: The .DSN extension is automatically added to the file name. File
names are limited to eight alphanumerical characters or less.
• Click SAVE.
If the name of the file already exists, a dialog box will ask to overwrite the file.
Click Yes to overwrite, click No to enter a new name.
! Note: You now have the option to save the file in Version 7.3 format!
Save As Dialog Box:
! Note: You can save DSN files in OptiTex Modulate format (CUS
extension) by changing the saving files types to *.CUS
Save In
The Save In field lists the current drives and directories that may be selected.
To change to another directory, double click the first option (usually C:\) and a
list of directories will display. If there is more information than what fits in the
current box, use the scroll bars to scroll up and down the list.
File Name and File List Box
The File Name box field remains empty until a file name is typed. The file
type will default to DSN unless a different file format has been selected. The
File List field displays the DSN files that exist in the current directory. If there
is more information than what fits in the current file list box, use the scroll
bars to scroll up and down the list.
Save As Type
This drop down field determines what types of files will display. This option
defaults to .dsn in PDS.
! Note: SGS software only opens DSN files. To open any other type of file,
the Merge or Import commands must be used.
Digitize
Digitizing is the process of using a digitizing tablet and cursor to enter a
handmade paper pattern into the computer. A digitizing tablet is an electronic
board. SGS software supports many different brands and sizes of digitizing
tablets.
SGS software has drivers for several main digitizer formats on the market
today, including Summagraphic, Numonics, Calcomp, and GTCO.
There are 3 main steps to configuring Digitizers for use with the SGS
software: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring the serial port
communications through Windows, 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGS
software.
1. Configuring the Tablet
There are two main modes: ASCII mode and binary mode. Large scale
digitizers with 16-button cursor are in ASCII mode. Small digitizers, usually
with 4-button cursor, use BINARY mode.
The internal working units for the digitizer are defined as inches, which is
usually set as Default by the manufacturer. The digitizing mode for all
digitizers is Point Mode.
Enable the <CR> and Line Feed. Digitizer should be set up in Remote mode.
2. Configuring the Serial Port Communications through Windows
When using a digitizer set up in ASCII mode, the communication parameters

are 9600, E, 7, 2.
When using a digitizer set up in Binary mode, the communication parameters

are 9600, O, 8, 1 or 9600, N, 8, 1.
3. Configuring The Digitizer in SGS software
Once the Digitizer is configured and the serial port communications have been
adjusted, the next step is to configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.
• Start the SGS PDS, or Digitize program.
• From the FILE menu, choose DIGITIZER SETUP. The

DIGITIZER SETUP Dialog Box will display.
• Choose the following settings:
Digitizer Type= Calcomp
Panel= This setting is optional.
Communication Port= port to which the digitizer is connected.
Resolution= 1000
16 Button cursor= checked when using a 16 button digitizer
Tablet Size = check the SET option. Enter the actual working area of
the tablet
• Click OK.
Tips
It is recommended that SGS software users purchase a 16 button digitizing

cursor to speed the digitizing process.
SGS software uses its own internal digitizer drivers. Do not use the drivers
provided by the digitizer manufacturers when using SGS software.
The windows program Terminal can be used to check that the comport and
digitizer are communicating. When using the terminal program, the digitizer
coordinates should display on the screen. The digitizer manufacturers usually
provide a program to check that the comport and digitizer are communicating.
Digitizer installation:
Make sure your digitizer is installed and turned on. SGS supplies the
installation software and driver for all digitizers it supports. Do not install
software, which comes with your digitizer!
Using the 40” X 60” Digitizing Tablet
This tablet sometimes requires additional configuration processes. Test to see

if the digitizer is working by opening the SGS digitizing screen in the PDS
program by selecting Digitize from the File menu. Try to digitize a basic
shape using the #1 and #2 button (see diagram below). Tape an 8.5 X 11”
sheet of paper to the tablet for testing purposes. If nothing appears on the
digitizing screen on the computer while digitizing a basic shape, follow the
steps below.
! Note: Make sure the 16-button cursor is activated before attempting to

digitize. The cursor is active when the proximity light is yellow-
green at the top center of the tablet. If this light is red, place the
cursor on the tablet and press the #1 button. The red light should
now be yellow-green.
The shape that you are attempting to digitize should appear on the digitizing
screen on the computer as you digitize each point.
• Insert the Numonics diskette into drive A:
• Type in A: and press <enter>.
• Type CD UTILITY and press <enter>.
• Type ASC COM1:9600,E,7,2 <enter>. *If the digitizer is plugged

into COM2, use COM2 in place of COM1.
• Place the 16 button cursor on the digitizer tablet and press the #1
key. The Proximity light at the top center of the tablet should turn
from red to yellow-green
• Touch any letter key on the keyboard.
• Move the 16-button cursor around on top of the tablet. The

computer screen should scroll a list of coordinates as the cursor
moves. If the coordinates appear on the computer screen, the
board should now work with SGS software.
• Exit the Numonics program. Use the backslash (\) key.
• Open the PDS program and open the digitizing screen. Try to
digitize a basic shape using the #1 and the #2 keys on the 16
button cursor.
• If the board still does not respond, repeat the section above
“Configuring the Tablet.”
Attaching the Digitizer Panel:
The digitizer panel contains all the piece attributes and information found in
the Piece Info dialog box. Using the Digitizer panel eliminates the need to
enter the relevant attributes and information into the Piece Info dialog box.
The user can customize the digitizer panel. See Edit Panel found in the
Digitizer Setup dialog box.
• Tape a print out of the Digitizer Panel onto the Digitizing Tablet.
The digitizer panel can be printed using Edit Panel found in the
Digitizer Setup dialog box.
• Select Digitize from the File menu. The digitizer dialog box
displays.
• Using the mouse, select Panel Pos from the digitizer dialog box.
• Place the digitizer cursor in the lower left-hand corner of the

digitizer panel and press button number 1.
• Place the digitizer cursor in the upper right hand corner of the
digitizer panel and press button number 1.
A gray rectangular area will display in the digitizer dialog box; this area
illustrates the panel position on the digitizer tablet.
Attaching the digitizer menu:
If the digitizer cursor has only four buttons, a digitizer menu may help if it is
attached to the digitizer tablet. The digitizer menu enables the user to define
the location of various point types, notches, buttons, internal lines, etc. When
using a sixteen-button cursor, the digitizer menu is not needed.
• Make a rectangle with 11 equally sized rows. The rectangle

(digitizer menu) should consist of the following 11 rows; Point,
Grade, Notch, Button, Line, Circle, Grd/Crv, Ngrd/Crv, Dart,
Contour and Baseline.
• Tape the newly created Digitizer Menu onto the Digitizing Tablet.
• Select Digitize from the File menu. The digitizer dialog box is
displayed.
• Using the mouse, select Menu Pos from the digitizer dialog box.
• Place the digitizer cursor in the lower left-hand corner of the

digitizer menu and press button number 1.
• Place the digitizer cursor in the upper right hand corner of the
digitizer menu and press button number 1.
A gray rectangular area will display in the digitizer dialog box; this area
illustrates the menu position on the digitizer tablet.
Preparing patterns for digitizing:
Before digitizing a pattern, mark or note the following items on the pattern
pieces.
• Grade points and/or grade rule numbers. This is only necessary if

the patterns are going to be graded.
• Baseline or Grainline. The baseline is used to determine how the

piece is positioned on the screen.
• Notches. Not all the patterns have notches.
• Button or drill holes. Not all the patterns have drill holes
• Internal lines and internal elements. Not all the patterns have
internal lines or elements.
• Darts. Not all the patterns have darts. The dart should be marked
with 4 points. Three of the four points are on the boundary line,
the beginning, end, and middle of the dart. The fourth point is the
apex or depth of the dart.
• Any Piece Information that the user would like to enter using the
digitizer panel, for example piece name, piece description,
quantity, and flip restrictions.
To Digitize:
• OPTIONAL: Display the grading table. The base size in the

grading table should be the size of the piece being digitized.
! Note: If the size is not defined in the grading table, the SGS software
defaults to the size name base. The size name can be changed to
another name some other time.
• Attach the prepared pattern onto the digitizer tablet using drafting
tape. Pattern pieces can be taped to the digitizer tablet in any
direction, or even on top of each other. The baseline
automatically straightens the piece when displayed on the screen.
! Note: Drafting Tape is easier to remove from the digitizing tablet and
paper patterns. Rather than using tape, some users prefer to use a
big sheet of clear vinyl or plastic to hold pieces in place.
• From the File menu select Digitize to display Digitizer dialog
box. The digitizer dialog box is divided into three sections. The
left section contains digitizer commands used with a four-button
digitizer. The right section is a scaled down view of the digitizing
tablet. The bottom section assigns a number to each button on the
digitizer cursor.
• Digitize the piece perimeter in the clockwise direction using

correct cursor buttons to achieve the shape desired. Always close
the perimeter by using button number 2 on the digitizer cursor.
SGS recommends the user always begin digitizing at the bottom
left hand corner of each piece. The first point digitized will be
assigned point #1 but can be changed in the system later.
• After the piece boundary has been digitized and closed, the
following elements can be digitized in any order.
Baseline:
The Baseline or Grainline must be digitized after the piece perimeter. If no

baseline is digitized, the software automatically creates one that is parallel to
the lower edge of the digitizing tablet.
Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each end of the baseline and select
B.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over baseline in the piece menu and
select number 1(or using the mouse select baseline from the digitizer dialog
box).
! Note: You can use “Base line as last digitized line” command from
Digitizer Status dialog box.
Notches:
Notches can be digitized while digitizing the piece boundary, or after

boundary has been completed.
Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each of the notches and select
number 5. The system will place the default type notch on this point. Notch
type can be changed in the digitizer dialog box.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over notch in the piece menu and select
number 1(or using the mouse to select the notch from the digitizer dialog box
and define the type of notch to be digitized).
Drill Holes:
Buttons or drill holes must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed.
Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each of buttons and select number
7.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over each of the buttons and select
number 1(or using the mouse to select button from the digitizer dialog box).
Internal Lines:
Internal 2 point lines must be digitized after the piece boundary is complete.
Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each end of the internal lines and
select number 6.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over line in the piece menu and select
number 1(or using the mouse select line from the digitizer dialog box).
Internal Contours:
Internal contours must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed.

Using a 16-button cursor: Select button F. Place the cursor over each point of
the internal line and select a point (1,3,9,0). Select button F again to finish the
Internal Contour.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over contour in the piece menu and
select number 1(or using the mouse to select contour from the digitizer dialog
box).
Circles:
Internal Circles must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed. Using
a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over the center of the internal circle and select
number 8 then place the cursor over the edge of the internal circle and select
number 8.
Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over the center of the internal circle and
select number 1, place the cursor over the edge of the internal circle and select
button number 1(or using the mouse select circle from the digitize dialog box).
Darts:
Darts are partially digitized while completing the piece boundary by entering
the beginning, end, and middle points of the dart as non-curve points.
Using a 16-button cursor: Place the cursor over the beginning point of the dart
on the piece boundary and press the button D
Using a 4-button cursor: Place the cursor over the apex and press on button D.
Place the cursor over dart in the piece menu and select button number 1(or
using the mouse select dart from the digitizer dialog box). Place the cursor
over the apex and press the button number 1.
OPTIONAL: Piece Information maybe entered at this point if panel is being

used on digitizer. All the commands on the panel are selected with number 1;
information is entered with number 1 and closed with number 1 on the
digitizing cursor.
• Begin digitizing a new piece or stop digitizing. To stop

digitizing, use the mouse to select Done in the Digitize dialog
box. To begin digitizing a new piece, refer to step number 4.
! Note: The piece contour must be closed before selecting Done in the
digitizer dialog box. If the piece is not closed, it will not be saved
with the file.
To Digitize pieces with Grade rules:
When the rule number to be applied to a grading point is known at the time of
digitizing it is very simple to apply it while digitizing. The rule number can
also be applied using the SGS grading software at a later time.
! Note: The rules are applied relative to the baseline, therefore it is

extremely important that the baseline is digitized accurately.
• Open the grade rule library to be used.
• Load the sizes.
• Using a 16-button cursor: Digitize the piece as regular. When

digitizing a point with a grade rule number, use button number 1
to create a graded turn point or use button 0 to create a graded
curve point. Use button E to enter the grade rule number/name

using the letters and numbers on the digitizer panel then press A
to hear a confirmation beep. If the same rule is applied several
times in a row, press A and the last rule in memory will be
applied.
• Using a 4-button cursor: Digitize the piece as regular. When

digitizing a point with a grade rule number, use button number 1
to create a graded turn point or use the digitizer menu to create a
graded curve point. Select the Rule Name command on the
digitizer panel; enter the grade rule number/name using the letters
and numbers on the digitizer panel. Then select the Apply Rule
command on the digitizer panel. Select the Apply Rule command
on the digitizer panel and the last rule in memory will be applied.
Applying Grading rules using the panel:
Using a panel, there is an option to apply grading for each point while
digitizing.
Follow these steps:
• From View menu select Grading Library.
• Click the right mouse button and select the Rules or use the Open
Rule library icon on the Grading Library dialog box.
• Select the required library. It is vital to have the Grading Rule

Library open while digitizing and applying its rules.
• A dialog box may display “The file sizes list does not match the
rules library list”
• Click OK
• To load those sizes select “Load sizes” option from the Grading
menu.
• OPTIONAL: From Grading menu select the “Sizes” option and

define new sizes and colors.
• Choose the grading rule from the Panel and then choose Apply
Rule on the Panel. Grading with the digitizer panel is done after
the panel is created by the user and attached to the digitizer.
! Note: To apply the grading rules, the panel must contain the exact rule
names as they are written in the library and the commands “Apply
Rule” and “Rule Name”.
To Digitize oversized pieces:
When the paper patterns are too big to fit on the digitizer tablet, follow these
steps.
• Break the large piece up into several smaller pieces by drawing

temporary “cut” lines on the large paper piece.
• Extend the base (grain) line on the large paper piece, so that the
baseline extends past the entire temporary “cut lines”.
• Tape the large paper pattern to the digitizer tablet. Digitize the
first “temporary” piece.
! Note: Be sure to digitize the Baseline on the “temporary” piece.

• Move the large paper pattern and digitize the next “temporary”
piece.
• When all of the “temporary” pieces have be digitized, use the Join
tool in the SGS Pattern Design Software (PDS) to paste the
“temporary” pieces together.
To Digitize a graded nest:
If the paper patterns are graded, but the growth values are not known, it can be
very helpful to digitize the graded nest. Digitizing the graded nest allows the
SGS software to automatically calculate the growth values.
• Stack the paper patterns on top of on another and tape them to the
digitizing tablet.
• Display the Grading Table and load the sizes to be digitized.
! Note: Only the sizes taped to the digitizer tablet can be displayed in the
Grading Table. The Base size digitized must be the base size in the
grading table.
• Using a 16-button cursor: Digitize the base size piece as normal.

When digitizing a boundary point on the base size that grades, use
button number 1on base size to create a graded turn point or use
button 0 to create a graded curve point. Than place the cursor on
the corresponding point of the smallest size and press button
number 4, place the cursor on the corresponding point of the
second smallest size and press button number 4, continue pressing
button number 4 on the corresponding points from the smallest to
largest size.
! Note: Digitizing a graded nest may not be done with a 4 -button cursor.
Digitizing a pattern using a 16 button cursor:
The attributes for each of the 16 -buttons are described in the Digitizing dialog
box.
1 = Grading point on a line. Start to digitize with this point.
2 = Close Perimeter automatically from the last digitized point to first one.
3 = Curve point (Simple and not Graded).
4 = Graded. Assign the last Grading rule to the currently selected point.
5 = Notch. Digitize a Notch once the perimeter is closed.
6 = Line. Digitize two points.
7 = Button (or any other sign). Click in the desired place.
8 = Circle. Center and radius

9 = Non grading point on a line.
0 = Grading point on a Curve.
A = apply previously entered rule number
B = Base Line (Grain Line). Digitize from left to right (clockwise).
C = Undo
D = Dart. Used if the dart points already exist on the perimeter line.
E = Rule. It is also possible to enter a rule from the Digitizer keypad.
F = Contour - internal with multiple points.
Digitizing a pattern using a 4 -button cursor:
The attributes for each of the 4 buttons are described in the Digitizing dialog
box.
Each button on the 4-button cursor has a unique color. They are arranged like
this.
Yellow
White Green
Blue
• Yellow is button #1; it is used to create graded turn points. (none

curve)
• White is button #2, it is used to close a contour.

• Blue is button #3; it is used to create non-grading curve points.
• Green is button #4; it is used to UNDO.
Additional commands for the 4 Button digitizer are displayed along the left
side of the Digitizer dialog box. The additional commands can be chosen using
the mouse in the dialog box or by using button number 1 and the digitizer
menu.
Digitizer Setup
The Digitizer Setup command is used to define the brand and size of digitizer
tablet to be used and to edit the digitizer panel.
Digitizer Panel:
The digitizer panel contains all the piece attributes and information found in
the Piece Info dialog box. Using the Digitizer panel while digitizing eliminates
the need to enter the relevant attributes and information into the Piece Info
dialog box.
Customizing the Digitizer Panel:
The user can define the look of the panel, the number of rows and columns,
the location of each command, and the text strings.
• Select Digitizer Setup from the File Menu.
• Select Edit Panel from the Select Digitizer Setup dialog box.
• Select Load Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Panel
dialog box.
• Load the panel you wish to edit.

! Note: The panel has two types of boxes, Control and String. String type
boxes contain only text, letters and numbers. Control type boxes are
commands that active different area of the software. For example
the Piece Name control box lets the software know that the
information that is about to be entered is the Piece Name.
• To edit the control type boxes, double click on the control box.
The Control Type dialog box will be displayed. Choose the type
of command you will like the control box to represent. An
explanation of what each control command does is found under
Digitize in this Chapter.
• To edit the string type boxes click in the string box and type the
information of your choice.
! Tip: To change the box from a control box to a sting box or visa versa,
select the box to be changed and select Control Type or String Type
from the Type menu.
• Once all of the edits have been made, select Save Panel or Save
Panel As in the File Menu.
Printing the Digitizer Panel:
After customizing the digitizer panel, a copy of the digitizer panel must be
attached to the digitizer tablet.
• Select Digitizer Setup from the File menu.
• Select Edit Panel from the Select Digitizer dialog box.
• Select Load Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Panel
dialog box.
• Load the panel of your choice.

• Select Print Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Panel dialog
box. The Digitizer Panel Size dialog box will display.
• When working with inches, in the X enter 10, in the Y enter 8,

and select OK. The Print dialog box will display.
! Note: In the Options menu of the SGS software, the printer fonts must be
set to 6.
• Print in Landscape, not Portrait. Select OK, to begin Printing.
• OPTIONAL: Rather than follow the above instructions, press the

Alt+Print keys on the keyboard, open Microsoft Word and Paste.
Resize and position the panel the way you want it with in MS
Word and print.
Instructions for Attaching the Digitizer Panel are found under Digitize in this
Chapter.
OptiTex Panel commands:

This is the description of all the digitizer commands that belong to “OptiTex
Panel”. The digitizer commands come with OptiTex installation (the default
panel directory is: C:\OptiTex7\digpanel7.pnl).
In a case you have 4-buttons digitizer cursor, it’s recommend to create/defined

on your digitizer board menu position (see on the SGS help digitizer setup
section “attaching the digitizer panel”).
Command: How to use the Remarks:

command:
Piece After you finish digitizing Don’t forget to click again on the
Name a piece, select “Piece piece name command to insert
Name” command with the selected piece name!
key number 1 on the
digitizer cursor, then
select the desirable name
by using the panel letters
(select the desirable
letters and click on key
number 1).
After you select the piece

name, click again on
“piece name” command!
Quantity After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the

digitize a piece, select quantity command to insert the
“Quantity” command selected quantity!
with key number 1 on the
select the desirable
name/number by using
the panel letters (select
the desirable letters and
click on key number 1).

quantity, click again on
“Quantity” command!
Material After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the

Type digitize a piece, select Material Type command to insert

“Material Type” the selected Material Type!
command with key
number 1 on the digitizer
cursor, then select the
desirable name/number
by using the panel letters
(select the desirable
letters and click on key
number 1). After you
select the piece material
type, click again on
“Material Type”
command!
Piece After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the

Description digitize a piece, select piece description command to
“piece description” insert the selected piece
command with key description!
cursor, then select the
desirable name by using
the panel letters (select
the desirable letters and
click on key number 1).

description, click again
on “piece description”
command!
Buffer After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the

digitize a piece, select buffer command to insert the
“Buffer” command with
key number 1 on the selected buffer!

select the desirable buffer
value by using the panel
letters (select the
desirable letters and click
on key number 1).

buffer, click again on
“buffer” command!
Piece Code After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the
digitize a piece, select
“Piece Code” command piece code command to insert the
with key number 1 on the selected piece code!
select the desirable piece
code by using the panel
letters (select the
desirable letter and click
on key number 1).

code, click again on
“piece code” command!
Style After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the

Name digitize a piece, select style name command to insert the
“Style Name” command selected style name!
select the desirable style
name by using the panel
letters (select the

desirable letters and click
on key number 1).
After you select the style

name, click again on
“Style Name” command!
Rotate Any After you finish to There is no need to click twice

Way digitize a piece, select on the rotate any way command!
“Rotate Any Way”
command Click on
“Rotate Any Way”
command with key
cursor if you want that,
the piece rotation will be
any way!
Rotate After you finish to There is no need to click twice

None digitize a piece, select on the rotate none command!
“Rotate None” command
Click on “Rotate None”
command with key
none!
Rotate 4 After you finish to There is no need to click twice

Way digitize a piece, select on the rotate 4 way command!
“Rotate 4 Way”
command Click on
“Rotate 4 way” command

digitizer cursor if you
want that, the piece
rotation will be 4 way!
Rotate 2 After you finish to There is no need to click twice

Way digitize a piece, select on the rotate 2 way command!
“Rotate 2 Way”
command Click on
“Rotate 2 Way”
command with key
2 way!
Internal Select the “Internal Also F key on the digitizer cursor

Contour Contour” command to is change to internal mode!
change to internal mode.
To change to internal
mode click on the
“Internal Contour”
command with key
number 1.
For exit from the internal

mode click again!
Piece Select the “Piece Orient. There is no need to click twice

Orient. Right” command to on the Piece Orient. Right
Right create to digitize piece command!
orientation to the right.
To create piece
orientation to the right,
click on the “Piece
Orient. Right” command
with key number 1.

Orient. Left” command to create on the Piece Orient. Left
Left to digitize piece command!
orientation to the left.
To create piece
orientation to the left,
Orient. Left” command
with key number 1.

Orient. None” command to create on the Piece Orient. None
None to digitize piece command!
orientation to the None.
To create piece
orientation to the None,
Orient. Left” command
with key number 1.
Use one Select the “Use one” Use this command if you already
command if you want to apply the “use both” command
cancel “Use Both” and you want to cancel her.
orientation for the digitize
piece.
Use Both Select the “Use Both” There is no need to click twice
command to create to on the “Use Both” command!
digitize piece orientation
of Both.
To create piece
orientation to the Both,
click on the “Use Both”
command with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.
Notch by 2 Select this command to To go back to point position

points create notch with angle. (normal digitize position), click
on key number 0 on your
Click on the “Notch by 2 digitizer cursor! Then you will be
points” with key number able to continue digitize a new
1 on the digitizer cursor piece.
to select the command.
Then click twice, first

click on the segment (in
the desirable location)
and the second click,
click on the piece to mark
the notch angle!
T – Notch Select this command to If you have digitizer cursor with

create T notch. 4 buttons only, select the notch
command from the digitizer
Click on the “T – Notch” menu!
digitizer cursor to select

You can also create menu
the command.
position on your digitizer! This
Then use key number 5 way you will be able to select
on your digitizer cursor to notch command on your digitizer
add a notch in the board.
desirable location!
V – Notch Select this command to

create V notch.
Click on the “V – Notch”

with key number 1 on the -“-
the command.
Then use key number 5

on your digitizer cursor to
add a notch in the
desirable location!
U – Notch Select this command to

create U notch.
Click on the “U – Notch”

the command.

add a notch in the
desirable location!
I - Notch Select this command

to create I notch.
Click on the “I – Notch”

the command.

add a notch in the
desirable location!
L – Notch Select this command

to create L notch.
Click on the “L – Notch”

the command.

add a notch in the
desirable location!
Flip Select this command to You don’t need to click twice on

Allowed create “Flip Allowed” in Flip Allowed command!
Piece Information”
dialog.
Click on the “Flip

Allowed” command with
key number 1 on your

this command.
Flip Non Select this command to “Undo” command (C key on the

Allowed cancel “Flip Allowed” cursor) in the digitizer dialog
command. doesn’t cancel commands, only
points (point keys number 1, 3, 0
Click on “Flip Non and 9).
Allowed” with fey
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor to cancel
flip allowed.
Mirror Select this command to You will not see the mirror
create a mirror to the command in the digitizer dialog!
digitize piece.
Click on “Mirror”
command with key
number 1 on your
this command.
The mirror line will be

between the last point and
first point!
Notch – Select this command to When you select the notch prop
Prop create attribute of command, you are changing the
proportional point in notch default!
notch dialog.
This mean that all the next
Click on the “Notch notches that you will add will
Prop” command and then have “proportional” attribute!
use key number 5 on your

digitizer cursor to add a
notch with the desirable
attribute.
Notch – Select this command to When you select the Notch Prev
Prev create attribute of command, you are changing the
previous point in notch notch default!
dialog.
This mean that all the next
Click on the “Notch notches that you will add will
Prev” command and then have “previous” attribute!
use key number 5 on your
notch.
Notch – Select this command to When you select the notch next
Next create attribute of next command, you are changing the
point in notch dialog. notch default!
Click on the “Notch This mean that all the next

Next” command and then notches that you will add will
use key number 5 on your have “next” attribute!
notch.
Cut Select this command to When you change the default of

create cut attribute for internal mode, it will be stay in
internal contour. the last mode until you will
change the mode again.
Click (before you start
digitize internal contour)
on “Cut” command with
digitizer cursor. Then

change to internal mode
with F key or “Internal
contour” commands on
the digitizer panel and
creates the desirable
internal.
Draw Select this command to

create draw attribute for
internal contour.
Click (before you start -“-

on “Draw” command
with key number 1 on
your digitizer cursor.
Then change to internal
mode with F key or
“Internal contour”
commands on the
digitizer panel and creates
the desirable internal.
Sew Select this command to

create sews attribute for
internal contour.

on “Sew” command with
digitizer cursor. Then
change to internal mode
with F key or “Internal

contour” commands on
the digitizer panel and
creates the desirable
internal.
Quality Select this command to

create quality attribute for
internal contour.

on “Quality” command
Then change to internal
mode with F key or
“Internal contour”
commands on the
digitizer panel and creates
the desirable internal.
Apply Select this command to Don’t forget to load Grading

Rule apply grading rule to library before you start digitize!
selected point.
If you already select

grading rule (see “Rule
Name” command), after
you digitize a point, click
on “Apply Rule”
command with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.
Rule name Select this command 1. Don’t forget to load Grading

when you want to apply library before you start digitize!
certain grading rule to
point! 2. Don’t forget to click again on
“Rule name” command after you
After you finish to select the rule name.
digitize a point (after you
create a point), click on 3. After you select rule name, the
“Rule name” command, rule will automatically apply to
then select the rule name select point.
from the panel letters and
click again on “Rule 4. If you want to use the same
name” command to save rule on different point, you can
to rule name. select the new point and use
“Apply Rule”.
Drill Select this command

when you went to create a
button with drill
command.
Click on “Drill”
(command before you
create the button) with
digitizer cursor, then add
a button in a desirable
location with key number
7 on your digitizer cursor
(16 buttons cursor).
Aux Drill Select this command

button with Aux Drill
command.
Click on “Aux Drill”

(command before you
a button in a desirable
Punch Select this command

notch with punch
command.
Click on “Punch”
(command before you
a notch in a desirable
None Select this command

Mode when you went to create a
notch or button with none
mode command.
Click on “None Mode”

(command before you
create the notch/button)
your digitizer cursor, then
add a notch/button in a
desirable location with
digitizer cursor (16
buttons cursor).
Before Cut Select this command

notch, circle, button or
internal contour with
plotting/cutting time that
is before the external
contour.
Click on “Before Cut”

(command before you
create the notch, button,
circle or internal contour)
add the desirable element
in the desirable location
with the relevant key
number on your digitizer
cursor (16 buttons
cursor).
In Cut Select this command This command is enable only if

Time when you went to create a the notch that you add is I notch
notch that the with Punch command! If you
plotting/cutting time is select “In Cut Time” command
together with the external but your notch or the command
contour. is not correct (I notch and punch
command), the plotting/cutting
Click on “In Cut Time” time will be before the external
(command before you contour!
create the notch) with key
number 1 on your
the notch in the desirable
After Cut Select this command

notch, circle, button or
internal contour with
plotting/cutting time that
is after the external
contour.
Click on “After Cut”

(command before you
create the notch, button,
circle or internal contour)
add the desirable element
in the desirable location
with the relevant key

number on your digitizer
cursor (16 buttons
cursor).
Default Select this command You can set notch defaults in

Mode when you want go back to option menu preferences dialog,
the default mode of all for all the other internal
internal elements. elements, circle, button, dart and
internal contour the default will
Click on “Default Mode” be the last mode!
command with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.
Default Select this command You can set notch defaults in

Time when you want go back to option menu preferences dialog,
the default time of all for all the other internal
internal elements. elements, circle, button, dart and
internal contour the default time
Click on “Default time” will be the last plotting/cutting
command with key time!
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.
Max Tilt Select this command Don’t forget to click again on

when you want to create a max tilt command after you
tilt angle to your digitize select the tilt value.
piece.
Click on the “Max Tilt”

command with key
number 1 on your
select the tilt angle value

with the panel number
and click again on “Max
Tilt” command to save
and apply the tilt.
Flip non - After you finished There is no need to click twice on

Allowed digitizing the piece, select the “Flip non – Allowed” cell.
“Flip non – Allowed”
command by clicking on
“Flip non – Allowed” cell
digitizer cursor in order
give your digitized piece
“None” Flip Allowed
attribute.
Flip X – After you finished There is no need to click twice on

Allowed digitizing the piece, select the “Flip X – Allowed” cell.
“Flip X – Allowed”
“Flip X – Allowed” cell
“X Flip” Flip Allowed
attribute.
Vice Side After you finished There is no need to click twice on

Flipped X digitizing the piece, select the “Vice Side Flipped X” cell.
“Vice Side Flipped X”
“Vice Side Flipped X” cell

“Left/Right” Opposite
Piece attribute.
Vice Side After you finished There is no need to click twice on

non Flipped digitizing the piece, select the “Vice Side non Flipped” cell.
“Vice Side non Flipped”
“Vice Side non Flipped”
cell with key number 1 on
the digitizer cursor in
order give your digitized
piece “None” Opposite
Piece attribute.
Notch Select this command to set

Width your digitized notch width.
Click on “Notch Width”

Now click on key number

to create notch on the
digitized piece.
Notch Select this command to set

Angle your digitized notch width.
Click on “Notch Angle”

Now click on key number

to create notch on the
digitized piece.
Button Select this command to set

Radius your digitized button
radius.
1. Click on “Button
Radius” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.
2. Select the button

radius from the
digitizer penal buy
clicking on desirable
numbers cells.
3. Click again on
“Button Radius” cell
command.
Now use key number 7 to

add a button to your
digitized piece.
Dart Select this command to set

Distance your digitized dart
distance.
1. Click on “Dart
Distance” cell with

digitizer cursor.
2. Select the dart

distance from the
digitizer penal buy
clicking on desirable
numbers cells.
3. Click again on “Dart

Distance” cell
command.
Now use D key to add a

Dart to your digitized
piece.
Dart Drill Select this command to

Mode change your dart drill to
“Drill Mode”.
1. Click on “Dart drill

mode” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.

piece.
Dart Select this command to

AuxDrill change your dart drill
Mode mode to “AuxDrill mode”.
1. Click on “AuxDrill
mode” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.

piece.
Dart Cut Select this command to

Mode change your dart drill
mode to “Cut mode”.
1. Click on “Cart Cut

Mode” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.

piece.
Dart Draw Select this command to

Mode change your dart drill
mode to “Draw mode”.
1. Click on “Dart Draw

Mode” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor.

piece.
Vice Side Select this command to set

Flipped Y your digitized piece
attribute to be “Left/Right”
attributed under Opposite
Piece filed in OptiTex
piece info dialog box.
1. Click on “Vic Side

Flipped Y” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor after you
finish digitized piece.
Flip Y Select this command to set

Allowed your digitized piece
attribute to be “Y Flip”
attributed under Flip
Allowance filed in
OptiTex piece info dialog
box.
1. Click on “Flip Y
Allowed” cell with key
number 1 on your digitizer
cursor after you finish
digitized piece.
Buffer Type Select this command to set

Around your digitized piece buffer
attribute to be “Around”
type under Buffer Type
filed in OptiTex piece info
dialog box.
1. Click on “Buffer Type

Around” cell with key
digitized piece.

Up your digitized piece buffer
attribute to be “Up” type
under Buffer Type filed in
box.

Up” cell with key number
after you finish digitized
piece.

Down your digitized piece buffer
attribute to be “Down”
type under Buffer Type
filed in OptiTex piece info
dialog box.

Down” cell with key
digitized piece.

Left your digitized piece buffer
attribute to be “Left” type
box.

Left” cell with key number
after you finish digitized
piece.

Right your digitized piece buffer
attribute to be “Right” type
box.

Right” cell with key
digitized piece.
Point Name Use this command to load Only after you load a point name
Enter a point name. into the digitizer panel, “Set point
Name” command is available.
1. Click on “Point Name
Enter” cell with key
number 1 on your
digitizer cursor after
you finish digitised
piece.
2. Now select the point

name by clicking on
the name letters cells
with digitizer cursor.
3. Click again on “Point

Name Enter” cell.
Set Point Use this command to This command is available only

Name implement point name to after you load a point name with
digitised point. “Point Name Enter” command!
1. After you finish

digitised a point, click
on “Set Point Name”
cell with the digitizer
cursor (key number 1).
Digitizer Dialog Box:
Digitizer Type
This field lists the type of digitizer tablet being used.

Panel
This field displays the panel currently being used. The panel taped to the
digitizer must be the same panel that is defined here. See above for
instructions on printing the Digitizer Panel.
Edit Panel
Click on this button to edit existing digitizer panels and to make new panels.
See above for instructions on editing the digitizer panel.
Browse
Click on Browse to find and define the digitizer panel you wish to use.
Communication Port
Defines which communication port the digitizer is plugged into. The

communication port must also be set up for the defined digitizer type.
Working Units
Defines the working units.
Resolution
Defines the resolution.
16 Buttons Cursor
Enable 16 buttons cursor when using it. Disable 16 buttons cursor when using
a 4 buttons cursor.
Tablet Size
Width:
Defines the width of the digitizer tablet.
Height:
Defines the height of the digitizer tablet.
Shift Digitizer 0/0 point
Defines the 0/0 point on the digitizer.
Digitizer Communication Setup
Defines the specific communication parameters for your digitizer.
! Note: Digitizer installation Instructions of the supported devices can be

found in the output device installation chapter latter in this book.
Export to CAD/CAM files

The Export CAD/CAM files command converts SGS files to any other graphic
formats listed in the dialog box.
Use the Layers table to define which items should be exported to which layer.
The exported file is created using the working units defined in the Options
Menu.
To Export Files:
• From the File Menu select Export to CAD/CAM files... The

Export to CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed.
! Note: Export individual sizes by selecting them with an “X” in the

Grading Table dialog box prior to choosing this command.
• Type in the name of the file to be exported.
• Click Browse to select the drive and directory where the file is to
be exported.
• Select the desired file format.
! Note: SGS software recognizes only the basic attributes of the different
ASCII geometry standards for each file format. Situations may arise
where the saved file does not appear exactly as it did in the original
application. The same limitation exists with the Import CAD/CAM
files command. If the file is not importable, use Import setup and
change the parameters accordingly.
• OPTIONAL: Select any other options or set the scale size.
• Click OK.
Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box:
File name
Type a name for the file to be exported.
Browse
Click on the Browse button to display the dialog box to change drives and
directories.
Formats:
This area is used to define the type of file to be created. Choose from:
DXF is an AutoDesk/AutoCAD ASCII file format.
ANSI/AAMA the American Apparel Manufacturing Association formats is

based on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all
large CAD/CAM manufacturers.
IGES is the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.

CADL is a CADKEYO ASCII file format.
NST is the cncKad ASCII file format.
Contours
This area is used to define the contours that will be exported (only if the
exported piece has a seam). User can choose which of piece contours (sewing
or cutting) will be exported. The default setting is both sewing & cutting
contours.
Layers Table…
Select this button to view the Layers dialog box. This box is used to define the
layers for each element of the file to be exported.
Layers Table Dialog Box:

Dictionary Dialog Box:
Piece Name
Defines how the export file refers to the piece name.
Piece Code
Defines how the export file refers to the piece code.
Annotation
Defines how the export file refers to the annotation.
Size Name
Defines how the export file refers to the size name.

Base Size Mark
Defines how the export file refers to the base size.
Material Code
Defines how the export file refers to a defined material group.
Quantity
Defines how the export file refers to the quantity.
Best Quality
Defines how the export file illustrates that the following defines the best
quality.
Orientation
Defines how the export file refers to the orientation.
Restore Defaults
Restores the default dictionary names for each item.
Import from CAD/CAM Files

The Import CAD/CAM command is an optional module of software that is
activated within SGS software packages when the Import Module is
purchased.
The Import Module converts any ASCII geometry file format from the list of
recognized formats to the SGS file format. The new file is loaded directly onto
the screen. Files from any directory or disk may be chosen as long as it is a
format recognized by the Import module.
! Note: AutoCAD files can be imported into SGS software regardless if

pieces were originally drawn clockwise or counter clockwise
To Set up the Import Options:
• From the File Menu choose Import CAD/CAM files... The Import
CAD/CAM files dialog box is displayed.
• Select the type of file to Import by checking the appropriate file

format under the File Format field.
• Click Browse, and a second Import CAD/CAM File dialog box is

displayed.
• Select the desired file(s) to import.
! Tip: To select multiple files, hold down the shift key and click on the
desired files.
• Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box is displayed

again.
• Select the desired Import options.
• Click on Setup. The Import Setup dialog box will be displayed.
• Select the options and enter the desired values.
• Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box will be

displayed again.
• Click OK. The selected files are imported with the desired values
and options implemented.
Import CAD files Dialog Box:
CAD Files to Import
This field will list the file to be imported. Click on the Browse button to select
the file or files to be imported.
Working Units
Select the desired working units: mm, cm, m, inches, feet, or yards. SGS
software uses the selected working units while converting files from one
format to another. If the units are not correctly defined, the pieces are imported
as the wrong size and the command will have to be repeated.
File Format
Choose the type of file to be imported. Following are the different importable
file formats:
DXF - AutoDesk/AutoCAD ™ ASCII file format.
AAMA - The American Apparel Manufacturing Association format is based

on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all large
CAD/CAM manufacturers.
IGES - Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.
CADL – CADKEY ™ ASCII file format.
Gerber - Gerber Cutter & Cutting Edge file format.
DFT - cncKad ASCII file format.
HP/GL - General output file format that can be sent to most HP-GL-
compatible plotters. Approved by the American National Standard of the
Electronic Industrial Association.
MICROJET- File format used with the Microdynamics plotters.
DM-PL – Based on HP-GL format the use for IOLINE plotters.
No Sizes
When this option is disabled, all pieces with the same name become separate
pieces. When this option in enabled, all pieces with the same name are made
into a graded nest.
! Note: For a graded nest to be created, the pieces name and size name must
be defined in the import file. The grade points are the break points
(sharp corners). AAMA format files can be imported with grading,

but often the graded nest does not come through correctly. If the
Graded Nest does not come through see Graded Nest tool in the
Grading Menu section. This new SGS tool offers a solution to this
problem.
Make DSN files
If this command is enabled, a Style (DSN) File is created when importing a

Marker File.
Material
This field notes the Material Group in Piece Info for the imported file(s).
Quantity
Defines the quantity in Piece Info for the imported file(s). If an import file
contains several of the same pieces, SGS software reads only one and will
insert the right number of copies into the Piece Info box. If there are
differences between the images, SGS software may not recognize that the
pieces are multiples of the same pattern piece.
Ignore Internals
Defines the specific components to be imported from the import file.

Eliminating specific components, like Notches, Texts, Lines, Arcs, or Circles,
speeds the Import procedure. Selecting the Ignore Notch or Internals option
(Lines, Arcs, Circles, or Text), does not mean that these elements are not read.
In this case, these elements are read without being identified or sorted. For
example, a V notch on the piece perimeter becomes part of the contour rather
than being recognized as a notch having a V attribute.
OK
Click on the OK button after selected the file to Import. The file will be
imported.
Box
Click on this button to import a file within a closed contour box. This option
is used to bring in information if the file will not be imported properly. Use
his option when an error dialog box appears such as “Entities Out of Contour”
or “No Closed Contours Found”.
Setup
Click on the Setup button to display the Import Setup Dialog Box.
Import Setup Dialog Box:
Tolerance
The Tolerance Value determines the farthest distance between two points on a
contour can be placed apart and still be treated as the same perimeter (SGS
software usually handles only properly closed contours. However, the
tolerance value ensures that some contours that are not closed properly will be
read).
Bulge (Chord Error)
Bulge (Chord Error) is a parameter used to define the smoothness of Curves

and Arcs. A smaller value creates many additional points and segments within
the piece.
Min. Area
Min Area section uses to define the smallest piece that will be recognized in
OptiTex import program as a piece.
Any element that is smallest from the value in the “Min. Area window” will be
recognizes as internal element!
! Note: In OptiTex Import Program, internal elements that are not located
in a piece (external contour that is close), will be not import!
Piece
If a piece boundary is smaller than the value defined in this box, the Import
command disregards the piece and throws the piece away.
Hole
A hole is a closed contour on the same layer as the piece boundary. Use this
area to define the minimum size of a hole. The minimum area of a hole should
be smaller than the smallest piece.
Default Internals Sizes:
These fields define the default settings for internals when importing from
another file format.
Button Radius
This field is used to set the default size for the radius of a button.
Notch Depth
This field is used to set the default depth of a notch.
Notch Width
This field is used to set the default for the width of a notch.
Text Size
This field is used to set the default for text size. If a text size was defined in
the Imported file, SGS software maintains that value.
Text is information typed directly onto the piece. Piece Description text is
defined using the Dictionary dialog box.
V Notch’s Recognizing parameters
Max. Internal angle
This field is used to define V notch size in order to help the import system to
recognize V notch when the import format is DXF.
! Note: In AAMA import format there are special layers that define V notch.
Max. Relative angle
This area is used to define the maximum angle of a V notch.
Near Angle
This area is used to define the smallest near angle of a V notch.
Min Circle Radius
This field defines the smallest size of an internal circle that will be imported.
Max Notch Ratio
The largest difference when dividing the width by the depth of the notch.
Max Notch Depth
The field is used to define the maximum depth for a notch.
Spline Angle
The smallest angle for curved lines.
Max Grade Angle
The maximum angle for a graded nest.
Ignore CR / LF
Mainly for CNC files which come in one long line, or use a CR/LF after each
point. When enabled, the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the import file is
ignored.
Ignore Frame
SGS software ignores the outer frame (boundary) which is usually created for
Plot files.
Separate Layers
SGS software remembers the layer of each element. If the new file is ever
exported, the elements keep their original layers.
This option is used only for DXF and AAMA files. Because SGS software
recognizes elements and text on different layers, a circle inside a shape may
make a noticeable difference in the imported file. If the circle is imported
while the Separate Layers option is disabled, the circle becomes a simple
internal element. If the circle is to be recognized as a hole, it must be on the
same layer as the outer perimeter line, or the DXF file can be imported with
the Separate Layers option in the OFF position.
Units
This area displays the Working Unit Values that are defined in the Options
Menu. If working units are set up incorrectly, the file is imported as the wrong
size and will need to be imported again.
Layers Table Dialog Box:

This dialog box is only available when importing AAMA files.
Format
The import format that was defined in the Import to CAD file Dialog Box.
Only AAMA files support Layers.
Boundary Lines
The layer name/number to place piece boundary lines on.
Turn (Grade) Points
The layer name/number on which to place turn (grade) points.

Curve Points
The layer name/number on which to place curve points.
Notches
The layer name/number on which to place notches.
Grain (Base) Lines
The layer name/number that define the grain (base) line.
Internal Lines (draw)
The layer name/number on which to place internal lines. If internal lines are
used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the
same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal
elements with Draw attributes.
Internal Cut
The layer name/number on which to place internal cuts. If internal lines are
used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the
same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal
elements with Draw attributes.
Drill Holes
The layer name/number that define the drill holes.
Sew Lines
The layer name/number on which to place sew lines.

Quality Lines
The layer name/number that define the quality lines.
Restore Defaults
This button is used to restore the default layers for each item.
Dictionary Dialog Box:

The Dictionary dialog box enables SGS software to add attributes and data to
each imported piece and save this data with the Piece Info. SGS software looks
for the defined string and then uses the defined value or text that expresses the
string parameter.
Style Name
Defines how the import program searches for the style name.
Piece Name
Defines how the import program searches for the piece name. If a piece name
string is not defined; the longest line of text in the import file becomes the
Piece Name.
Piece Code
Defines how the import program searches for the piece code.
Annotation
Defines how the import program searches for annotation.
Size Name
Defines how the import program searches for the size name.
Base Size Mark
Defines how the import program searches for the base size.
Material Code
Defines how the import program searches for the fined material group.
Quantity
Defines how the import program searches for the defined quantity.
Best Quality
Defines how the import program searches for the defined best quality.
Orientation
Defines how the import program searches for the defined orientation.
Restore Defaults
This button is used to restore the default dictionary names for each item.
SGS Modulate
About SGS Modulate
Modulate is a "Made to measure" program which is intended for production of

single or mass numbers of garments, each fitting specific sets of dimensions.
These dimensions can belong to specific people or can represent specific
manufacturing requirements presented as a scheme of dimensions.
Modulate produces "Parametric Garments". A "Parametric garment" is a set of

patterns that construct a garment. Modulate adds to these patterns sets of
dimensions specified by the "Parametric Garment" designer , giving them any
names and relations required.
Once the "Parametric Garment" has been fully defined by a set of dimensions,
it can be used over and over for any number of dimension sets. Dimension sets
are all the dimensions required to fully define a "Parametric Garment". For
example a parametric shirt may be defined using dimensions named "Back
Waist" , "ArmoHole" , "Chest" & "Side" . Given these four dimensions
Modulate will reshape the garment to fit these dimensions.
A difficult problem in creating parametric patterns has been the unexpected

behavior of the parametric model. This means that after assigning different
dimension sets to a parametric model it produced wrong point movements
which resulted in a wrong garment.
To avoid this Modulate has taken a unique approach. During the process of
defining the Parametric model the user can visually simulate its operation. For
example after adding a "Leg Length" dimension the user can simply drag this
dimension causing the entire garment to recalculate accordingly and view its
effect. If the model performs incorrectly the dimension can be assigned
differently by adding or removing other constraints and then rechecked until
the parametric model perform correctly.
Export to SGS Modulate
This command will export the style file to custom fit file, in order to edit it in
the Modulate software.
Modulate File Name
Browse to locate the place to store the custom fit file.
Select Size
Select the desire size to be saved.
Import from SGS Modulate
Modulate maintains a database of Parametric Patterns.
This command display the Modulate Server window, from which you can
select one or more patterns that have been assigned specific dimension values.
To Import CUS file:
• Browse the database to locate the desire Modulate file.
• Change the dimension value if necessary.
• From the FILE menu select LOAD FILE.

Plot
About Plotting
Use the Plot command to Plot or Cut the displayed pieces. Files can be plotted
at a plotting device connected directly to one of the serial ports on your
machine, or plots can be plotted to a plotting device connected to a network.
The new Output Control Center (OCC) is a utility which manages plot files as
well as queues on local and networks computers.
Use the print manager of your choice. The OutMan (Output Manager) is a
Windows utility supplied by SGS software, which manages files. Files can be
sent to up to eight different serial printers or plotters. The QMan works in co-
ordination with the OutMan and acts as a spooler for the different plot files.
The OutMan also works in a network situation. From different workstations,

network files can be sent to different devices and OutMan plots them without
interfering with the regular workflow of SGS Applications.
If the OutMan is selected, enable the use of OutMan’s application in the Plot
dialog box. Also, refer to the Configuring SGS Software to Your Plotter
section in the Installation and setup chapter of the manual.
There is a difference between the Plot and Print commands. Plot is used when
using the OutMan print spooler to support your large pen plotters (Gerbers and
Iolines) and InkJet/Dot Matrix plotters (HP600, EnCad, AlgoTex, and the
CalComp InkJet). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all paper
sizes larger than this are referred to as large.
Print is used when using the Windows print spooler and windows to support
your small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.).
! Note: If you use only one plotter, you will not have to select and configure
a plotter each time. The configuration will be saved in the
OUTMAN.INI. If you have more than 1 plotter, once they are
configured you will only have to specify the PLTR#.
Plotter Installation
! Note: Make sure that your plotter is installed and turned on.
! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.
Plotter (Output Manager) Setup
In order to use the plot command to send a job to an existing plotter, SGS
software must be configured properly. The Plotter Setup command defines the
communication parameters for the plotters in use. Up to 8 different plotters
can be defined in a network.
! Note: Select between the OutMan and the OCC as the output manager in
the Plot dialog box. The "Use Output Manger" must be checked.
! Note: The communication parameters in the computer output port should

have been previously set to match the same parameters in the output
device. A print manager for a Local or Network Plotter should have
also been installed. For more information, refer to the Configuring
SGS software To Your Plotter section in the end of this book.
Setting the OutMan as Output Manager
• From the Plot dialog box select the OutMan as output manager.
• From the File Menu choose Plotter (Output Manager) Setup. The
Plotter Setup Dialog box is displayed
• Enable the Output Manager by clicking the box. A small V is

placed in the box.
! Note: In most cases the Output Manager must be enabled in order to plot.
• Next, specify where the settings you select are to be saved; to do

this you will need to locate your Output Manager INI file. Click
Browse to view your directories. The Output Manager INI File
dialog box will be displayed.
• Select the OptiTex directory. (The file Outman.ini automatically

displays in the File Name field.)
• Click OK. The Plotter Setup dialog box is displayed with the
selected Outman.ini path shown.
! Note: The SGS PDS, Grading, and Marking software all use the same
OutMan and Plotter Setup dialog boxes. Some options only apply to
PDS and are not accessible in the Marking software, and vise-versa.
• Select the plotter by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of
the current plotter and select the appropriate PLTR#.
! Note: The number of plotters in the list depends on how many plotters
were specified during the Marking program Installation procedure.
• Click OK.
To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:
• From the File menu choose Open. The Open dialog box will
display.
• Select the desired Design file.

! Tip: To open a file quickly, double click the file name.
• Click OK to open the file. Select a piece.
• From the File menu select Plot. The Plot dialog box is displayed.
Verify that the correct file is displayed in the file name box. If
not, click Browse and select the correct file.
• Select the desired options.
! Tip: Verify that the correct Set up, paper size and plotter width, have been
selected prior to clicking OK.
• Click OK to save changes and exits the Plot Setting Dialog Box.
The pieces will be plotted or cut.
! Tip: Once a file has been sent to the OutMan, you can continue to work at
your computer.
SGS software uses the WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) system
while printing and plotting. This means that what you see (on the screen) is
what you get from the output device.
Setting the Output Control Center (OCC) as Output Manager
The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your ploter or
cutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs.
The OCC supports plotter in local computer or on any other computer on your
network.
To setup plotter to work with the OCC Manger
Use this command to install a new plotter on your computer, to connect to a

network plotter installed on another computer, or change the configuration of
an existing plotter.
• Click the ADD button to add a plotter.
• Select between "My Computer" and "Network Computer"

depends where the plotter is connected.
Plotter connected to network computer
You can type the name of the remote
Computer (computer with the plotter) and click Connect, or double click on
Entire Network to browse and find your computer. Once you find your
computer, click on the + sign to see the plotters shared on this computer.
Select the desired plotter, then Finish.
You can now ready to plot to a remote plotter across your network.
Adding Plotter on Local Computer
Select the Port (COME, LP, etc) your plotter is connected to, then Next.
give the plotter queue a name For each plotter a Queue is created to hold,
process and store files for your plotter. The default location will be displayed
in the Plotters Queue Folder. To change the Queue location, click on the
Browse button then select the desired location for the Queue.
Check the Shared Plotter box to make this plotter is available to other
computers.
Once you have the desired settings, click Finish to add the selected device.
Plot Dialog Box:

File Name
The File Name field contains the destination and name of the plot or cut file
that you are creating. To select a different file name or directory click on
Browse.
Use Output Manager
This option must be enabled to use the OutMan. The OutMan allows
automatic plotter, if the OutMan is not enabled, the plot file is created and
stored in the displayed directory. Then, the plot file has to be copied to the
appropriate port.
Network Plotting
Enable this command when plotting through the network.
Output Manager Service
Choose between the OCC (Output Control Center) or the OutMan.
Alert on Start
When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job is about
to start plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer
attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.
Alert on End
When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job has
finished plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer
attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.
Remove on End
When this option is enabled, the plot file is deleted after it is plotted.
Copies
This option allows specification of he number of copies to be plotted.
Plot to Ftp
This option enables you to upload the plot file to ftp server.
How To Use The FTP Plot Utility Feature:
There are three basic things that OptiTex user should have in Order to use the
new FTP plot utility feature:
• IP address (Internet protocol) of the destination computer.
• Password in case that the destination computer is password

protected.
• User Name in case other users share the destination computer.
Now, you can contact your computer using standard network cable to the
destination computer network.
After you connect to your network follow the following steps:
• Go to “Plot Dialog” box.
• Use “Setup” button in “FTP Plot” section in order to open ftp

dialog box:
• Insert the destination Computer IP addresses to “Address”

windows and if there is a need, insert User name and Password .
• Now press on “Browse” button to access your destination

computer network (the access process can take some time).
• From the “Select Working directory” windows select the working

directory which will be a target directory for the plot will.? On the
“Path” windows the selected directory path will be displayed (you
can’t edit the path on the “Path” windows).
• Confirm your selection with Ok button.
• On the Plot dialog check “Use FTP plot” option.
• Send the plot file to this destination using “Ok” on plot dialog box.
Log File Reports - Use
This option writes plot information to a log file that contains information about
the marker, number of pieces placed and material usage. The log file can then
be used for tracking plotted files. To view the log file, use a text editor or
select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.
Change Log
Click on Change Log to change the text file to which the plot information is
written.
Note (Custom Header)
This option allows the user to type in notes or instructions and plot them at the
end of the marker in the header. Note that if Marker Header is disabled, the
notes do not plot.
Plotter/Cutter Setting
This option displays the plotter type in use and how it is configured. It also
displays the plotter page size. Plotters and plotter settings can be changed in
the Plotter Setting dialog box. To open the Plotter Settings dialog box click on
Setup.
Plot Setting Dialog Box:
The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed through the Plot dialog box.
Device Name
Name is the assigned name of the plotter. Up to 8 plotters can be defined.

They are listed as PLTR1, PLTR2, etc. The name can be changed in the Plotter
Setup command.
Driver Format
This option displays the Language the plotter is using. Consult your
plotter/cutter manual for language information for specific information related
to your plotter or cutter. Plotter Size. Each output device, whether it is a plotter
or a cutter, is treated as a plotter. Each kind of an X Y machine has its own
type of command file or language. The following plotter types are supported:
DM-PL (*.DMP)
HP-GL (*.HPG)
HP-GL PlotTec (*.HPT)
HP-GL Generic(*.HPG)
HP-GL /2 (*.HP2)
Design Partner (*.DP)
IOLS (*.IOL)
EIA (*.EIA)
Cybrid Plotter
Cybrid Cutter/Plotter
Mutoh Plotter
APGL Gerber Plotter (*.GGT)
AP700 Plotter
Gerber Cutter (*.GBR)
Eastman Cutter (*CMD)
Cutting Edge Cutter (*NC)
Wild Plotter/Cutter
Wild Plotter (*.WIL)
Microjet (*STD)
External Format
Device Options:
0,0 Page in Center
This option keeps jobs aligned when using more than one page. Most plotters
have their 0/0 point located at the Bottom Left point of the paper, although
some may have their 0/0 point set at the center of the page. If using a plotter,
which has a 0/0 point at the center, enable this option. This orientation setting
is used primarily for flat bed plotters.
Manual Frame Advance
This option is used primarily on flat bed plotters and plotters that do not feed
paper automatically. The plot stops at the end of each page to allow for paper
replacement. If this option is enabled, the Enter key must be pressed after each
page.
Use CR/LF in Code
Certain Gerber Cut Formats only use this option. Some Gerber cutters require
a new line after each command and some do not. The best way to check if
your cutter needs to have a new line is to look at one of its example files. If the
file is one long paragraph, this command is not necessary. If the file starts each
command on a new line, this option must be enabled.
Use Initialization in File Header [<M70>/<IN>/…]
Some Gerber Cut Formats use this option. When enabled, it instructs the cutter
to stop and wait for the user permission to continue/start the job. Not all
Gerber plotters support this command. Consult the Gerber User’s Manual for
information on plotter/cutter support.
Use Bite Offset
This option is only supported by the Gerber Cut format. When enabled, it
instructs the plotter to put a small alignment mark on the fabric at the end of
each frame. The small mark is placed outside the Marker area so as not
interfere with the actual marker.
Use Plotter’s Built in Fonts
When this option is enabled, the plotter substitutes the fonts used on the
computer with its own built in fonts. Not all plotters have built in fonts.
Consult the plotter’s manual for font information. Using the plotters built in
fonts speeds up plotting.
Plotter Font File
Click Browse to select a font file. The Open Font File dialog box displays
allowing a font to be selected from a specific drive or directory. If Use Plotters
Built in Fonts is disabled, you must use the PLOT-ENG.FNT file.
Default Font Size (Inches)
This is the font size, which the plotter automatically uses if no other size is
specified. The default is .315
Plotter Page Size
Determines the working area of the plotter. The program will “remember” the
last setting even if it was for a different plotter. X is the length of the frame or
the endless length of the paper roll. Y is the width of the paper.
Gap after Plotting
This is the space the plotter puts at the end of the plot job. The default is 0.
Minimal Plot/Cut line
This option is only used for some Gerber plotters. It specifies the minimum
distance at which a line is still being cut. It saves plotting/cutting time to not
cut two points that are too close to one another.
Tools Setup Tab
The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line type
according to tool number or tool type.
There are several different plotter formats, which are support different lines
type:
HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter etc'
In order to plot a different line type follow the next steps:

• How defined a special tool to a selected element:
• For defining a special tool number to a selected piece use "Tool

Number/Layer Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut
Order" dialog on Piece menu.
• For defining a special tool number to an internal element use

"Tool Number/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute
dialog. Select the desirable internal and use double click function
to open the attribute dialog box (you select the internal and then
open the internal attribute dialog box from "Edit" menu). You can
also add a special tool number for internal on "Cut Order" dialog
box.
! Tip: You can use OptiTex new feature to select a tool name, just click with
mouse right button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a
dialog box will be open:
• Now, after you defended new special tools for a selected element
internal or external, the news tool name will be display on the
"Tools" column with the rest of OptiTex standard tools. Now,
defined a line type on "Plot setup" dialog box:
• Insert the tool number in to the "Head Number" column on the

correct rows according the desirable tool or command type.
Remember you can give only numeric names on "Head Number"
column!
• Select the desirable line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in
the tool number into the "Number of Heads" windows!
• Confirm your selection with "OK" button.

To change line type:
• Find the tool that you want to change his line type z
• Click on the field, a drop down menu appears.
• Select the desire line type from the menu.
How to work with "Tool setup" tab on "Plot setup" dialog box:
The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line types
according to tool numbers or tool types.
There are several different plotter formats, which are support different lines
type:
HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter, etc.'
In order to plot a different line type follow these next steps:
How to define a special tool to for a selected element:
• To define a special tool number for a selected piece use "Tool

Number/Layer Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut
Order" dialog on Piece menu.
• To define a special tool number for an internal element use "Tool

Number/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute dialog
box.. Select the desired internal element and use the double click
function to open the attribute dialog box (you select the internal
and then open the internal attribute dialog box from "Edit" menu).
You can also add a special tool number for internal on "Cut
Order" dialog box.
! Tip :You can use the new OptiTex feature to select a tool name:, just click with
right mouse button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a dialog box will
open:
• Now, after you define new special tools for a selected element,
internal or external, the news tool name will be displayed on the
"Tools" column with the rest of OptiTex standard tools. To define
a line type on "Plot setup" dialog box:
• Insert the tool number in the "Head Number" column on the

corresponding rows according the desired tool or command type.
Remember you can only use numeric names in the"Head
Number" column!
• Select the desired line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in the
tool number into the "Number of Heads" windows
Page Format:
Single
This option scales the marker to fit on one page. The page size is specified in
the Plot Settings dialog box (see below).
Multiple
Select this option when plotting to a smaller plotter that limits the width of the
marker. This option will plot the marker so that the marker width (Y) is scaled
to fit on the plotter paper. The marker length (X) is then scaled to match the
scaling of the width.
Fixed Scale
Allows the user to specify scale (i.e. 4 to 1.) The default scale is 1 to 1, full
scale.
! Note: If the output device is smaller than the marker, SGS software creates
a file, which is already divided into the required number of pages.
Each page is marked at a specific location with joining marks to
help overlap (tile) the pages to complete the whole picture.
Options
Plot Continuous
Select this option to plot continuously. Plotters with roll paper generally plot
continuously. Plotters with manual page feed do not plot continuously.
! Note: If the actual marker is wider than the plotter, the selected option is
Scale equal to 1 X 1 and Continuous Plot is enabled, then special
marks are plotted to join two or more sections of the plot.
Marker Header
When this option is enabled, general maker information such as size, plies, and
number of pieces placed, notes, etc. is plotted at the end of the marker.
Plot Header Above the Marker
When this option is enabled, the header of the Marker will plot above it.
Marker Boundary
When this option is enabled, the marker boundary or frame is plotted around
the marker edge.
One Frame Only
This option scales the selection to fit on one plotter page and works in
conjunction with Plot Continuous.
Frame Advance after the Last Frame
This option when using a pen plotter that plots in defined frames. For example,
the Ioline 600 plots in 46” frames. It is necessary to check this option so that
the plotter will advance after plotting the first frame.
Plot/Cut Piece in One Frame
This option is using with flat bead plotters/cutters. When this option is
enabled any piece that is not within the frame in whole will not be plotted or
cut.
Order According Tools
This option is used when more than one pen or knife is used to cut or draw the
marker. When enabled, all sections assigned to one tool can be sent at the
same time: all the notches are cut or plotted first, then drills, then punches, and
then the cut sequence. This allows for a changing of tools between sections.
Pens (Tools) According to Sizes
When using a multiple pen plotter, it is possible to assign each size a different
pen. Select this option to enable plotting with pens according to size.
Bulge (Chord Error) Inches
The Bulge (Chord Error) setting is the smallest size at which an arc can appear
and still be plotted as an arc. When plotting arcs with very small bulge chords
(practically straight lines) it is faster to plot them as straight lines. This saves
plotting time. If the Bulge (Chord Error) is set to 0, the curve is plotted, no
matter how slight.
Min. Plot Spline Segment
The minimum plot spline segment setting is the setting that determines the
smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important
for setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotting Options for Graded Pieces

In PDS select Grading Options to choose how graded piece will plot. This
option is used to select which sizes will and will not plot and if a graded nest
will plot as a nest or if each size will grade as a separate piece.
Separate Grading Options dialog box:
Plot each size separately
Select this option to plot each size as a separate piece, rather than a graded
nest.
Sizes
Select the sizes to be plotted by enabling or checking the box beside the size
name. If the box next to the size name is not checked, that size will not be
plotted.
Plotter Setup
! Note: the plotter setup dialog box is different between the OutMan and the
OCC.
Plotter Setup Dialog (OutMan manager)
Use Output Manager
Select this option to use the Output Manager provided by SGS. When this
option is disabled, the plot file is created but is not sent to the output device.
Output Manager INI File:
The default INI file is C:\OPTITEX\OUTMAN.INI. If a different INI file is

desired, select Browse to display the Output Manager INI-File dialog box and
select the appropriate file.
Current Plotter
Select the plotter to be used in the Current Plotter drop down box. Up to 8
different plotters can be configured in a server setting.
Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)
• Select the plotter to be used in the plot command.
• The plotter can be set as default by clicking the SET DEFAULT

button
• Click "Close"
Print
Use the Print command to output pieces to a printer. The Printer drivers are
part of Microsoft Windows, so SGS software displays the printer driver(s) that
was (were) selected when Microsoft Windows was installed.
The Print command uses Windows printer drivers and spoolers; therefore, the
output device must be installed through the Windows Setup before printing
takes place.
Print is used when using the Windows print spooler to support small
InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). A4/Letter paper size
is referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to as
large. Text sent to printer can be different from the text seen on screen. Use
the Fonts Command in the Options Menu to change the font type and size
To Print a File:
• From the File Menu select Print or click the Print icon on the tool
bar. The Print dialog box is displayed.
• Select the desired printing options.
• Click OK.
Print Dialog Box:
Actual Size
Select Actual Size to print the contents of the file in full scale regardless of the
paper size. This may require multiple pieces of paper.
Fit to Page
Select Fit to Page to print the contents of the file on one page. The default
setting for printing is Fit to Page.
Scale
Scale allows the contents of the file to be printed in a specified scale. For
example, a scale of 1 is 100%, and .50 is 50%.
Width
Width allows the user to specify a width for the print out. When a width is
specified, notice that the scale changes accordingly.
Height
Height allows the user to specify a height for the print out. When a height is
specified, notice that the scale changes accordingly.
Print selected piece only
When this option is selected only the selected piece prints when this option is
checked.
Print to file
This option generates a separate print file when checked.
Setup
Setup defines format for printer. Refer to the Printer Setup section for more
information.
Printer Setup
Select Printer Setup to display the Print Setup dialog box. This dialog box
shows the default printer where SGS files are sent as well as displaying
printing options.
To Set up Your Printer:
• From the File Menu choose Printer Setup to display the Printer
Setup dialog box.
• Select the desired printing options (paper, orientation, and size).
• Click OK.
! Note: Make sure to select printing parameters carefully. Some printer

drivers may not support different text sizes and fonts. Consult the
printer manual for exact specifications.
Default Printer:
The Default Printer will be displayed. The Default printer is configured

through the Windows Control Panel. To select a different printer, click the
drop down arrow to the right of the Specific Printer and select the desired
printer.
Orientation and Paper Size:
The orientation determines whether the file will print in portrait or landscape.
Clicking the drop down arrow to the right of Paper Size can change the paper
size.
Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities

Generates a report in Excel’s native format from OptiTex PDS and
E-Mails the report and the file directly from OptiTex PDS.
The style file can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported by
using this dialog box.
Report contains
Using that option you control what will be add to the report.
By default the report contains the style files as they look on the working arae.
Piece information – when this box checked the report will contain the piece
information
Internal information - – when this box checked the report will contain all the
internals information.
Excel File
By clicking on the “…“ button you can browse the files on yours hard drive
and define the name of the excel file to be created.
You can set excel file visible and the after saving the file it will be opened
automatically.
Other option is to appended report to existing file and then the report will be
added at the end of the Excel file that has been chosen at the upper field.
MetaFile
To create a MetaFile you must check the box .
The scale X and scale Y fields gave the option to increases or decrees the size
of the MetaFile.
"…" – by clicking this button you can browse your drive to locate the place
that the file will be saved
Mail
OptiTex can mail the style files to any mail recipient. You can attendee to the
massage 3 different files.
DSN file – mail the style file as he saved by optitex.
Excel report – mail the excel file.
MetaFile – mail a picture witch can insert to any office document or can be
opened with acrobat reader.
To mail a file:
• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.
• Enter the e-mail address that you want to sand the massage to.
• You have the option to attach more files and to add the massage
name and subject.
• Click O.K.
The massage with the attached files will be sand to the desire address
Send to:
Enter the mail recipient e-mail address. E-mail massages can be mail to
unlimited number of recipients.
Attachments:
To add files to the e-mail massage check the “Add current file” box and the
“Add Files” button to locate the files to sand.
Exit (Alt+F4)
Select the Exit command to close the Style File and exit the program.
To Exit the Program:
From the File menu chooses Exit or press ALT+F4.

Chapter 4: Edit Menu 255
Chapter 4: Edit Menu
The Edit Menu contains commands for editing selected pieces. To select one
of the Edit menu commands, highlight the command in the menu and press the
left mouse button, or use the shortcut keys which are listed in parentheses next
to the command in the pull down menu. Using the corresponding tool icon
displayed on the tool bar also accesses edit commands.
! Tip: Display toolbars by choosing Toolbar from the Display menu and
then selecting the appropriate toolbar to display (covered in the
Tools chapter).
Undo (Ctrl+Z)
Use the Undo command to reverse the most recent action performed in the
Style File. The Undo command may be chosen to undo the 20 most recent
operations, back to adding a piece to the working area. Undo does not work to
undo the loading of the file.
! Tip: Press the Control key and the Z key to undo.
Redo (Ctrl+Y)
Use the Redo command to reverse any operation changed by the Undo
command. Continue to choose the Redo command until all of the “undone”
operations have been reversed.
! Tip: Press the Control key and the Y key to redo.
Cut Current Piece (Ctrl+X)

Use the Cut Piece command to remove the selected piece from the open Style
() file and copy it to the clipboard. Then use the Paste Piece command to paste
the copied pattern piece into the same DSN file, a different DSN file, or
marker file. The cut selection can continue to be pasted until something else is
placed onto the clipboard.
! Note: Cut Piece functions the same as the Copy Piece except Cut Piece
removes the original piece and Copy Piece leaves the original piece.
! Note: When cutting and pasting pattern pieces from one DSN file to
another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current
file, even when the base size and size names are different.
! Tip: Press the Control key and the X key to cut.
To Cut a Pattern Piece:
• Select the piece to cut.
• From the Edit Menu select Cut Piece, click on the Cut to
Clipboard icon, or use Ctrl + X.
• Open the file where the object is to be pasted.
• From the Edit Menu select Paste Piece. The selected object is
placed into the file and displayed in the working area.
Copy Pieces
This command has four options:
• Copy Current Piece (CTRL + C)
• Copy Working Area
• Copy Highlighted Pieces
• Copy All Pieces

Use the Copy Piece command to copy selected pattern pieces to the clipboard.
Then use the Paste Piece command to paste the copied pattern piece(s) into the
same DSN file, a different DSN file, Modulate document or marker file. The
copied selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placed onto
the clipboard.
another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current
file, even when the base size and size names are different
! Tip: Press the Control key and the C key to copy.
To Copy a Pattern Piece(s):
• Select the piece(s) to copy.
• From the Edit Menu select Copy Piece, click on the Copy to
Clipboard icon, or use Ctrl + C.
Paste Piece (Ctrl+V)

Use the Paste command to paste the last pattern cut or copied onto the
clipboard into the current DSN file or into a different DSN file. The cut/copied
selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placed onto the
clipboard.
another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current file,
even when the base size and size names are different
! Tip: Press the Control key and the V key to paste.
To Paste a Pattern Piece into a DSN file:
• Cut or copy the selected piece by choosing the appropriate

command from the Edit menu.
Copy/Paste Internals
Use Copy/Paste Internals command to copy internal elements from one piece
to another as well as within one piece.
• Select Internals to be copied using the Rectangle Tool in the

Edit Tools Toolbar.
• From the Edit Menu select Copy / Paste Internals > Copy
Internals.
• Select the piece to paste internals and from the Edit Menu select
Copy / Paste Internals >Paste Internals
Clear Selected Pieces

Removes only selected pieces from the working area.
• Select the pieces to be removed from the working area. After

the first piece is selected, highlight the others using the Shift +
Left Mouse Click.
• From the Edit Menu select Clear Selected Pieces
• Replace Old – replaces the pieces in the piece bar with the
current pieces in the working area
• Remove Current - removes pieces in the working area without

updating the original pieces in the piece bar.
• Make New – removes pieces from the working area and

simultaneously creates duplicates of pieces that were previously
in the working area.
Clear Selected Piece

Use Clear Selected Pieces to remove all pattern pieces from the working area
at one time. When using Clear Pieces, three different options are available,
Replace Old, Remove Current, and Make New.
Replace Old:
Replace Old replaces the pieces in the piece bar with the current pieces on the
screen. Use this option to clear the working area while updating the original
pieces with the newly edited pieces.
To Clear Pieces and Replace Old:
• Select Clear Pieces from the Edit Menu.
• Select Replace Old and all pieces on the working area of the
screen replace existing pieces in the Piece Bar.
Remove Current
Remove Current removes pieces in the working area without updating the
original pieces. Use this option to clear the working area of all pieces without
keeping any edits.
To Remove Current Pieces from the Working Area:
• Choose Remove Current and all pieces on the working area of

the screen are removed while the original pieces in the Piece Bar
remain.
Make New
Make New removes pieces from the working area and simultaneously creates
duplicates of pieces that were previously in the working area. Use this option
to clear the working area and create duplicates of each piece.
! Tip: To bring back pieces that have been cleared, use the Undo command
from the Edit menu.
To Clear the Screen and Make New Pieces:
• Select Make New to return all pieces on the working area of the
screen to the piece bar, and to make duplicates of each piece.
Duplicates also appear in the Piece Bar.
Move Base Line

The Move command moves a selected object according to values entered in
the dialog box. The Move command in the Edit Menu switches between, Move
Baseline, Move Point, Move Notch, and Move Internal Element depending on
what object is selected on the selected piece. For example, if a point is
selected, the Move commands changes to, “Move Point.” If an internal
element (drill hole, internal line, text, etc.) is selected, the Move command
changes to “Move Internal.” If a notch is selected, the Move command
changes to, “Move Notch.” If nothing is selected or a base line is selected, the
Move command changes to, “Move Base Line.”
When selecting the Move command, more than one internal element, notch, or
point may be selected. To select more than one point, click and drag the cursor
clockwise along the piece contour or press the Shift key to add additional
points. To select more than one internal element, press and hold the Shift key
and click on the desired elements. To select multiple notches not directly next
to one another, press and hold the Shift key and click on the individual
notches.
! Note: The following Example illustrates how to move a Point using the
Move command in the Edit Menu.
To Move a Point:
• Select the point.
• From the Edit Menu select Move Point. The Move Point dialog
box is displayed.
! Note: If the Move Point option is not visible, check to see that a point is
selected on the piece. Only when a point(s) is selected, is the Move
Point option available.
• Enter the desired distance or X and Y values to move the point.
• OPTIONAL: Enable Move Along Contour to move the point a

distance along the original contour. When Move Along Contour
is selected, 2 choices are available: absolute and proportional.
These options are detailed in the section below.
• Click OK.
Move Point Dialog Box:
The X increment and Y increment fields correspond to movement along the X

and Y axis. To move the point 1” to the right and 2” up, enter 1 in the Delta X
box and 2 in the Delta Y box. Use negative numbers to move points down and
to the left. Measurements may be defined for both X and Y values.
The Distance and Angle refer to the total movement of the point or notch.
Notice that when values are entered into one of the Delta X or Y boxes, the
distance displayed is changed to reflect the value that was entered. When a
value is entered in both the Delta X and Y boxes, the total distance and angles
the point moves is calculated and displayed automatically. If the angle and the
distance to move a point are known, those values may also be entered into
correspond boxes and the Delta X and Delta Y boxes are automatically
calculated.
Enabling the Move along Contour box allows movement of the point a specific
distances from the previous or next point along the original contour. The next
point is always determined in a clockwise direction. The previous point is
always determined in a counter clockwise direction. When this option is
selected, two methods of determining the distance to move the point are
available, absolute and proportional.
Absolute refers to the actual distance from the previous or next point.
Proportional refers to the percent amount from the previous or next point.
Either method may be used to move a point along a contour.
Delete Piece (Del)

Use the Delete command to delete a piece, internal element, point, or notch.
Delete in the Edit menu switches between, Delete Piece, Delete Point, Delete
Notch, and Delete Internal Element depending on what object is selected on
the working screen. For example, if a point is selected, the Delete commands
changes to, “Delete Point.” If an internal element (drill hole, internal line, etc.)
is selected, the Delete command changes to “Delete Internal.” If nothing is
selected or a base line is selected, the Delete commands changes to, “Delete
Piece.”
When choosing the Delete command, more than one internal element, notch,
or point may be selected. To select more than one point, click and drag the
cursor clockwise along the piece contour or press the Shift key to add
additional points. To select more than one internal element, press and hold the
shift key and click on the desired elements. To select multiple notches not
directly next to one another, press and hold the shift key and click on the
individual notches.
! Note: The following example illustrates how to delete a point using the
Delete command in the Edit menu.
To Delete a Point:
! Tip: To select more than one point, click and drag the cursor in a
clockwise direction or press and hold the Shift key to select
individual points.
• From the Edit Menu select Delete Point or press the Delete key to
delete all selected elements.
Attributes (Enter)
Use the Attributes command to display and/or change the attributes of a
selected element of a piece. The Attributes command in the Edit Menu
switches between, Point Attributes, Inner Elements Attributes, and Notch
Attributes depending on what element is selected on the working area. For
example, if a point is selected, the Attributes command changes to, “Point
Attributes.” If an internal element (drill hole, internal line, etc.) is selected, the
Attributes command changes to “Inner Elements Attributes.” If nothing is
selected or a base line is selected, the Attributes command is grayed out.
! Tip: Another way to access attributes of an object is to select the object

and press the Enter key.
! Note: The following example illustrates how to change the attributes of a

point using the Point Attributes command in the Edit menu.
To Display/Change Point Attributes:
• From the Edit Menu select Point Attributes, or press Enter. The
Point Attributes dialog box is displayed.
• Verify or change the desired options.
• Click Apply to accept the changed values, or click Close to

close the dialog box without changing any of the selected
attributes.
The following dialog boxes change according to the object that is selected
prior to choosing the attributes command. If an internal element is selected,
one of the following boxes displays Line Attributes, Text Attributes, Button
Attributes, or Edit Circle. If a Notch is selected, the Edit Notch dialogs

displays. If a point is selected, the Point Attribute dialog box displays.
Point Attributes Dialog Box:
Curve Points
Curve points create a curved line without sharp breaks. A curve point can be
either grading or non-grading. A Non Curve point creates straight lines
without curves. To make a point a curve point, check the box next to Curve
Point. To make a point a non-curve point, uncheck the box next to Curve
point. Click on OK when the appropriate point selection is made.
Grading Points
Grading points are used to establish a specific point where grading is applied
on a piece (mostly used for apparel). A grading point is represented by a small
black square on the piece perimeter or line segment. A Grading point may be
on a straight line or a curved line. To make a point a grading point, check the
box next to Grade Point.
Non grading points are represented by a small black circle, Non grading points
are used to help shape the piece boundary. A non-grading point will blend with
the previous and next grading points, and is therefore sometimes called a
blending grade. Non grading points may not be assigned values in the grade
table. To make a point a non-grading point, uncheck the box next to Grade
point. Click on OK when the appropriate point selection is made.
Angle
The point angle is displayed in the Point Attribute dialog.
Name
The point can be named for reference with the Bubble Info (see View menu)
and with Grading (see Grading menu “Apply Rule with Name”).
Seam
The Seam field indicates if seam allowance has been applied to a point. The
field also shows the amount of seam allowance applied as well as the corner
type if the point is on a corner. The main purpose of this box is simply for
verification. To change seam allowance values, see the Seam section in the
Piece chapter, or see the Seam Allowance tool in the Tools chapter.
Add Relative
Use the Add Relative command to add a Point or Notch or button (drill)
relative to a selected point. This command is used for adding points, notches,
and buttons to the base size. When a point, notch, or button is added to the
base size, it is also added to all other sizes.
To Add a Relative Point or Notch:
• Select the point or notch on the base size from which to add the
relative point or notch.
• From the Edit Menu select Add Relative and then select Point or
Notch. The Add Relative dialog box is displayed.
• Select either a point or a notch by checking the appropriate box.

Two methods of adding relative are available: Specify Distance
along the Contour or Specify Absolute Distance. Select Specify
Distance Along Contour to a point onto the contour from the
selected point. A positive value places the point in the clockwise
direction from the selected point and a negative value places the
point in the counterclockwise direction from the selected point.
Delta X and Delta Y place the point based on a delta grid where
the selected point is the zero point
• Click OK.
Add Relative Dialog Box (Point or Notch):
To Add a Relative Button
• Select a point, button or notch.
• From the Edit Menu select Add Relative. Select Button.
• When the Add Button Relative to Current Point dialog box

displays, enter the desired values to define the location of the
new button.
• Click OK.
• Enter the desired attributes for the new button.

! Note: The Button Attributes dialog box is described in detail with the
Button tool in the Tools chapter.
• OPTIONAL: Create Duplicate buttons by selecting Duplicate (on

the lower right of the dialog box). When the Duplicate Button
Dialog box displays, enter the desired number of buttons and
values to determine the spacing of the buttons.
• Click OK.
Add Button Relative to Current Point Dialog Box:
Add a button a specific distance from a selected point. Multiple buttons,

evenly spaced from the first button placement, may also be created.
When a positive number is entered, the button is added in the direction of the
red arrow. When a negative number is entered, the button is added in the
opposite direction of the red arrow.
! Note: Buttons are also used to define match points for stripe/plaid
matching on the marker.
Button Attributes Dialog Box:
The Button Attributes dialog box is described in detail with the Button tool in
the Tools chapter.
Add Slit Lines/Points
Use the Add Slit Lines/Points command to add one or more internals over an
internal or external segment. Notches, buttons, lines or points may be selected
from the Add Slit Lines dialog box. Since it is not possible to add notches
over internal segments, us small lines with a Cut attribute instead.
Add Slit Lines Dialog Box:
The Add Slit Lines dialog box is divided to several sections:
Type of Slit lines
Use this field to define the type of slit line. Choose from I-notch, Line, Button
and Point. These internal can be added according to the type of segment
(Internal or External contour).
Points on spline
Use to Points on spline option to add curve points to a selected curve segment.
Distance
Use this field to define the distance of the first slit line from the selected point.
It is possible to define the distance between multiple slit lines by entering a
distance in the Distance field. It is also possible to select a segment and let
OptiTex PDS create a number of slit lines in an equal distance over the
internal by enabling the Equal Distance field. When the Skip Darts field is
enabled slits are added to the segments while the darts are not taken in
account.
Direction
Use this field to define whether to add the slit lines in clockwise or counter
clockwise direction.
Attribute
Use fields for Length and Angle to specify the attributes of the slit lines.
Length - Use this field to define the length in of line or notch or the radius of
a button.
Angle - Use this field to define the angle of the line or notch relative to the
segment that they are placed on.
Start Point
Use this field to define the start point of the line or notch on the segment or
from outside to the segment.
Mode
This field refers to the attribute attached to the internal, concerning the output
device.
Add Points for Notches
From the Edit menu, select Add Points for Notches, and Grading points are
added to existing notches on All Pieces in File, All Pieces in Working Area,
All Highlighted Pieces (select + Shift in Piece Bar), or Current Piece Only.
Align Points
The Align Points command aligns a selected group of points horizontally,
vertically, or by a specified angle.
When choosing the Align Points command, more than one point must be
selected.
To select points, click and drag the cursor clockwise along the piece contour
until the appropriate points are selected (select points in a clockwise direction).
To Align Points:
• Click and drag to select the points to be aligned.
• From the Edit Menu choose Align Points. The Align Points
dialog box is displayed.
• Click on the alignment mode: Horizontal, Vertical, or enter a

value in the angle filed and click on Angle to.
• The points are aligned.

! Note: The Points will move to match the first point selected.
! Tip: To select points in a counter clockwise direction hold down the Shift
key while selecting each point.
Round Corner
The Round command is used to create a curved intersection where two lines
intersect on a boundary line.
To Create a Rounded Corner:
• Select the intersection point on which to create a rounded

corner.
• Select Round Corner from the Edit Menu.
• Enter a value for the radius of the rounded corner in the dialog
box.
• Click OK.
! Note: This command supports multiple point selection.
! Tip: To undo the rounded corner, select Undo from the Edit menu.
Extend Internal
This command extends a selected internal line in any direction by a specified
value or up to a selected point on the piece’s boundary. The small red “x”
displayed on the end of the line indicates the direction the line is to be
extended in. The position of the x depends on which end of the line is selected
with the cursor.
To Extend an Internal Line:
• Select the internal line.
• From the Edit Menu select Extend Internal. The Extend Internal
Segment dialog box is displayed.
• Click on the Up to the Contour or enter the desired value and

click on Extension Amount for an extension of exact length.
• Click Close.
Extend Internal Segment Dialog Box:

Size
Select All Sizes to extend the line for all sizes, or select an individual size by
clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the All Sizes option.
Up to the Contour
Click on this button to extend the selected inner line to the perimeter of the
piece. The side extended will be the selected end of the element.
Extension Amount
Click on this button to extend the selected inner line by a specific amount.
Enter the amount in the field next to Extension Amount. The side extended
will be the selected end of the element.
Segment
Use the Segment command to mark a selected shape or segment of a piece,
copy it, and paste it to another location. The Paste tools can be used on the
same or a different piece in the current style file or in a different style file. The
commands, Copy, Show, Paste Proportional, Paste Notches, Paste Grading,
Paste Between Two Points, and Paste Internal are available within Segment in
the Edit menu.
! Note: An external segment can by copied and paste as an internal to any

piece, also with its grading.
Copy:
Use Copy to copy a shape or segment to the clipboard.
To Copy a Segment:
• Select the segments that will be copied by dragging the cursor

from the first point of the area to the last point.
• From the Edit Menu select Segment and then select Copy. The
segment is now copied onto the clipboard and will remain there
until something else is copied to the clipboard.
Show Segment
Use Show Segment to show the segment currently on the Clipboard. The
Show Segment command allows changing the start point of the selection to be
pasted or changing the direction of the shape by using the mirror button.
The Inverse option flips the start point of the segment, marked with an “X” to
the opposite side. The Mirror option mirrors the selected segment, vertically
flipping it around the Y-axis. Both options may be used.
To Show the Segment
• From the Edit Menu select Segment and then select Show. The
Segment Editor dialog box displays and the red “x” marks the
starting paste point of the segment
! Note: The sections are always displayed and pasted in a clockwise

manner.
• Mirror or Invert the selected object as desired.
• Enable Use Notches to paste notches with the segment.
• Click OK.
Use Grading
Check this option if want to copy the segment grading.
Use Darts
Check this option if you want to copy the segment dart.
Use Notches
Check this option if want to copy the segment notches.

Paste Segment Proportional
Use the Paste Segment Proportional command to paste the copied segment
between two selected points. The copied segment can be placed between any
two points, or between any number of points. The copied segment will be
inserted between the points in a clockwise direction, keeping its shape
regardless of the original size and scale.
To change the direction or start point of the piece, select the Show Segment
command. The image displays in a dialog box where desired changes can be
made.
To Paste Segment Proportional:
• Copy the desired segment (See steps above).
• Determine the place to paste the copied segment by dragging the

cursor from the first point to the last point where the segment is
to be copied. The first point selected will match with the one
marked by an “x” in the Segment Editor dialog box (see section
above).
• From the Edit Menu select Segment and Paste Proportional.
The segment is placed proportionally between the two end points regardless of
the size.
! Note: When using Paste Proportional, the pasted segment becomes part of
the piece’s boundary, not an internal line.
Paste Notches
Use this option if you want to copy only the segment notches with the segment
contour.
Paste Darts
Use this option if you want to copy only the segment darts with the segment
contour.
Paste between Two Points
Paste Between Two Points inserts or pastes a segment that is copied to the
clipboard using Copy Segment command in the Edit menu. The Paste between
Two Points command allows copying a segment to two internal points or
between one internal point and one perimeter point.
! Note: This command differs from the Paste Proportional command in the
Edit menu. The differences that Paste Between Two Points allows
copying a segment as an internal line on the piece. Paste
Proportional only allows copying a segment to the boundary of the
piece.
To Paste between Two Points
• From the Edit Menu, select Paste Between Two Points. A

special cursor will display.
• Use the cursor to select the two points between which the
segment will be pasted. Click the first point, move the cursor to
the second point (even if it is an internal point), and click again.
• The chosen segment is copied and pasted between the two

selected points.
Paste As an Internal Contour
Paste As an Internal Contour inserts or pastes a segment that is copied to the

clipboard using Copy Segment command in the Edit menu. The Paste As an
Internal Contour command allows copying a segment as an internal from
either an internal point or a perimeter point.
To Paste As an Internal Contour:
• Determine the place to paste the copied segment by dragging the

cursor from the first point to the last point where the segment is
to be copied. The first point selected will match with the one
marked by an “x” in the Segment Editor dialog box (see section
above).
• From the Edit Menu select Segment and Paste As an Internal

Contour.
Make Pieces
Select the Make Pieces command to create Rectangles, Polygons or Circles.
This is extremely useful when drafting new pieces.
To Make Pieces:
• From the Edit Menu select Make Piece.
• Choose the type of piece to be made: Rectangle, Polygon or

Circle. A dialog box displays for the appropriate selection.
• Enter the desired values.

• Click OK.
The Rectangle, Polygon or Circle display in the Piece Display Bar after it is
created.
Make Rectangle Dialog Box:
Enter the desired values for the Length and Width of the new piece. The new
piece displays in the Piece Display Bar.
Make Polygon Dialog Box:
Enter the desired values for the Number of Points for the Polygon, the Radius
and the Angle. The new piece displays in the Piece Display Bar.
Make Circle Dialog Box:
Enter the desired values for the Number of Points that will be displayed on the
Circle, the Radius and the Angle. The new piece will be displays in the Piece
Display Bar.
Video
It is possible to attach an *.AVI Video file to points, buttons, seaming, darts,
etc. It can be used for training purposes or to pass specific instructions per a
point.
Click a point and choose the Video option. Look for the right *.AVI file to
attach to the point.
To play the video file, just choose the point again and play the video.
Chapter 5: Piece Menu 287
Chapter 5: Piece Menu
The Piece menu is used for editing and changing the attributes of pattern
pieces. To choose one of the Pieces menus commands, click Piece and drag
the mouse to the desired command.
Info (Ctrl + I)
Use the Info command to display or modify information for the selected piece.
Information such as the piece name, size, description, orientation and folding
attributes are defined and changed using the Piece, Information command.
! Note: Each DSN file represents one style with all the pieces and sizes
necessary to make one complete item.
! Tip: Access the Piece Info dialog box quickly by double clicking on the
piece or click on the Ctrl key + I.
! Tip: Use Global Info to set up the defaults or most commonly used
parameters on all pieces and then use Info to individually change
each piece.
To Define the Pattern Piece Info:
• Select the piece.
• From the Piece menu choose Info or double click the piece.
• When the Pattern Information dialog box is displayed, enter the

desired information.
• Click Apply.
• OPTIONAL: Select a different piece from the Piece Display

Bar, return to Step 3 and continue.
• Click Close.
! Tip: For changes to be applied, be sure to use the Apply button after piece
info has been entered for each piece.
Piece Info Dialog Box:
Name
Name defines the name of the selected pattern piece. If no name is defined, a
numeric name such as 1, 2, 3, etc. is assigned If Close is selected before
clicking Apply or Enter, the name change is not made. The name of the piece
displays in the Piece Display Bar along the top of the screen.
Code
The code field is used to define a piece code. Some companies use this field to
define a serial number or code number for identifying the piece type. When the
piece is placed in a marker, it is optional to plot or not plot the code on the
piece.
Description
Description allows a description or other important information about the

selected piece to be entered. The description is shown in the printed
information report. When the piece is placed in a marker, it is optional to
include the description on the piece. This is a helpful feature for relaying
information to a manual cutter.
Quantity/Set
Copies define how many of the selected piece is needed to make one complete
item (style).
Typically, one of each dimensionally like piece is drafted or digitized into a

design file. For example, a man’s dress shirt style is constructed using one
back piece, two front pieces, and two sleeve pieces. However, only one front
and one sleeve piece are drafted or digitized. To create the second piece of the
front piece and the sleeve piece, enter a 2 in the Copies field. When the file is
loaded in the marking program for marking layout, each size ordered will
contain 2 sleeves and two fronts.
! Note: If the value in the Quantity field is zero (0), this piece does not
appear in the marker file.
Material
Material defines the type of fabric for the selected piece (lining, self, contrast,
etc.). It is best to use general terms for material such as “base,” “lining”, “A,”
etc., because if a garment or another product is made in linen one year and in
fleece another year, the user can still use “base” or whatever the main
fabrication was termed the first time.
The Best Quality
This feature is currently being developed. Best Quality relates to defining

areas of best quality for leather cutting.
Buffer Size
Buffer defines a buffer around the entire piece at marker making time. This
feature is often used when die cutting. When a buffer is defined on a piece, a
<B> is displayed in the Size List Box in the Marking program for easily
identifying which pieces are using a buffer.
! Note: Buffers can also be added at marker making time.
If a buffer value is specified, the size of the piece is increased around its
contour. However, when nesting has been completed in marker making,
the buffering may be removed. The piece returns to its true dimensions within
the marker, but an invisible buffer remains around the piece.
! Note: Before changing the buffering of a piece, check the working units to
ensure consistent use of one type of working unit (inches,
centimeters, etc.). Be careful not to mix working units.
Max Tilt
Max Tilt establishes how much a piece may be tilted on the marker in order to
conserve material. For example, a value of .5” allows the piece to be tilted up
to .5” on the marker.
Size Info
Size Info displays the net area and perimeter for each piece and all sizes of the
piece. To view piece areas and perimeters for other sizes, scroll down in the
size box to the desired size and click the mouse button. The area for this size
displays in the corresponding box.
Rotate Allowance
Rotate Direction controls the ability to rotate the piece on the marker.
• One-way: Always the same direction (0ø), no Rotation.
• Two-way: Rotate any direction in 180ø angles.
• Four-way: Rotate any direction in 90ø angles.
• Any-way: Rotate any direction.
Orientation
Select from Left, Right Both or leave the Orientation as undefined. The Both
options are important when there are two copies of the same piece (for
example, a front) and one of them is the mirror of the other. To define the
current piece with both parts, select Both and the second piece is automatically
mirrored. The software verifies that the correct number and orientation of
these pieces is entered. Use Left or Right if only a left or right oriented piece is
required.
Buffer Type
Buffer Type can be indicated here: Around, Up, Down, Left & Right of the
piece.
Opposite Piece
OptiTex Version 8 "Opposite Piece" filed is enhancement of previous OptiTex

versions "Orientation" filed.
Opposite Piece filed is used only when the selected piece quantity is more then
one. You can use Opposite Piece utility for three purposes:
• For marker making.
• Arrange for plot command.
• Scatter Piece command.
Use the opposite piece option when the selected piece have left and right side
while the piece and the "Flip Allowance" is none or when the selected piece
quantity is more then one.
This option gives the piece the ability to be flipped on the marker table.
Both command uses in the marker making arrange to plot command and
scatter piece command.
Both commands maintain the "Orientation" filed left and right order.
The difference is on the flipped direction as shown bellow.
Flip Allowance
Enabling the Flip option allows the piece to be flipped in the up, down, left,
and right directions. If the piece fits better into the marker flipped, the
software automatically flips the piece to conserve material for higher
efficiency. Use the U\R icon to flip pieces in the marker area. When piece is
defined with Flip Allowed, a <M> is displayed in the Size List Box in the
marker making program.
Description Text
Here you can set the font size as well as an angle of the description text of the
piece.
Disable Auto Reseam
This box can be checked in order to disable auto reseam option on this piece
only.
Disable Auto Update Notches
This box can be checked in order to disable auto update notches option on this
piece only.
Folding Allowed
Folding Allowed Defines if a piece may be folded in the up/down or left/right

directions in the marker. When the box is checked, the piece is defined as
foldable in the marker. Folding is commonly used for Tubular Marking (see
Marker Definitions in the Marker Chapter).
When the piece is defined with Up/Down Folding allowed, a <U> is displayed
in the Size List Box next to the piece in the Marking program.
When a piece is defined with Left/Right Folding allowed, <S> is displayed in

the Size List Box next to the piece in the Marking program.
Print Report
This command prints a summary report of the information defined in the Piece
Information dialog box. To change the fonts, use the Fonts option in the
Options Menu.
Apply
This option must be selected in order to apply changes for each piece. If Apply
is not selected, none of the specified changes are made.
Global Info
While Piece Info (above) modifies attributes only for each currently selected
piece, Global Info modifies attributes for all pieces in the open design file.
Use this command to define commonly used information. Global Info sets
default settings for Piece Info.
To Define the Global Info:
• From the Piece menu choose Global Info.
• When the Global Pattern Information dialog box displays, enter

the desired information.
• Click SET for each option that is changed.
• Click Close.
Global Piece Information Dialog Box:
Most of the options listed in the Global Info dialog box are the same as those
in the Piece Info dialog box. Refer to the preceding section for more
information about the different options.
Style Name
The Style Name is different from the piece description (in Piece Info). The
Style Name is used to define a name for the style. The style name can be
plotted on every piece in the marker, while the DSN file name cannot be
plotted on pieces in the marker.
Style Area and Dimension
The Style Area and Dimension command displays all area and perimeter
values for each piece in the open design file. Area and perimeter values are
displayed according to material type and size.
! Note: This option is the first step of data transfer between SGS grading
software, SGS marking software, and Dennison’s Optiplan 8.
(Dennison’s Optiplan 8 is a complete Pre Calculations and
Optimization program for the advanced cutting room).
Style Area and Perimeter Values Dialog Box

The information in this dialog box can be viewed and printed according to
each individual size and material type. This information can not be changed
through this dialog box; it reflects information that has been entered in both
the Piece Info dialog box and the Global Info dialog box. To make changes,
use the Piece Info and the Global Info dialog boxes.
Material
Click the drop down arrow in the material box to select the material group for
which to view the area and perimeter information.
Size
Click the drop down arrow in the size box to select the size for which to view
the area and perimeter information.
This material only
Use this option to print report according to material type that is selected on the
“Material” windows.
Print Report
Use this command to print a report of all the sizes and material groups in the
open design file. Change fonts in the Options menu under Fonts.
Global Change Internals

The global changes for internal option is similar to the Global Change Internal
Parameters option in the Marking program. This dialog box allows changing
the parameters on any type of internal element including notches, darts, texts,
drills, etc. The Left side of the box is for selecting the type of internal that is to
be changed for all pieces (or selected pieces) within the DSN file.
The Right side of the box is for selecting how the elements indicated on the
left should be modified. For example, on the left, Notches and All may be
selected. On the right, V may be selected. This would change all notches in the
DSN file to V notches at one time.
Use the Piece section at the center top of the box to select which pieces the
changes should effect. To change all pieces, use the All option. To change
only the pieces in the working area, use On the Working Area. To change
only the selected piece, use the Current Only option.
Global Notch Grading

This command gives you the option to change the notch grading on all the
pieces or selected piece only.
In order to apply new values on the notches select the parameters in dialog
box.
Order of Internals
Select the Holes and Internal Contours command to define or change the cut
order cut direction of internal cutouts.
Modify
This command has 5 options to modify selected piece: Rotate, Rotate to Initial
Baseline, Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical and Mirror.
Rotate
Select the Rotate command to rotate a piece, internal element or baseline by a
specified number of degrees to the left or right.
To Rotate a Pattern Piece:
• Select the piece to rotate.
• From the Piece menu choose Rotate.
• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box displays,

check the Piece box.
! Note: The selected piece rotates each time the Left or Right button is
selected.
• Click OK.
! Note: The piece and the base line rotate as if they are locked together
unless the Piece Over Base option is selected.
To Rotate a Selected Element:
• Select an internal element (internal line, text, circle, etc.).

check the Selected Element box.
• Enter the desired rotation angle.

! Note: The selected element rotates each time the Left button or Right
button is selected.
• Click OK.
To Rotate the Baseline:
• Select the baseline or the piece.
! Note: The outcome of Rotate when using the Baseline Only option is the
same regardless of whether the baseline or the entire piece is
selected.

check the Baseline box.
! Note: The piece rotates and the baseline remains in its original position
each times the Left or Right button is selected.
• Click OK.
Rotate Piece or Inner Elements Dialog Box:
Angle
The Angle determines how far to rotate the piece by degrees. Any rotation
value can be entered.
Piece
Enable this option to rotate the entire piece.
Selected Element
Enable this option to rotate only the selected internal element. The selected
element can be an internal line, text, or circle.
Baseline Only
Select this option to rotate the pattern piece around the base line. The base line
will remain anchored in its original position.
Rotate Left and Rotate Right
Left or right determines the direction the selected element or piece will rotate.
The selected element rotates each time one of these options is selected.
Rotate to Initial Base Line
The Rotate to Initial Base line command be used to rotate the piece back to its
original positioning. The base line, or grain line, is a line (usually horizontal)
which ensures the placement of the piece is in the correct direction on the
screen and on the marker.
To Rotate to Initial Base line:
• Select the piece to re-orient.
• From the Piece menu choose Rotate to Initial Base Line.
• From the Piece menu choose Rotate to Initial Base Line.
The pattern piece is returned to its original position, and all internal elements
are rotated along with the piece. This command also sets the current base line
to a horizontal position. The ratio between the base line and the contour
remains constant.
Flip Horizontal
This command flips the current pattern piece 180ø along the Y-axis (Back and
Forth).
Flip Vertical
This command flips the current pattern 180ø along the X-axis (Up and Down).
Mirror
This command creates a new piece exactly the same as the selected piece
except the new piece has two symmetrical halves made from the original
piece. Note that this command creates an exact symmetric duplicate, which is
the same on both sides.
To Mirror a Pattern Piece:
• Select two consecutive points by clicking on the first point, then

dragging (clockwise) to the next point.
• From the PIECE menu choose MIRROR.
A new piece is created which is symmetrically placed according to the selected

points. The new piece displays in the furthermost right-hand box in the Piece
Display Bar. See the diagram below.
Drag the courser from the

right point to the left point
to select the mirror line
The new mirror piece
! Note: The symmetric line will be shared by all sizes. If the original piece is
graded, the grading values are also duplicated.
! Tip: The Mirror command may only be used when 2 points are selected, as
mirroring a piece must occur along a straight line. All straight lines
require only two points. If a piece has three or more points along the
mirror line, it may be necessary to delete these extra points.
! Note: A symmetric line in a mirrored piece means that this piece has an
“equal group” in the“Equal Segment Groups” dialog box under
Design menu.
! Note: You can find more detailed information on “Equal Segment” feature
in chapter 9 Design menu.
Scale and Shrink

The Scale and Shrink command enlarges or reduces the actual piece size in the
X or Y direction by a specified percentage. If the piece is graded first, then
scaled, the graded sizes are scaled along with the base size. If the piece is
scaled first and then graded, the graded sizes are not scaled.
The Scale & Shrink command is mainly used when working with materials
that have a shrink or stretch factor. This command is also used when digitizing
a miniature pattern from another source (i.e. a magazine or book). The Scale
command is used to enlarge the pattern to its actual size.
To Scale or Shrink:
• Select the desired pattern piece. & from the Piece menu choose
Scale And Shrink.
• When the Scale and Shrink Options dialog displays enter the
values to scale the piece.
! Note: Enter a -50% value to shrink the piece to half of the original size.
Enter 50% to scale the piece double its original size.
• Select the correct option of scaling either the selected piece, all
pieces in the file, or only pieces on the working area.
! Tip: Use the Scale All command to scale all the pattern pieces in the Piece
Display Bar.
• Click OK to scale the pieces.

! Tip: Use the Measure Tool to verify the changes in size between the
original size and the scaled size.
! Tip: “Selected Piece/Contour Segment” option will scale up/down the

selected piece perimeter.
! Tip: “Selected Specials Only” option will scale up/down the selected
internal segment.
Optimize Cutter Ordering

This command was previously only available in the Marking program. Version
7 includes this option in the PDS and GRADE programs. This option is used
to optimize the direction and number of cuts per piece for a numerically
controlled (NC) cutter. Plotters can plot portions of pieces and then advance
the paper. Cutters must cut the entire piece and then advance the fabric or
paper.
Current Trace
Indicates the number of separate cuts an automatic cutter will make on a piece.
In the example above there is only one cut that starts and ends at the same
location.
Start
Start is used to set the start point at the default point (point #1 of a piece
usually located at the lower left corner). Use the Any Point option if the piece
can be cut starting at any point on the piece.
Start Point/End Point
Start Point/End Point are used to arrow the beginning or the end of the cut to
different locations. To back up the start point, or to extend the end point of the
cut to another point, use these arrows.
Cutting Direction
Cutting Direction is used to make the cut either clockwise or counterclockwise

in direction.
Tool
Tool is used to set the type of tool to be used on the piece. For example, if the
piece is to be cut, the tool is set as cut. If the piece is only to draw using a pen,
set as draw.
Points Cleanup
Points Cleanup is used to remove unnecessary/extra points on a pattern piece.
Use this command when importing pattern pieces or when the pattern piece
boundary is digitized with too many points.
To Delete Duplicate Points:
• Select the desired pattern piece.
• From the Piece menu choose Del. Duplicate Points.
• When the Tolerance dialog box displays, enter the desired

tolerance value. The tolerance setting refers to how much a
piece is allowed to change dimensionally. For example, if the
piece can tolerate a change of .125”, enter .125 in the tolerance
box.
• Select the appropriate option for which to apply the tolerance

value (All Pieces in the File, All Pieces in the Working Area, or
Current Piece Only).
All extra points are deleted maintaining that the piece not change dimensional
beyond the tolerance setting.
! Tip: If the Tolerance value was entered incorrectly, select Undo from the
Edit menu and retry the command.
Set (0,0) Point

Select the Set (0,0) Point command to change the start measuring point for the
selected pattern piece in the working area. This command is used in
conjunction with the Coordinates command in the Display menu. This
command is particularly useful during the freehand pattern editing or drafting
because it shows the position of the cursor relative to the 0,0 point in any delta
X/Y direction.
To Set (0,0) Point:
• Select the point to use as the new start point.
• From the Piece menu choose Set (0,0) Point.
! Note: Changing the 0,0 point causes the grid to align itself to the 0,0 point.
(To view the grid, check the Grid and Stripes option in the Options
and pull down menu).
Start Point
Select this command to define which grading point will become the first point.
The first grading point and the order of all other grading points is especially
important when using All Point (Global) Grading rules. To display point
numbers, select Point Numbers from the Display pull down menu.
! Note: While using the All Point Grading (Global) rules, or the Graded
Nest command, point numbers play an important role.
! Note: The first point of a pattern piece defaults to the first digitized point.
If patterns are always digitized starting from the lower left corner
point, than this point will always be the first point
To Set the Start Point:
• Select the point to set as the first piece point.
• From the Grading Menu choose Start Point.
Base Parallel to Segment

Use Base Parallel to Segment to realign the base line to another internal line or
to a line segment on the piece’s boundary.
To Make the Base Line Parallel to a Segment:
• Select the two point internal line or line segment to which the
base line will be aligned. Using the example above, select from
point #2 to point #1.
• From the PIECE menu, select BASE PARALLEL TO

SEGMENT.
! Note: If you select point 1 and 2 the base line direction will be rotated
180°.
base line
center fornt line
! Note that the base line is now parallel to the center front line.
• Now the base line is parallel with the center front line. It may be
necessary to use he Rotate to Initial Base Line command to
rotate the piece back on the straight of grain. The Rotate to
Initial Base Line command is also available in the Piece Menu.
The diagram below shows the newly aligned pattern piece.
3 4
5
2 1
! Note: When using a line segment from the piece’s boundary, the direction and
sequence of choosing the two points affects the direction of the base line.
! Tip: If the base line is placed outside the piece after using this command,
use the Make New Base line command to move it inside the piece
(See the following section).
Make New Base Line

This command is used to edit base lines that run off a piece. Sometimes base
lines move to the outside of the piece while working with the Cut tool or using
the Base Parallel to Segment command.
This command centers the base line inside the piece.
! Note: The length of the base line may change during this process.
To Make a New Base line:
From the Piece Menu choose Make New Base Line.
The Base line is centered inside the pattern piece.

Guideline Parallel
This command gives the option to add a guideline as parallel to select
segment.
To create a parallel guideline:
• Select a segment between two points.
• From PIECE pull down menu choose GUIDELINE PARALELL

command.
• The guideline wills appears on the working area.
Seam
The Seam command contains five different options: Reseam, Update Notches,
Work on Seam, Switch all Pieces to Cut, Switch all Pieces to Sew, Unseam.
Use Seam when seam allowance has been applied to a piece or pieces within
the current design file.
! Note: Creating Seam Allowance is described in detail with the Seam

Allowance tool in the Tools chapter.
! Note: To view or not to view seam allowances, select Seamed Piece from
the Display pull down menu.
! Tip: It is most effective to add seam allowances to pieces after the piece
has been designed, edited, and graded.
Reseam (F6)
When edits are made to a pattern piece after seam allowance has been applied,
and the Auto Reseam option in the Options Menu is turned off, the Reseam
(F6) command can be used to update the seam allowance so that it follows the
new perimeter line. See the diagram below.
Update Notches
This command allows you to update the changes automatically with seam
contour only on notches (without changing piece contour while seam contour
is changing
Work on Seam (F5)

This command switches between boundary lines (sew or cut). The solid line
indicates which line is currently selected. It is important to make sure that the
outer most lines (the cut lines) are solid before the design file gets sent into
marker making.
This command tells the computer to either make sew lines solid, or make the
cut lines solid. The solid line is the line that the computer recognizes as the
active line. Edits can only be made to the active (solid) line.
Depending on which line is solid on the selected piece, this option reads either,
“Switch to Cut,” or “Switch to Sew.”
! Tip: To see both lines, select Seamed Piece from the Display menu.
The diagram shows an additional example of Cut Lines and Sew Lines.
Switch all Pieces to Cut (F5 + Ctrl)

This command tells the computer to make all cut lines (outermost lines) on all
pieces in the current file solid lines. This command is used to eliminate having
to change each piece to cut lines one at a time.
Switch all Pieces to Sew (F5 + Shift)

This command tells the computer to make all sew lines (innermost lines) on all
pieces in the current file solid lines. This command is used to eliminate having
to change each piece to sew lines one at a time.
Unseam
The Unseam command removes seams from all the selected pattern pieces in
the file, all pieces in the working area, or from the current piece only. BE
CAREFUL using this command. If the solid lines are the inside lines, using
this command results in pieces with dimensions of the inner line. If the solid
lines are on the outside, using this command results in pieces with dimensions
of the outer line. Seam allowance value is lost after using this command.
An example of when TO use this command follows:
Example:
Problem: A clothing style normally sent to contractor A to be sewn has a

standard seam allowance of ½”. The same clothing style will be sent to
contractor B to sew. Contractor B uses 3/8” standard seam allowance.
Solution: Use SWITCH ALL TO SEW to make sew line solid. Now use the
UNSEAM command to get rid of all seam allowances in the selected style.
Now all pieces will be their actual finished dimensions. Now add the 3/8”
seam allowance to all pieces.
To Unseam a Piece:
• Select the pattern piece that includes the seam to be removed.
• From the Piece Menu choose Unseam.)
• When the Unseam dialog box displays, select the desired option.
! Note: To replace the seam, the seam allowance must be redefined or use
the Undo command in the Edit menu.
The selected piece(s) will be unseamed.
Walk
Walk is used to verify that seams to be sewn together are the correct lengths.
Most often, seams to be sewn together are identical in length. In cases where
there are pleats, darts, or shirring fullness, sew able seam lengths are still the
same after the dart, pleat, or fullness amount is subtracted. Walking seams
manually is often tedious and inaccurate. The Walk command eliminates
tedious seam verification.
There are six functions within the Walk command: Walk Options, Switch
Direction. Walk Mode, Notch Both, Notch Stationary, and Notch Moving.
To Walk Seams:
• Lock both piece together be using the Hand tool (The Hand Tool
is described in detail in the Tools chapter). Select the grading
point (with the move tool) of the moving piece and, put it on the
top of the grading point of stationary piece (see the picture).
! Note: If the two grading points (on both moving & stationary pieces) are
not positioned exactly one on top of the other, the walk tool will be
disabled!
! Note: The moving piece is the piece that is moved with the Hand tool.
• From the PIECE menu, select WALK and then WALK again.
The cursor arrow changes to the walk icon (two little feet).
• Touch on one of the seams (either the moving or the stationary)

in the walk direction. The pieces rotate according to the
positioning of the cursor on the seam.
• Continue step three until the end of one of the segments is

reached.
• From the PIECE menu, select WALK SETUP to view the

distance walked.
Walk Options
Use Walk Setup to set parameters for walking pieces. Also, use Walk Setup
for checking final seam distances of both the moving and the stationary pieces.
Walk Setup Dialog Box:
Ratio
Use Ratio in order for the computer to automatically account for fullness in
one of the seam lengths to be walked. A ratio value is entered for the moving
piece. The piece that has fullness applied should be established as the moving
piece. The pattern maker can accurately walk the seams while accounting for
the fullness by entering a percent amount to be applied to the piece with
fullness (the moving piece). If 30% is entered, the moving piece walks 30%
faster than the piece without fullness (the stationary piece).
Step
Use Step to set up the distance to be walked for each step. This option is used
when the left and right arrow keys are used for walking the piece instead of the
walk cursor.
Direction
Check the appropriate box to set up the direction of the walk, clockwise or
counter clockwise.
Skip Darts
Check the Skip Darts box, in order to automatically account for a dart in one
of the seams to be walked.
Distance Moving
The Distance Moving Box displays the total distance of the moving seam.
Distance Stationary
The Distance Moving Box displays the total distance of the stationary seam.
Switch Direction (F11)

The Switch Direction command changes the direction of the walk from inside
to outside.
! Tip: To back up one step, use the Undo command in the Edit menu or use
Ctrl+Z.
Notch Both (F12)

Use Notch Both to place a notch on both the moving and the stationary seams.
When this option is selected, the default notch type is applied to both the
stationary and the moving seams.
Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl)

Use Notch Stationary to place a notch on the stationary seam. When this
option is selected, the default notch type is applied to the stationary seam.
Notch Moving (F12 + Shift)

Use Notch Moving to place a notch on the stationary seam. When this option
is selected, the default notch type is applied to the stationary seam.
Fabric and Stripes

The fabric and Stripes feature is used to display fabric patterns on the screen
so that the pattern maker can develop the pattern in concordance with the
actual fabric pattern to be used in manufacturing the end product. The SGS
software works with any .BMP file. Actual fabric can be scanned into the
computer (provided there is access to scanning equipment) and then be pulled
up into the SGS design software.
The overall sequence of procedures necessary to display a fabric patterns on

screen and to relate pieces to the fabric follows:
First, select the fabric pattern. Second, create stripe lines on the screen that
coincide with the fabric pattern. This step is done using the Grid and Stripes
command in the Options menu. The third step is to relate pieces to the fabric
using the stripe lines.
Fabric Pattern
Use this command to select a fabric pattern & attach a bitmap to material
type.
The first step is to crate a material file:
• From the PIECE menu, select FABRIC AND STRIPES.
• When the dialog box displays, click on the ADD.
• Enter the material type name or choose from the list.
• Click OK
The new materiel added to metrical list in the fabric pattern dialog box.
The Next step is to attach pattern to the new material:
• Click on the bitmap file filed
• A small arrow will appears
• Click on this arrow to bring the browse box in order to select the
desire fabric pattern.
• select the type of the graphic file ( choose between:

BMP,JPG,PSD and more)
• Click on the desire file.
• The preview of the pattern now showing on the dialog box.
• Click OK
• The material files save box will appears
• Enter file name in the file name field.
• Click SAVE
• Last : Change the piece material type.
• Open the PIECE INFO dialog box from the piece menu.
• Chose the new material type from the material field.
• Click apply
• The piece now will have the pattern that belong to this material
type
! Note: To apply the fabric selection to the entire screen or to individual

pieces, use the four fabric tools located on the Advance Toolbar
(these tools are covered below).
• The same change can be made in the Global Piece dialog box
from the piece menu in order to apply the pattern to the entire
pieces on the working area.
Hide Fabric Pattern
Hide Fabric Pattern hides a selected fabric pattern from display on the screen.
Show Fabric Pattern
Show Fabric Pattern shows a selected fabric pattern on the screen. The fabric
displays on the entire working area of the screen.
Clip Fabric Pattern
Clip Fabric Pattern shows the selected fabric only on the pieces that are
displayed in the working area of the screen.
Show Control Points
This tool toggles between displaying the control points of a piece and not
displaying the control points of a piece. Fabric appearance is cleaner when the
control points are hidden from view.
Relate Piece to Stripes

The Relate Piece to Stripes is used to help align pieces on the fabric.
Remember to create stripe lines using the Grid and Stripes command in the
Options menu before attempting this step.
To Relate a Piece to Stripes:
• Select the piece to be related.
• Select a point, a notch or an internal button on the piece to use

as a reference point. This point is used to align the piece with
the stripe line on the fabric pattern.
• From the PIECE pull down menu, select FABRIC AND

STRIPES, then select RELATE PIECE TO STRIPES. The
following dialog box displays:
• Enter the distance to place the piece from the stripe line. The
piece is placed according to the selected point. This point
appears as a dark dot in the dialog box. If a zero (0) is entered in
either the X or Y box (depending on which box is not grayed
out), the piece aligns exactly onto the stripe line at the selected
point.
• Click OK when the piece is aligned correctly.
! Note: The piece stays aligned with the stripe lines until the stripes are
removed.
Set Group
Set group is used to group pieces on the screen in relation to stripe lines.
To Set Group:
• Simply place each piece on the screen as desired in relation to

stripe lines (use the instructions in the section above).
• Select SET GROUP from the FABRIC menu in the PIECE pulls
down menu.
Pieces are now set within a group related to the stripe lines. This group can be
carried over into the marker-making program.
Ungroup
Use this command to ungroup any previously set groups.
Chapter 6: Grading Menu 335
Chapter 6: Grading Menu
The grading procedure is a necessary stage in the apparel and garment making
industry. Basic grading procedures are the same using the computer as they are
manually on the table. However, manual grading is largely based on the
experience of the designer, pattern maker, and grader. Keep in mind that all
companies grade differently. The grading program designed by SGS provides
all the basic grading principles and allows the user to apply them as needed by
their company.
Grading on this system is based on the delta X, Y system. Each grade point is
assigned X and Y values which are displayed in the Grading Table. All
grading commands also are available by Icon for your convenience. The
commands perform the same function whether they are chosen from the menu,
or by icon.
There are two easy ways to identify icons. The first is to look up the icon in
the Grading pull down menu. Each icon is displayed to the left of its
corresponding command. The second way to identify grading icons is to point
the cursor at the icon. A shadow box with the name of the command will
appear.
! Tip: If you do not use grading, or you are not currently using the grading
package, turn off the display of the Grading Table to enlarge your
working space. This is turned on and off in the View menu under
Grading Table
Values are displayed in the Grading Table whenever a point is selected. The
grading values are also used to grade internals, like buttons and lines.
! Tip: Copy and paste the grading value of a point and use it on an internal
element.
Stack Point
The Stack Point command aligns all graded pieces to a reference point in
either the X or Y direction. This reference point is also called the Nest Point.
This command can also be used on an internal point or button.
The Grading software calculates the relative distance for each point and moves
all pattern pieces accordingly. Patterns may be left as they are in their new
position, and grading procedures may be continued.
To return to the initial position, determine a point at which all of the grading
points are positioned in the same location prior to using the Stack command.
Re-stack the nest at this predetermined point to return to the initial position. If
no common point is available, simply add a button mark (without grading) to
the piece and use that point as the initial point. The extra button mark may be
deleted later.
To Use a Stack Point:
• Select the point on which to stack the nest.
• From the Grade Menu select Stack Point. The Stack Point
• Select the desired display mode. Select both the X and the Y
field to stack the nest on exactly one point.
• Click OK.
Stack Along Line
Allows you to stack grading according to a selected line as opposed to only

one point.
Load Sizes
This command functions to load the existing size list from an opened rule
library file. This command would typically be used in instances such as the
one in the following example:
Example: A base pattern is digitized. The base pattern is to be graded on the

computer and a library of existing rules is to be used.
When loading sizes from a Rule Library to a file that already has a different
size list established, a message box for Load Sizes appears in order to match
the two different size lists.
First size correspond to First size:
Select this option in order for the sizes in the Existing sizes column to
correspond to the sizes in the New size column. Therefore, starting with the
First size, the sizes in the Existing sizes list will take on the sizes of the New
sizes, including the designated Base size (marked by the asterisk * in the New
sizes list). If there are more sizes in the Existing sizes list than in the New size
list, they will be deleted after the Load Sizes function is complete.
Base size correspond to Selected size:
Select this option in order to specify which of the New sizes is going to be the
base size when loaded.
To Load Sizes:
• Open the rule file to use by selecting Rules from the Grading
Menu and then selecting Open Rule Library.
• Select Load Sizes and the sizes from the rule file will display in
the Grading Table size list.
! Note: Make sure that the rules and the base size displayed in the rule
library are compatible to those, which you are going to use.
! Tip: This command can be used to define sizes before starting to digitize a
new style. In this case, create a new style with a dummy piece, i.e. a
rectangle, complete the steps above, and then digitize the pattern.
Reshape Variation Grading

This command combines both grading fields (size variation) when there are
two different grading sets in the same file.
Select Reshape Variation Grading from the Grading Menu to merge both sets
to a single grading set (the sizes in this new set, will be the result of
multiplying the merged sizes one by one).
Grading Table with Variation Grading:
Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C)

Use Copy Grading to copy the grading values for both X and Y on a selected
point. The grading will be copied to the clipboard and remains on the
clipboard until another point of grading is copied.
Typically, another point is selected, and the copied rule is pasted onto the
newly selected point.
Relative (Ctrl + G, R)
Relative is used to automatically apply opposite grading on a piece when using
the Paste command. A check mark next to relative in the Grading menu
indicates that the relative option is turned on.
Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P)

Use Paste Grading to paste both the X and Y grade that was copied onto the
clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.
Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X)

Use Paste X grading to paste only the X grade that was copied onto the
Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y)

Use Paste Y grading to paste only the Y grade that was copied onto the
Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A)

Pastes the “dd” (the diagonal grading that results from the combined “dx” and
“dy” grading) value of one grading point to another.
• Select the grading point to copy the “dd” value.
• Select Copy Grading.

• Select the grading point to paste the “dd” value.
• Select Paste Around. The “dx” and “dy” values are

automatically assigned values that achieve the “dd” grading.
Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F)

Flip X Grading reverses the direction of X grading values. If the X value for a
grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip X reverses the X so that it is -
1/2” for each larger size.
Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L)

Flip Y Grading reverses the direction of Y grading values. If the Y value for a
grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip Y reverses the Y so that it is -
1/2” for each size larger.
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E)

Use Equal X Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire size
typing.
• Type in the X growth amount for the next larger size from the
base size.
• Select Equal X Grading from the Grading Menu or use the

Equal X icon.
Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q)

Use Equal Y Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire size
typing.
• Type in the Y growth amount for the next larger size from the
base size.
• Select Equal Y Grading from the Grading Menu or use the

Equal Y icon.
Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z)

Zero Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the X and Y
point.
Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N)

Zero X Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the X
point.
To Use Zero X Grade:
• Change the X grading value in the size box for the next larger
size to zero.
• Select ZERO X GRADES from the GRADING menu or use the

Zero X icons.
• All sizes are now grading zero in the X direction.
Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O)

Zero Y Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes zero in the Y
point.
To Use Zero Y Grade:
• Change the Y grading value in the size box for the next larger
size to zero.
• Select Zero Y Grade from the Grading Menu or use the Zero Y
icons.
• All sizes are now grading zero in the Y direction
Sizes (Ctrl + G, S)
This dialog enables size name definition, adding, deleting & selecting base
size.
Append
Use this command to add a size after existing size (current selected size).
To Append a Size:
• Click in the box above where the new size will be placed.
• Select Append.
• Type the size name in the newly created box.
! Note: Some existing grading values may change when inserting sizes.
Insert
Use Insert to add a size before an existing size (current selected size).
To Insert a Size:
• Click in the box above where the new size will be placed.
• Select Insert.
• Type the size name in the newly created box.
! Note: Some existing grading values may change when inserting sizes.
Delete
Use this command to delete a size from the current size list.
To Delete a Size:
• Select the size to be deleted.
• Click Delete Size. The dialog box displays asking if you want to
resize the remaining sizes.
• Click Yes to readjust the sizing.
The selected size is deleted and all other sizes are resized accordingly.
Change Size Order

This command changes the order of the size list without having to retype over
a size name.
• Select the size you would like to move.
• The Change Size Order arrows are now accessible.
• Select the appropriate arrow to switch the selected size with the
previous or following size.
Base Size
Select the Base Size command to redefine the current base size. The base size
is user-defined, and therefore is not always the first size in the list. The base
size is not graded, meaning that the values of its X and Y grade points are
zero.
! Note: The new base size is the actual physical size of the new size name.
For example, if sizes for a design file are S, M, and L, and the base
size is changed from an M to S, the dimensions of the new base size
are the true dimensions of the S.
! Note: If the desired outcome is to change the physical size of the base and
maintain the size name, the size names must be changed to reflect
the desired outcome. A common example of this type of change is
when a company decides to make their base size (sample size)
larger, but they also want to keep the name of the size as its
original size name. In ladies apparel a company with sizes 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, and 12 uses the 10 as their base (sample) size. They decide to
make their base size (sample size) larger in its dimensions, so the
10 are a physical 12. However, they still call the sample size a 10.
To Select a New Base Size:
• Under the Base column in the Sizes Dialog box, check the size
that is to be the base size.
• The selected size is now the new base size.
Sizes Variation:
The Sizes Variation option allows the user to define two separated grading
systems. Each set has its own sizes (length sizes and width sizes). The user
can view both grading sets on the garment together by using the Reshape
Variation Grading option. (See Above)
To define two sets of grading:
• From the Grading menu select the Sizes option.
• Load Sizes. Use the Insert button to have smaller sizes or the
Append button to have the bigger sizes and name them. For
Example, Small, Medium, and Large.
• Click in each color box to define different colors to each size.

• Select the Sizes Variation tab. Enable the Variation Grading

option.
• The sizes you have already defined are the first enabled active
grading set- name it in the empty field.
• Enable the second active grading set and name it differently.
• Select the Sizes tab again and define the sizes (names and
colors) for the second Grading set. For Example, Short, Regular
and Long.
• To view the combination of both grading select Reshape

Variation Grading from the Grading Menu.
The two dimension grading sets appear on the piece (see the example below).
In addition, in the Grading table, you can see the size names in two dimensions
linked together and you can change or fill in the table new values.
Graded Nest
Allows building a graded nest using pieces that came from another CAD
application via a DXF, AAMA or any other file format where grading value
information and relationships between pieces is lost. For example, if a marker
is imported that contains a men’s shirt style including sizes S, M, and L, all the
pieces are imported into SGS OptiTex software as separate pieces. No
relationships between sizes are imported with the data. The Graded Nest tool
provides the ability to stack all same pieces of different sizes into a graded nest
and relates the pieces as the same piece but different sizes.
To Use the Graded Nest Tool:
• First, sizes must be defined using the Size command under the
Grading Menu. Define the Base size and size range to be used.
(See the Grading Chapter.)
• Display the point numbers for each pattern piece using the
display Piece Attributes dialog box in the View menu. Make
sure that the zero point to be used for each size is set to the same
number. In the example below, all pocket pieces use point #1 as
the zero point. If the zero point for each size is not set to the
same number, use the Start Point command in the Piece Menu.
(See the Piece Chapter).
• Click on the Graded Nest tool. Notice that the status line at the
bottom of the screen prompts the user to select the Base size
first.
• Click on point #1 of the medium sized pockets (the base size).
• Click on point #1 of the small sized pocket.
• Click on point #1 of the large sized pocket.
• The pocket pieces should now display as a graded nest. If the

graded nest is not visible, press the F4 key on the keyboard.
Grade Proportional
Grade Proportional is used to apply grading on curved pattern edges. For

example, proportional grading is commonly used on the hemline of a circle
skirt or on scalloped edges.
To Apply Proportional Grading:
• Select the Grade Proportional tool.
• Click on the first point from which the proportional grade

• Click on the last point from which the proportional grade

• Click on the point to receive the proportional grade. In the

example above, select point #4.
Rules (Ctrl + R)
The Rules command is used to create, save, and open rule libraries.
Create New Rule Library
Use this command to create a new rule library. When this command is
selected, the empty rule table displays on the upper left side of the screen. The
table remains empty until new rules are added using the New Rule command
(detailed below).
! Note: A new rule library can be opened with at least one size defined in
addition to the base size. Once a library is opened, more sizes can
not be added to the pattern piece.
Open Rule Library
Use this command to open an existing rule library. When this command is
selected, the existing rule table displays on the upper left side of the screen.
! Note: Either Create New Library or Open New Library must be used in
order to access the rest of the commands available under the Rule
command.
! Tip: If all commands under the Rule command are in black print (not
gray), a rule library is currently open. To display the rule library if
it is not already displayed, select Grading Library from the View
menu.
Import AAMA Rule Table
This function imports a rule library from a different CAD system.

The rule library must be in the form of a simple .TXT file to enable the system
to understand the format of the rule.
Save Rule Library
Use this command to save a newly created rule library or to save new rules
added to an existing rule table
! Note: When saving rule libraries, the software will not save files with the
same file name in the same path. It will ask to overwrite the
selected file name, or save it with a different name.
Save Rule Library As
Use this command to save a rule library to another name. This command
creates a copy of an existing rule library under a new name while maintaining
the existing rule library under its original name.
! Note: When saving rule libraries, the software will not save files with the
same file name in the same path. It will ask to overwrite the
selected file name, or save it with a different name.
Close Rule Library
Use this command to close an open rule library. Anytime a rule library is
opened and left opened while a .DSN file is saved that rule table stays open
even when a new .DSN file is opened or when the grade program is exited and
restarted.
New Rule
Use New Rule to add a new rule to the opened rule library.
To Add a New Rule:
• Select the point where the grading to be made into a new rule
exists.
! Note: See the section on New Grading Rule Dialog Box for more options
(below).
• From the Grading Menu select Rules, and then select New Rule.
• When the New Grading Rule dialog box displays, enter in a name
for the rule.
! Note: Rule names may be from 1 to 13 characters.
• Click OK.
The new rule is added to the opened Library.

! Tip: Remember to use the Save Rule Library command to save newly
added rules to the library.
New Grading Rule Dialog Box:

Selected Points
Use the Selected Points option to create a new rule from a single grading point
or from a range of grading points. A range of grading points may be saved to
one rule name. An example of when this type of grading is used follows:
Example: A company always uses the same grading on the rise of a pant
pattern. The rise has several grading points. Instead of saving each grading
point as a separate rule, they save all the grading points on the rise under one
rule called, “Rise”. When they grade other pant patterns, they simply apply
the “Rise” rule to the rise line without having to apply a different grade rule to
each grading point on the rise line.
To Create a Rule Using Selected Points with a Range of Points:
• Click and drag the cursor in the clockwise direction from to first
point to the last point of all the grading points to be included in
the new rule.
• Select New Rule from the Rules Menu.
• Assign the rule a name.
• Check the box Selected Points.
• Click OK.
! Note: Be sure to use the Save Rule Library command when finished adding
rules to the library. If this command is not applied, new rules will
NOT be saved.
The dialog box defaults to this option as it is commonly used either with a
single point, or a range of points.
All Points
Use the All Points command to save all the grading on a single piece under
one name. To use this option successfully, be aware of the sequence of points
and the Start Point (covered earlier in this chapter). This selection was
formerly called Global Rule. This type of rule is used as in the following
example:
Example: A Children’s wear manufacturer grades all top fronts and backs
with the exact same grading. All top patterns also have the same grading
points. This company creates global rules (using the All Points option) called
100TF and 200TB. When they create new top designs, they simply apply the
global rule to the entire piece, rather than repeatedly grading each individual
grade point.
To Create an All Points Rule:
• Click on the number one point.
! Tip: Use Point Numbers from the View menu to show point numbers.
• Select New Rule from the Rules Menu.
• Assign the rule a name.
• Check the box All Points.
• Click OK.
! Note: Be sure to use the Save Rule Library command when finished adding
rules to the library. If this command is not applied, new rule will
NOT be saved.
Fixed Rule
Use the Fixed Rule option to create a one-point grade rule for an even grade.
To Create a Fixed Rule:
• Open an existing grade rule table, or create a new grade rule

table.
• From the Grading Menu, select Rules, and then select New
Rule.
• When the dialog box displays, enter a name for the new rule and
check the Fixed box.
• After checking the fixed box, two boxes appear next to the fixed
box. Enter the X and Y growth values for the next largest size.
• Click OK. The values will be added for all the sizes creating an
even grade rule without having to type in each individual X and
Y value.
Delete Rule
Use Delete Rule to delete an existing rule.
To Delete an Existing Rule:
• Select the rule to be deleted from the Grade Library display box.
• From the Grade Menu, select Rules, and then select Delete Rule.
Rename Rule
This function enables changing the name of an existing rule.

Simply select the rule name you wish to change, then select Rename Rule
from the Rule Menu and change its name.
Apply Rule
Use Apply Rule to apply an existing grade rule to another point, range of
points, or an entire piece.
To Apply a Rule:
• Select the point or points where the rule is to be applied.
• Select Apply Rule from the Rules Menu.
Apply Rule by Name
This command applies a grading rule to a grading point with corresponding

names without point selection.
Find and Apply Rule by Names
This command applies all the grading rules in the current grading rule library
to the grading points with the corresponding names.
Grading Library Dialog Box:
The dialog box displays the name and which points were originally included in
the All Points Rule.
Verify Rule Connection
Use this command to change the rule while verifying your rule connection to
the piece.
To Verify Rule Connection:
From the Grading Menu select Rules, and then from the Rules sub Menu select
Verify Rule Connection. The Apply Rule dialog box is displayed.
The Apply Rule dialog box:
There are four options:
• Apply All - this command will apply the changes to all the
associated points that was graded with the rule (the rule that was
changed).
• Apply point - this command will apply the changes only to

selected point.
• Skip point - this command will skip the changes on the selected
point.
• Skip All - this command will skip the changes to all the
associated points graded with the rule (the rule that was
changed).
Export Rule Library
This function generates an independent rule library *.TXT files, which can be
processed separately, from the style file.
Sort Library:
Sort library by name
This sort function arranges rule library by name in increasing alphabetical

order.
Sort library by dx
This sort function arranges rule library by dx vales in increasing order.
Sort library by dy
This sort function arranges rule library by dy vales in increasing order.
Export Library to Excel
The rule library can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported
by using this dialog box.
Use the Excel file path to define or crate the report file.
The file can be set visible and it will be open after saving the file.
Check the “Append to existing file” box in order to save the rule library at the
end of existing file.
Mail Report - to mail the Excel file check the Mail Report box.
Import Library from Excel
To open a library rule from excel select the excel file from the disk by using
the; “browse” button to browse yours files.
Grade Rule Library

The existing libraries in PDS are to demonstrate the use of existing grading
rule libraries. They are only a suggestion for basic grading of pattern design.
The grading is based on standard grading methods. When using the existing
grade rule library, there are some important details to observe:
• The working units are inches.
• The rule names are per point and can be found in standard
grading books.
• When grading a pattern the baseline should always be parallel to

the horizontal direction.
• The start point is always the pattern’s bottom left corner and the
working direction is always in a clockwise manner.
• Position the piece with the center front or back line facing the
bottom of the screen.
9
10
8
11 12
7
6
5 4 2 1
3
• When locating the grading rule named “crotch 1 & 2”, note the
rule is followed by a number. The number indicates that are two
rules existing for the Dart and the rule should be applied to the
points in a clockwise manner.
Grading using the rule library examples:
• Open a design file from C:\Texwrk\Examples.
• From the View menu check Grading Library. (Click the right
mouse button on the Grading Library and uncheck the
‘dockable’ option to allow the window to be moved).
• Click the right mouse button on the Grading Library and select
the Open Rule Library.
• When the Open Grading Rules Library Dialog is displayed, select

the desired grading style. Click Open. The rule library sizes are
now available.
! Note: If the design file has defined sizes, these will be replaced by the sizes
in the rule library.
• From the Grading Menu, select Load Sizes.
• By using the drop down menu in the Grading Library, select the
name of the rule to apply to the currently selected point. (For
example: The lowest grading point in pants side seam is called
“hem+side seam” and the lowest grading point in pants inside
seam is called “hem+inseam”).
• Apply the grading rule to the point by clicking the Apply Rule
icon
Or from the Grading Menu select Apply Rule.

• Repeat step #6 and #7 until the whole pattern is graded.

Chapter 7: Pleats Menu 371
Chapter 7: Pleats Menu
The Pleats menu replaces the Axis sub-menu that was previously in the Edit
menu (Add, Add by Angle, and Remove). Axis lines are now called Pleat
lines. The Pleat Attribute dialog box will display by double clicking on a
pleat line.
Add Pleat Lines

• Click and drag from the point where the pleat line will start to
the point where the pleat line will end.
• From the PLEAT menu choose ADD PLEAT LINE.
• A dotted line displays stretching from the first selected point to

the last selected point. The lines are displayed for all sizes.
Add Pleat By Angle
Use Add Pleat By Angle to insert a dashed line (a pleat, fold or a guideline)
between any two points as long as it is inside the piece’s perimeter. The
direction of the angle is determined from a counter clockwise position starting
at zero (0) to the right side of the current point. It stretches from the selected
point to meet the piece’s perimeter at the angle defined in the dialog box. A
new point is created at that point. If multiple points are selected, multiple lines
are made, all defined by the same angle. These lines can be used as “Help
Lines” for final construction of the pattern.
Remove Pleat Lines

The Remove Pleat Lines command removes Pleat lines from a piece. Pleat
Lines are created when a Pleat is made with the Pleat tool or by using the Add
Pleat Lines command.
To Remove Pleat Lines:
• In order o remove points from he Pleat Line, Select the points

and drag them out of the working area.
• From the PLEAT menu choose REMOVE PLEAT LINES.
• All Pleat Lines between the selected points will be removed.
! Note: All Pleat Lines between the two selected points will be removed. To
remove just one of the Pleat Lines, select the first point, then press
and hold the Shift key while selecting the second point. Only those
two points will be grouped, and only that Pleat Line will be removed
Create Box or Knife

This command adds a box or a knife pleat from the Pleats menu.
• Click and drag from the point where the pleat will start to the
point where the pleat will end.
• From the Pleats Menu select Create Box or Knife. The Pleat
Attribute dialog box will display.
• Enter the desired pleat information.

Chapter 8: Darts Menu 373
Chapter 8: Darts Menu
A Darts menu is available with numerous new dart commands.
Open Dart
The Open Dart command is a combination of two commands: Add Fullness
and Dart.
• Select the point where the fullness will start (the point where the
slashing will begin).
• From the Darts menu, select Open Dart.
• The Values to Open dialog box now displays. Enter the amount
of fullness to add.
• Click OK.
• The Dart Attributes dialog box now displays. The two points
that resulted from the added fullness are the two points marking
the dart legs.
• Enter the desired dart information.
• Click OK.
Open Multiple Darts

The Open Multiple Darts command creates several darts on a selected segment
at the same time.
• Click and drag to the points on a segment where the darts are to
be created.
• From the Darts menu select Open Multiple Darts.
• The Open MultiDart dialog box will display.
• Enter the desired multiple dart information and click OK.
• The darts will be created on the first and last selected points. If
more than 2 darts are created, they will be equally distributed
between the points.
Create Dart
The Create Dart command creates a dart.
• Click and drag to select the first and last points of the dart legs
(the points must already be on the line).
• From the Darts menu, select Create Dart.
• When the Darts Attributes dialog box appears, select the desired
information.
• Click OK.
Edit Dart
The Edit Dart command opens the Dart Attributes dialog box of a selected dart
by double clicking on the dart apex.
Close Darts
The Close Darts command closes the selected dart(s).
• Select the apex of the dart to close.
• From the Darts menu select Close Darts. The pattern will adjust
as if the dart was physically closed.
• To reopen the dart, select the Undo tool.
Remove Darts
The Remove Darts command deletes the selected dart(s).
Copy Darts
The Copy Darts command copies an existing dart and pastes it in different
location.
• Select the dart by clicking on its apex.
• From the Darts menu select Copy Darts.
• Select the point, which will become the middle point (the
overlap extension), between the dart leg points.
• From the Darts menu select Paste Darts.
Paste Darts
The Paste Darts command pastes the copied darts to a select point.
Rotate Dart to Point

The Rotate Dart to Point command pivots the dart to a new location.
• From the Darts menu select Rotate Dart to Point. The cursor
will become the dart tool and will attach to the dart apex.
• Drag the cursor (dart tool) to the new location along the
perimeter of the pattern piece where the dart is to be moved.
Click on the point.
• Select a point on the piece to pivot around the dart apex.
• Pivot to the desired location and click the mouse.
• A Move Dart dialog box will appear listing the percentage and
distance of the dart that has moved.
• Click OK or enter in the desired percentage/distance.

Rotate Around Center

The Rotate Around Center command is similar to the Rotate Dart to Point
command except the dart can be rotated on another point rather than the apex.
• From the Darts menu select Rotate Around Center.
• Select the point of rotation (rather than the dart apex) along the
dart line, the line through the dart center above or below the dart
apex.
• A dialog box will appear listing the distance from the dart apex
to the specified point of rotation. Click OK or enter in the
desired distance.
• Select a point on the piece to pivot around the point of rotation.
• Pivot to the desired location and click the mouse.
• A Move Dart dialog box will appear listing the percentage and
distance of the dart that has moved.
• Click OK or enter in the desired percentage/distance.

Fix Darts
The Fix Darts command fixes an existing dart by changing the direction of the
dart apex. It is important to note the four options in this dialog box to turn the
dart triangle to and even sided triangle.
Make first and second edges average
Choose this option to move both dart points according to the dart edges’
average.
! Note: The command location changed between versions, in version 7 the

Fix Dart command was located in the Design menu.
Reform Dart
The Reform Dart command sets dart overlap direction globally for all existing
darts in a style file.
• Select the type of darts to reform:
a. All Darts of Pieces in the File
b. All Darts of Pieces on Working Area
c. All Darts of Highlighted Piece
d. All Darts of Current Piece
• Selected Darts Only
• Select the type of Overlap:
a. No Change Overlap
b. Set Non-Overlap
c. Set CW-Overlap (Clockwise)
d. Set CCW-Overlap (Counter-Clockwise)
• Click OK.
Chapter 9: Design Menu 381
Chapter 9: Design Menu
The Design menu contains advanced design commands used to build and edit
patterns directly on the screen. Draft a closed perimeter piece on screen, edit
the existing piece, or use parts of other pieces to easily and efficiently create
new pattern pieces.
Create Parallel
Create Parallel is used to create a parallel segment from a selected section
along a piece’s perimeter. Create Parallel allows the user to define the width
or length of the segment as well as decide if the segment should extend to the
piece’s perimeter. When the end points touch the perimeter, the Internal Cut
tool may be used to split the piece along the new parallel line.
To Create a Parallel Segment from an Existing Section:
• Click and drag the arrow in a clockwise direction to select the

desired end points on segment to Parallel.
• From the DESIGN menu choose CREATE PARALLEL.
• Enter the values for the width or length of the parallel segment
in the Create Parallel To Segment dialog box. The system allows
the user to extend first and last point of new line by checking
this option.
• Grades the new segment using the existing grading of the

parallel segment.
! Tip: Enter a positive number to create an internal parallel line, enter a

negative number to create an external parallel line.
• Click OK
Cut Parallel
Cut Parallel is used to cut a parallel segment from a selected section along a
piece perimeter.
To Cut Parallel:
• Click and drag the arrow in a clockwise direction to select the

desired segment to create and cut a parallel line.
• From the Design menu, select Cut Parallel.
• Enter the values for cutting along the parallel line. Distance is
the width from the original line to the parallel cut line. Distance
on Contour is the length of the end segments created by the
parallel cut line. Once the Distance on Contour is entered, the
system figures out what the Distance should be.
• If the cut parallel line needs to take on the grading of the

original line, check Grade New Segment.
• Click OK. The Seam Attributes dialog box appears in order to

add seam allowance if needed.
Segment Length
Segment length shows the length of any selected segment. This feature also
allows for alteration of the segment’s length.
Copy/Paste
Choose copy/paste button to paste or copy length values from one segment to
anther segment.
Copy/paste button has three options:
• Copy - choose this option when you want to copy the length
values from the segment length dialog box.
• Paste Length - choose this option when you want to paste the
values of the copied segment to a required segment. You can
paste either value that was copied in the segment length dialog
or in the compare length dialog.
• Paste Delta - choose this option when you want to paste only
the delta between the sizes from the origin segment to the
selected segment and not the segment value (you can use this
option only when the “Base size only” box is enable and check).
Base size only box
This command gives you the option to control each size length separately and
also paste all the copied sizes length (from “Compare Length” table) to the
selected segment. The “Extend By” box in this table allows the user to decide
if copied line should be extended or not to meet existing lines of a pattern
piece.
Refresh
Choose this option when you want to return to the original sizes.
Length
Length displays the length of the selected segment.

Extend by
Extend by provides the opportunity to change the segment’s length.
Curve
The curve option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the
curve of the segment.
First Horizontal
This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the first
point of the segment in the horizontal or X direction.
Last Horizontal
This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the last point
of the segment in the horizontal or X direction.
First Vertical
point of the segment in the vertical or Y direction.
Last Vertical
of the segment in the vertical or Y direction.
First Diagonal
point of the segment in the diagonal or X and Y direction.
Last Diagonal
of the segment in the diagonal or X and Y direction.
Hole to Piece / Piece to Hole

This command creates a new pattern from internal/external lines (that can be
draw on a pattern or cut) on a separate piece. The new piece is displayed in the
Piece Display bar.
! Note: Internal/external line needs to be selected before using this option

from the Design menu.
Convert Hole to Piece
Converting a Hole to a Piece:
• Select the internal/external line from which a new piece will be

created.
• From the Design menu choose Hole to Piece.
Convert Piece to Hole
The Piece to Hole command changes a pattern placed on a larger pattern to an

internal/external line (that can be draw or cut) in the larger pattern. The
smaller piece becomes an internal/external line on the larger piece and is
removed for the piece bar. The smaller piece is removed from the Piece
Display Bar.
Converting a Piece to a Hole:
• Select the piece to transform into a hole and place it at the

correct position on the larger piece.
• From the Design menu choose Piece to Hole.
Copy Hole to Piece
The Copy Hole to Piece command will create a new pattern from
internal/external lines (that can be draw on a pattern or cut) on a separate piece
and the hole will stay on the piece. The new piece ( a copy of the hole ) is
displayed in the Piece Display bar.
Copy Piece to Hole
The Copy Piece to Hole command changes a pattern placed on a larger pattern
to an internal/external line (that can be draw or cut) in the larger pattern. The
smaller piece becomes an internal/external line on the larger piece and a copy
of the new piece gets added to the piece bar.
Point Connection
Create Point Connection creates a connection between internal point and
external contour.
! Note: You can choose that any drafted internal point will be connected by
default to the external contour if there is a snap between the point
and the external segment/contour. Use “Draft Setup” dialog box to
set default properties to a connected point under “Option” menu.
Delete Connection deletes existing connection between internal point and

external contour.
Point Connection Group creates and deletes a selected group connection

between internal point and external contours. Use “Point Connection
Group“command to load “Point Connection Group” dialog box.
! Note: Point Connection Group dialog box is a “modulous” dialog box!

This means that you can work on the working area while the dialog
is open.
Equal Segments
This command has three options: Definition, Options and Show with Color.
The Equal Segments command creates equal segment groups. After the user
identifies a group of segments, any change made on one of the group members
(adding notches, changing segment length etc.) will automatically update the
other groups members according to the group’s relationship.
Equal segment groups modes: “Length only” and “Proportional”.
Definition
Group Names
The entire equal segments groups in the file listed below and the number of
segments in each group.
Set Color
Set the segments color here. All segments in the same group displayed on the
working area in the same color. Select the color and click the set button.
New Group
Use the name field to give the group name. Click the Create Group button to
create the group
Length Only
Check this box in order that the segment in the group will be equal only by the
length
Proportional
Check this box in order that the any length change on one of the segment will
affect the other member at the group by changing the length proportionally to
the original
segment.
Delete Group
Click on the button in order to delete the highlight group

Segment
Use the arrows to chose between the segment in the group in order to apply
changes to one of them.
Add New Segment
Click to add a new segment to a group. Select the segment and then highlight
the group to be adds to.
Options
These options will set the default for all the equal segment groups.
Create Equals by Cut:
Segments, Length only or None
Create equals by Mirror
Custom Fit
The Custom Fit system, should give the user the right tools to be able to take
almost any kind of garment, to create a set of parameters, that by definition, if
these parameters will be changed, the specific garment will fit any customer
measurements.
Horizontal Fit
Constrain a point to horizontal movement only.
After define the stable line, the pattern growth will occur from this axis and
beyond.
(For example: define the center front as a fixed line).
• Select with the cursor a require segment.
• From the Design menu choose Custom Fit >Horizontal Fit

option.
A colored Dash line will appear on the selected section.
Vertical fit
Constrain a point to Vertical movement only.
After define the stable line, the pattern growth will occur from this axis and
beyond.
(For example: define the center front as a fixed line).
• Select with the cursor a require segment.
• From the Design menu choose Custom Fit >Horizontal Fit

option.
A colored Dash line will appear on the selected section.

Fit to measures:
Adjusting the pattern
After the linkage is complete (all the pattern corners are signed in red crosses),
you have to adjust the patterns according to the customer measurements.
• Select the Custom Fit>Fit to Measure item from the Design

menu.
• You will get a dialog containing a list of all the body

measurements used in the measurements defining stage.
• Fill in your customer measurements and press OK. The patterns

will be adjusted.
! Note: You can undo in order to cancel this operation as any other
operation.
Checking the results
Sometimes, in order to check that the Fit to Measure comes up with the
correct results, you want to see the old patterns and the adjusted one nested. It
can be done using custom fit in the following way:
• After you finish the measurements defining stage (with the

Advanced tool), Open the Sizes dialog from the Grading menu.
Define two sizes, in your style file. Assign the names A and B.
• Open the Fit to Measure dialog. You will see two columns; one
named A, the second named B. these are the two sizes. The
checkbox besides the names indicates if the Fit to Measure is
going to be applied to the size.
Only for the checking, uncheck A (you do not want to adjust this size, it will
be used as a reference) and check B (this is the size you are going to Fit to
Measure).
• Fill in the B column the customer body measurements and press

OK.
• Now size A is the original pattern and size B is the adjusted ones
and you see them as a nest
! Note: The stack point of the two sizes is point no.1 of the patterns. You
can change it using the Stack Point command from the Grading
menu.
You can also define more than two sizes and use the 1st one as a reference and
the rest as body measurements of some customers.
Grading using custom fit

By defining a few sizes in the style file and using Fit to Measure on all of
them you can perform grading (by exact body measurements) of your patterns.
Standard measures
Use standard measures for getting the different values and sizes names for the
same body measures according to the different countries.
! Note: You can create your own tables for the countries or customer in
Measures setup table from Design menu.
Measures setup
In this table you are able to add your own parameters.
To change or add values:
• Click on the Edit button.
• Choose the required group to change.
• Add or change the option in the opened dialog box.

Countries
Enter a required country (Table Title)
Sizes
Enter list of required sizes (separate from each other with comma) for the new
country you added or change an existing size.
Group
Type style groups for new country or add/ change in an existing group list.
(Shirt, pants etc.)
Edit Measure
Type the customer circumferences and measures (hip, bust etc.) or add/
Changes in existing edits measure list.
Measure Bitmap
Create .BMP file to add to a specific measure (The picture will show
In the box whenever a measure is selected).
Bitmap Directory
Create your own bitmap directories from the .BMP files.
Custom fit tools

The Advanced Toolbar consists of tools used for Advanced Features in PDS,
specifically, the Custom Fit Feature and the Fabric Feature.
With the advanced tools (vertical, horizontal, curve) you can teach the system
how to Custom Fit a pattern.
Adding rules, which specify the wanted distances (vertical/horizontal) between

pair of points and the wanted length of the curves, can do it. This can be done
using the 4
Customs Fit tools which appear in the advanced toolbar.
When you are done to define a segment, you will see that the two points have
a small yellow balloon beside them with lines inside. The two lines have the
same color. This is an indication that the vertical or horizontal distance
between the two points is set. When the process continues you will see that
more balloons are added to more points each of them contains line with a
color. The distance between pair of points, which has horizontal lines with the
same color, is set. The distance between pair of points, which has horizontal
lines with different colors, is not set. This means that the system cannot figure
this distance out of the rules specified and therefore more rules must be
specified before proceeding to the next stage.
The pattern is ready for set variables if all the corner balloons signed with red
crosses.
Otherwise, you have to define more vertical or horizontal rules between any
blue and red point.
Once you add such a rule all the blue and red points will get the same color
and you will know that the linkage is complete and the pattern is ready for
Fit to measures stage:
Vertical Measurement Tool
The vertical tool is used to fix the vertical measurement between pair of points
to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of
BACK_SHOULDER/2+1 and means that the distance is a half of the shoulder
to shoulder body measurement plus one inch. The points must belong to the
same pattern and can only be points of the external
Contour (the current version supports custom fitting of external contour only,
future versions will support internals as well).
• Select the vertical tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2nd
point (one by one, the order is not important).
• Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and
click again. An Edit Dimension dialog will open.
• In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required

Expression.
• After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule
• You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rule
between points which sets the vertical distance between them to
0.0 as they should align (pay attention that we set the vertical
distance to 0.0 and not the horizontal distance).
You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rule between points
attention that we set the vertical distance to 0.0 and not the horizontal
distance).
Expression
You can use any of the predefined measurements listed below by typing their
names or double clicking on any of them as part of your expression. The
predefined measurements are divided into groups. You can select
measurements from any of the groups. Use the bottom combo box in order to
select your required group.
! Note: If the body measurement you are looking for does not exist, you can
put in your own name, any name will do. You can also refer to the
Measurement Setup chapter to see how to add your own name with
your own pictures to the body Measurement list.
Edit Dimension Dialog

Taking a measurement
When you want to make sure that the distance between pair of points is the
same as the distance between another pair. The system fits one pattern to the
customer measurements and than takes a measurement from this pattern and
uses it for the fitting of another pattern. (A good example for this kind is
Armhole and sleeve cap).
• Use the relevant (horizontal/vertical/curve) tool in order to

specify the distance or the curve length you would like to take
its measurement.
• When the Edit Dimension dialog is opened, specify in the

Expression field the name you would like to give the
measurement (Any name).
• Check the Take Measurement box. It will assure that this

measurement is being taken and not given.
• Once you press OK you will see that the rule appears in <>
brackets (<NAME>) which tell that the measurement is being
taken.
• Choose one of the Direction options to determine the

increase/decrease direction of the defined curve.
• By giving another segment the same Expression name and

checking the ‘Use Measurements’ box they will have the same
segment length.
Horizontal Measurement Tool
The Horizontal tool is used to fix the Horizontal measurement between pair of
points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of
Side_Seam+1 and means that the distance is the side-seam body measurement
plus one inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be
points of the external contour (the current version supports custom fitting of
external contour only, future versions will support internals as well).
• Select the Horizontal tool, click on the 1st point, click on the
2nd point (one by one, the order is not important,).
• Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and
click again. An Edit Dimension dialog will open.
• In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required

Expression.
• After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule
• You can also take the Horizontal rule tool and add a new rule
between points which sets the vertical distance between them to
0.0 as they should align (pay attention that we set the Horizontal
distance to 0.0 and not the vertical distance).
Hide/Show measures
When too many measurement rules are created, and it becomes difficult to see
the patterns behind, use the measures item in the Display menu>Display
Piece Attributes in order to hide or show the measures.
! Note: when the measures are not shown, the 4 measurement tools are not
available.
Edit/Delete a measures
In order to edit a measurement
• Select the relevant pattern with the cursor.
• Click exactly on the middle of the measurement text.
• In the opened Edit Dimension dialog Alter the required values

and press OK.
In order to delete a measurement, select it in the same way and either select
Delete from the Edit menu or press the DEL button on the keyboard.
The distance of an existing measurement can be edited with the Move Internal
tool:
• Select the Move Internal tool.
• Click once on an existing measurement to move it.
• Click twice on an existing measurement to edit it with the Edit

Dimension dialog box.
Curve length
Choose one of the Direction options to determine the increase/decrease

direction of the defined curve.
Use Measurements
After checking the Take Measurements box for a required

Segment, by giving the target segment the same Expression name and
checking the ‘Use Measurements’ box they will have the same segment
length.
Measurements Names
Use the measurements names directory to define your measurements (use

the bitmap measurements to understand the meaning of a specific
measurements).
Pattern Group
Choose pattern group according to your pattern type! When you are taking
measurements from a shirt, choose the shirts group to reach specific
measurements for shirts.
Industrial Fabrics
Create by Measure
Measure Tool General description
Pivot points: Two reference Pivot points. All measures are taken from these
points.
Pivot Line: A line that runs between the two pivot points. The two pivot points
are marked as AA and BB
Measure Point: A measure that is part of the (pool) measured contour

(Internal or External).
Measure Values: For each measure point you should input two values. One
from AA to the measured point and one from BB.
Curve indicator: Each Measure Point is Either a Line point or Curve Point.
Choose the right attribute for each point.
! Note: Since most pools have more curved edges then sharp edges, the
default of this field is curved.
Using the measure Tool
• Define a line with two-pivot point. The pivot points must be

outside the measured object area and both from the same side.
Ensure that the pivot line will not intersect the measured object.
Wrong pivot selection. Good pivot Selection
Enter the distance between the two Pivot points in the upper input fields.
• From each measure point measure the AA distance and the BB

distance and set on off the curved field as needed. Keep the
points input order in clockwise direction.
The Measure values must be positive and the Distance between the pivot point
can’t be Zero.
The result of this measure will be the follow element:

(0,0) - The pivot Point and Pivot Line are part of the shape - (4,0)
After finishing to input the measure values press OK.
OptiTex Poll solution will calculate the contour.
The measured contour should always be above the Pivot line.
The pivot line will display as the base line, with an arrow.
Hole By measure
An Internal Hole (Contour)
If your pool is built of few elements specially an internal hole, You are able to
input the points of the hole, by using the option: ‘Hole by Measure’ which is
under the Design menu and the Industrial Fabric command. The internal
contour or contours, you can input few internal contours, one by one, can be
set only after you have calculated the external contour.
• Calculate the external contour.
• Click the external contour with the left mouse button.

• Choose the menu option ‘Hole by Measure’.
• The same input dialog box appears. Start to input the values of
the internal contour.
! Note: You are using the same reference Pivot line for internal and
externals.
You can use external contours that were created by another CAD software. In
that case there is NO Pivot Points. You should click the external contour,
choose the ‘Hole by Measure’ and input the Pivot Points.
The pivot must be entered, but the internal contour might shift in relation to
the external contour. Any internal contour is related as hole inside the
measured element during the cutting process.
Create Parallel Cutting
The stripe cutting command is based on a user define information. The

information includes: The first cut, from the out most left point of the external
contour. Distance between each cut line.
Seam value, if any.
The cut lines are Vertical. If you wish to make them in another direction, you
can rotate the piece according the required angle.
• There is a minimum slice value that is very small, like 5 screen

pixels.
• The details that was entered will be saved as defaults values for
the next time the parallel cut lines window will be opened.
• In the end of the cutting process the original element will be

split. Internal Contours will treat as hole.
The Cut elements will be divided to the followed element.

Scatter Pieces
The Scatter Piece command arranges pieces for plotting according to their
Quantities/Set and Orientation. It recognizes pieces with more than one
copy. There are four modes to the Scatter Pieces command:
• All Pieces
• Highlighted Pieces
• Working Area
• Current Piece
Unscatter Pieces
The Unscatter Pieces command cancels the plot arrangement according to the
pieces’ Quantities per Set and Orientation. Only one of the piece will appear
in the working area. There are four modes to the Scatter Pieces command:
• All Pieces
• Highlighted Pieces
• Working Area
• Current Piece
Arrange For Plot

This command will place and spread all pieces, which are currently in the
piece, list on the Working area with a small distance is left between them. The
pieces will be placed as a nest and ready for plotting. Before placing the pieces
on the working area, a dialog box appears to define the width size of you
paper.
Scattered Pieces - Enable this option to scatter pieces according to their

Quantities per Set and Orientation while arranging them on the working area
for plotting.
Chapter 10: Template Menu 413
Chapter 10: Template Menu
The Template (TPL) files are drafting tools that are used during the design
process to help build and create new pieces and styles. Templates can be
made from pieces on the screen in the grading package or they can be digitized
into the computer. For example, pattern-making tools used in manual pattern
making, such a French curve, can be digitized into the system.
Any piece can be chosen and saved as a template, or any template can be
chosen and used as a tool for creating a piece.
The Template Window is a special place reserved for templates. Any template
in use displays in this window which is located at the right hand side of the
screen. If the Template Window is not visible, select Template Window from
the View menu. The window will appear on the right.
Open Library
Select the Open Library command to open a previously saved Template (TPL)
file.
To Open a Template Library:
• From the Template Menu select Open Library. The Template

File dialog box is displayed.
• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive or directory to select a

different TPL file.
• Select the desired template library file from the File Name List
field.
• Click OK. The Choose Template From Library dialog box is

displayed.
• Select the desired template from the list displayed in the library.
! Note: The description of the selected template displays above the file list
box. This description was entered when the template library was
originally created.
• Click on Choose.
• Look for the selected template in the Template Window on the

right of the screen.
Click on the template to display it in the working area and work with it.
! Tip: If the template is selected from the Piece Display Bar, copied, then
pasted as a new piece, it will then be treated as a regular pattern
piece and all commands can be used.
Add To Library
Select the Add To Library command to add additional template pieces to a
Template Library.
To add pieces to a Library:
• Select the piece from the working area to be added to the library.
• From the Template Menu select Add to Library. The Save In

Template File dialog box is displayed
• Select the desired option.
• Click OK. The selected piece(s) are added to the current

template library.
! Tip: To view the new template pieces, select Choose from the Template
menu.
Save As
Select the Save As command to save the selected piece(s) as a new Template
Library.
To Save a New Template Library:
• Open the selected style file that includes the pattern piece(s) to
be saved as a template library.
• OPTIONAL: To save individual patterns piece in the template

library and display them on the working area.
• From the Template Menu select Save As. The Save As dialog
box is displayed.
• Type a name for the new template library in the File Name field.
• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive and directory if you

want to save the library in a location other than the default.
• Click OK. The Save In Template dialog box will be displayed.
• Select the desired options.
• Click OK. The selected piece(s) is saved as a new Template

Library.
Choose
Select the Choose command to display the current template library. The
Choose command is used to delete a piece from the template library or to
choose a different template piece to display in the template window.
To Choose a Template:
• From the Template Menu select Choose. The Choose Template

from Library dialog box is displayed.
• Select the desired template piece from the library by clicking on

it.
• Click Choose.
The chosen template piece displays in the Template window on the Piece
Display Bar. Refer to the Open Library command discussed earlier in this
chapter for more information on working with template pieces.
Primitive Tools Bar:

This new Primitive Tools Bar feature allows the user to create tool bars from
template pieces (any “*.tpl” file).
How to turn your template pieces into a tool bar:
• From Template menu create a template file or load an existing

template file (*.tpl).
• Now save your work and close OptiTex PDS and load again the
software.
• Now, go to “View” menu and open Toolbars dialog box:
• Select your Template tool bar from the toolbars list.
Once you created a template tool bar you can use this new tool bar to create
pieces from the template tool.
How to use template tool bar:
• Click on the desirable piece icon from the template tool bar:
• Now click one click with the mouse left button on the working
area and the image you selected will be pasted on the working
area in 1:1 scale.
! Note: You can change the image scale by click and drag the mouse cursor
on the working area. To maintain the image proportions hole the
Shift key while you drag the mouse cursor.
Chapter 11: View menu 421
Chapter 11: View Menu
The View menu contains many on/off toggle commands that display pattern
pieces and the working area in many different ways. To select one of the View
menus commands, scroll down the menu list and click on the desired
command. If there is a check mark displayed to the left of the command, the
command is turned on, or enabled. If there is no check mark, the command is
turned off, or disabled.
Template Window
Select the Template Window command to hide or display the view of the open
template window found to the right of the Piece Display Bar. If working with a
template library, this command must be turned on in order to view the
currently selected template.
Screen Coordinates
Select the Coordinates command to hide or display the coordinates display box
at the lower left corner of the working screen. The coordinates represent the
position of the cursor in relation to the 0, 0 point on the screen. The
Coordinates dialog box can be moved or repositioned anywhere on the
working area.
! Tip: Set the 0,0 reference point by selecting the Set 0,0 Point command in
the Piece menu.
Coordinates Dialog Box:
There are two columns in the Screen Coordinates dialog box. The left column
is the X coordinate and the right column is the Y coordinate. The first row
displays the absolute values of the X and Y coordinates from the (0,0) point.
The second row displays the absolute distance. The third row displays the
length of the line created from the first selected point to the second in the X
column while displaying the angle created in a clockwise direction from the
(0,0) point in the Y column.
Rulers
The Rulers option displays the rulers around the working area. You can
disable/enable it from View menu by selecting Rulers.
You can also determine the 0,0 point for the ruler:
• Select a required point on a pattern with the cursor.
• From Piece menu select “Set 0,0 point”.
Pieces Bar
Use the Pieces Bar command to hide or display the Piece Display Bar. The
Piece Display Bar is where all pattern pieces contained in the open Style file
are displayed horizontally across the top of the screen. The currently selected
piece in the working area is also highlighted in the Piece Display Bar.
Piece in one scale

Use this feature to display the pieces proportional to their size in the display
piece bar
Piece List
Select the Piece List command to hide or display a vertical list of all of the
patterns that contained in the current file. When Piece list is enabled, a dialog
box with piece names, piece codes, piece materials and piece quantity is
displayed on the screen. The currently selected piece is highlighted in the list.
There is a dockable mode available for the Piece List dialog box that can be
accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the dialog
box and selecting “Allow Docking”. When enabled, Allow Docking places
the dialog box at the top of the working area. When Allow Docking is not
enabled, the dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on
the Piece List title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.
! Note: Click with the mouse right button on the columns heard to open
popup menu With three Options for your convenient: Sort Down,
Sort Up and Equal All.
Piece Attributes
Enables you to modify piece settings that affect their appearance on the screen
as well as for printing/plotting. It has four tabs: Contours, Modes, Internals
and Global.
Contours Tab is divided in two sections: external and internal contour views.
Modes Tab is divided into two sections: display internals names and display
internals by mode:
Internals Tab is divided into two sections: internals (baseline, contour, circle,
button and text) and notches, darts, pleats section.
Global Tab is divided into two sections: piece description and piece view:
Bubble Info
The Bubble Info command displays useful information such as number, name,
mode, and angle in a “bubble shape” on Points, Notches, Buttons, and Darts
when there is contact between the element and the mouse cursor. To turn off
the Bubble Info option, check “Don’t Show Bubble Info” at the bottom of the
dialog box.
Colors by Mode
Click on Colors by Mode to display a specific color or line type according to
the element attribute. To change Colors by Modes select the Colors option
under the Options Menu.
To Change Colors by Modes:
• From the Options Menu select Colors and Line Types dialog. The
Color and Line Types dialog box is displayed.
• Select Mode.
• Select the mode to change the color or line type.
• Select the new color/line type for the selected mode. The newly
selected color displays to the left of the selected mode.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all modes have been assigned a color.
• Click OK.
Base Only (F4)

Select the Base Only command to display only the Base Size of the piece. Use
the F4 key to toggle between the base size and the graded sizes.
! Tip: To view only selected sizes, open the Grading Table and place a
check mark next to sizes to be displayed. Uncheck sizes to be
hidden.
Show Seam (Ctrl + F6)

Select this option to display or not display seam contour
Grading Table
Use the Grading Table command to hide or display the Grading Table. The
Grading Table contains grading information such as growth values for delta X
and delta Y on a selected grading points. Most grading operations are
completed with the grading table displayed.
There is a dockable mode available for the Grading Table dialog box that can
be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the
dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable places the
dialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled, the
dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the Piece List
title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.
! Tip: If you resized any of the grading table columns to minimum width and
it disappeared, restore it by resizing the grading table itself
Grading Rules Library

The Grading Library contains information about a new or existing grading
library. This display is most commonly used when editing or creating grade
libraries. The table displays on the upper left side of the screen. It is
recommended to disable the grading library display when it is not in use in
order to maximize space in the working area.
There is a dockable mode available for the Grading Rules Library dialog box
that can be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area
of the dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable places
the dialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled,
the dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the
Piece List title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog
box.
Compare Length
Compare length is used to compare lengths between two or more line
segments. Length comparisons are made for all graded sizes. To display the
Compare Length dialog box select Compare Length under the View menu.
There is a dockable mode available for the Compare Length dialog box that
can be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the
dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable places the
dialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled, the
dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the Piece List
title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.
To Compare Line Lengths between Two Line Segments:
• Select Compare Length from the View menu.
! Tip: When the Compare Length dialog box displays, it may be necessary to
hide toolbars that are not in use in order to maximizing the working
area. In order to hide toolbars, select Toolbars from the View menu
and uncheck toolbars to hide from view.
• Select the first segment for comparison, and press the plus sign at
the bottom left side of the dialog box. Notice that the segment
length for each size displays in the first column in the table. This
column is highlighted in white.
• Select the segment to compare to the first segment. Press the

minus sign at the bottom left of the dialog box. Notice that the
segment length for each size displays in the third column in the
table. This column is also highlighted in white.
• Scroll to the far right of the dialog box using the small black
arrow at the bottom right of the box. Look for a column called
“delta.” The Delta column, highlighted in green, shows the
difference in length between the two segments.
• Click on the Clear button to clear all line lengths from the table.
• To turn the Compare Length Table off, uncheck Compare Length

in the View menu.
Comparison of multiple line segments may also be done using the Compare
Length feature.
For example, a pattern maker may want to compare the length of the armhole
seam with the sleeve seam that is to be set in to the armhole. The total armhole
seam equals the length of the back armhole seam plus the length of the front
armhole seam. The combined measurement of the front and back armhole
seam is then compared to the sleeve seam. See the diagram below.
To Compare Line Lengths between Multiple Line Segments:
• Select Compare Length from the View menu. The Compare

Length dialog box is displayed
• Select the first segment for comparison, and press the plus sign at
the bottom left side of the dialog box. Notice that the segment
length for each size displays in the first column in the table. This
column is highlighted in white.
• Select the second segment to be added to the first segment. Press

the plus sign at the bottom left side of the dialog box. Notice that
the segment length for each size displays in a second additional
column. This column is also highlighted in white.
• Notice that the sum of the two lines segments appears in the third
column from the left. This column is highlighted in gray.
• Select the segment to compare to the combined first two

segments. Press the minus sign at the bottom left of the dialog
box. Notice that the segment length for each size displays in the
fourth column in the table. This column is also highlighted in
white.
• Scroll to the far right of the dialog box using the small black
arrow at the bottom right of the box. Look for a column called
“delta.” The Delta column, highlighted in green, shows the
difference in length between the first two combined segments and
the third segment.
• Click on the Clear button to clear all line lengths from the table.
• To turn the Compare Length Table off, uncheck Compare Length

in the View menu.
! Note: The three Dialogs: Grading Table, Grading Library and Compare
Length can be dockable. To change a dialog to dockable dialog,
click on the mouse right button when the mouse cursor is located on
the top of the dialog (under the dialog header). A right “pop menu”
will be open, check the “Dockable” option.
Segment Length
Click on this button to use the Segment Length Option. For more information
on Segment Length see the Design Chapter.
Copy
Choose this option to select values to copy and paste. Select columns by bring
the cursor to the top of the column. The cursor will turn to a black arrow, and
then click on the mouse left button (the selected column will turn to black).
After you selected a column, use the copy button to copy values from one
column to another.
Update Measurement
Choose this option when you want to update the compare length table after
you made changes on the compare segments.
Clear
Choose this option to delete all the previous values from the compare length
table to start a new measure.
Calculator
This command will display a calculator on the screen and can be used while
working.
Tool Bars
The Tool Bars option in the View Menu controls the tool bars that are
displayed on the screen. Each toolbar consists of a row of icons (small
pictures) that symbolize the function of each tool. Many of the tools are also
available in pull down menus. When all toolbars are displayed, the working
area is smaller. Not all toolbars have to be visible at all times. To turn a tool
bar on or off select the tool bar. A check will appear next to the tool bars that
are turned on or displayed.
There are eight toolbars by default:
• System Tools
• General Tools
• Accessories Tools
• Edit Tools
• Insert Tools
• Grading Tools
• Dimension Tools
• Advanced Tools
• Dart Tools
• Template Basic Shapes (example of Template toolbar)
To Customize a Toolbar:
• Click on Customize.
• Click on New. Name the new toolbar.
• Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and on
the working screen.
• Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed for
the highlighted toolbar on the left.
• Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description of

that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.
• Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbar
• Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeat
this until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.
• Click OK.
! Note: The buttons from the Template Basic Shapes toolbar cannot be
transferred to a customized toolbar.
To Reset a Toolbar:
Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default
toolbar.
• Highlight the desired toolbar.
• Click Reset.
• Click Close.
! Note: The Reset command changes to the Delete command when a

customized toolbar or a Template toolbar is highlighted.
To Create a Template Toolbar:
A Template Toolbar is a toolbar in which the buttons are pattern pieces, which
can be stretched to a desired length and width.
• Save your file as a Template (From the Template menu, select

Save As.)
• Exit PDS.
• Open PDS.
• From the View menu, select Tool Bars. The Template will be
added to the bottom of the Toolbar list.
Status Bar
Select the Status Bar command to hide or display the Status Bar displayed
below the working area of the screen. The Status Bar displays information
about the type of tool currently in use. Turning off the display of the Status
Bar enlarges the working area.
Chapter 12: Options Menu 439
Chapter 12: Options Menu
The Options menu contains many on/off toggle commands that display pattern
pieces in many different ways. To choose one of the commands, from the
Options Menu select the desired command. If there is a check mark displayed
to the left of the command, the command is turned on, or enabled. If there is
no check mark, the command is turned off, or disabled.
! Note: Be aware that by choosing certain Option menu commands, other

commands in different menus may become disabled.
Snap and Selection

Use Snap and Selection to determine what element to snap to on a pattern
piece.
Snap:
Use snap to setup the distance in which the cursor selection will snap onto a
line or a point.
A common setting for this option is 5 pixels. When the computer is set at 5
pixels, the cursor selection will snap to the nearest line or intersection within 5
pixels of space.
Element to select:
Sometimes when elements are close to each other on the screen, it is difficult
to select the appropriate element. This command tells the computer to only
select one type of element on the next mouse click.
For example, if there are several points near a notch, and the notch is the
element that the user is trying to select, but the user has difficulty selecting the
notch (due to all the points in the way), the Elements to Select command may
be used in order to establish that the computer only select a notch on the next
mouse click.
The default setting for the Elements to Select command is All; If the Elements
are changed, the change is only applicable on the next mouse click. After the
next mouse click is completed, the options default back to All.
Draft Setup
The Draft Setup option determines if the draft tool will default to internal or
external to your selected piece.
The Draft Setup dialog box has two commands in order to enable you to
choose the draft properties.
Next Draft Counter
This option enables you to choose if your contour to draft will be internal or
external to your selected piece.
External - choose this option for drafting External contour to your selected
piece (when you choose this option your contour draft will become an External
disregarding first draft location).
Internal - choose this option for drafting Internal contour to your selected
piece (when you choose this option your contour draft will become an Internal
disregarding first draft location).
External or Internal - this option is the default, when this option is checked,
your contour draft will turn to an Internal or External according to the draft
location with regard to the selected piece.
If your draft will be drafted on your selected piece, the contour draft will be
internal to your selected piece. If your draft will be drafted near to your
selected piece, the contour draft will be external to your selected piece.
Point Connection:
This option enables you to choose if a point connection will be created every
time there is a share point on the draft line and the external counter.
The Crate Point Connection Draft message box will be displayed as a default
option when the draft line connect to external contour. Point on a counter can
be connected to other piece or internal line. Two or one piece that shearing the
same connected point will move together.
To create a point connection:
• Chose the desired sheered point.
• Choose the CREATE POINT CONNACTION command from

the DESIGN menu.
• A hard connection creates and it can be checked in the POINT

ATTRIBUTES dialog box.
Create Point Connection in Draft Message box will be displayed during the working on draft line that
connects to existing point. Use it to create a point connection.
Grid and Stripes

Use Grid and Stripes option to set up a grid on the screen or to set stripes on
the screen. The Grid is useful when performing interactive editing commands.
Stripes are useful to view how a pattern will work on a striped material. Both
grid and stripe dimensions can be set up using the Grid and Stripes Dialog
Box.
Grid and Stripes Dialog Box:
! Tip: Use the F-7 key to snap the cursor to the closest grid point.
Colors and Line Types

The Color and Line Types command is used to determine a specific color for
each size within a design file.
To Change Color for General:
(Line type does not apply to General objects):
• From the Options menu, select Color & Line Types.
• Under Object Types, select General.
• Click on the desired object on the left.
• Click on the desired color on the right.
• Click Apply to view.
• Click OK or Close to accept.
Background – the working screen
Custom Fit – the old version of made-to-measure
Highlight Color – the color of an element such as point, notch, or button

when the cursor is on it
Template – the pieces in a template file
Grids – the grid when enabled under the Options menu
Stripes – the stripes when enabled under the Options menu

Digitizer Menu – If using a Digitizer Menu, will appear this color on the
Digitizer screen.
Digitizer Panel - If using a Digitizer Panel, will appear this color on the
Digitizer screen.
Piece List Color – The color of the pieces in the Piece List
Piece List Background – The background of the Piece List
Selected Point Notch – The color of the notch when the corresponding point
is selected (the point connected to the notch).
Guide Line Color – The color of a Guide Line (created under the Piece menu
or pulled from the edge of the working screen).
Work Chain Color – The color of the line(s)/piece involved in a function

such as drafting, moving a point, rotating a piece, etc.
Mark Point Color – The color of the point marked when drafting, moving a
point, placing a button, etc.
Selected Piece Color – The color of the Selected Piece (the piece with the
dotted-line box around it).
To Change Colors for Sizes:
• From the Options Menu select Colors and Line Types. The
Color and Line Types dialog box is displayed.
• Select the size on which to change the color or the line type.
• Select the new color/line type for the selected size. The newly
selected color/line type displays to the left of the selected size.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all sizes have been assigned a

color/line type.
• Click OK.
! Note: The color definitions are saved in the WIN.INI file. These same
colors are also used in the Marking and Nesting applications.
The Colors and Line Types option provides an Apply button in order to view
the color and line changes while the dialog is open.
To Change Color for Equals:
Equals define the color for Equal Segments created under the Design menu.
• From the Options menu, select Color & Line Types.
• Under Object Types, select Equals (can only be accessible if

Equal Segments Group created).
• Click on the desired Segment Group on the left.
• Click on the desired color on the right.
• Click Apply to view.
• Click OK or Close to accept.
Fonts
Use Fonts to change the size and font of the text used by the text tool.
! Note: Not all fonts that available in the SGS software are, supported by all
plotters and or printers. If the printer or plotter does not support the
selected font, font changes will only be reflected on the screen, not in
the output files.
Working Units
Select the Working Units command to change the current working units to
inches, millimeters, centimeters, fractions or decimals. All relevant
calculations and information displays will convert and display according to the
selected units.
When using the export to Cad-Cam function, it is important to set the working
units the same in both programs. This option affects the screen prompts and
displays as well as determining whether or not the file is exported correctly.
Set Your Working Units:
• From the Options Menu select Working Units. The Working

Units dialog box is displayed.
• Select the desired working units.
! Note: If working units are in inches, the tolerance value can be set in
either decimal or fractional format by selecting the Decimal Inch
Format option at the bottom of the dialog box.
• Select the desired Tolerance value.
! Note: The tolerance value is used to define to how many decimal places to
round the values.
• Click OK.
• Attach Preview
You can attach a Preview Image to any Opened Style File. The purpose for
this option is; to add some more information about the loaded file and not to
rely only on the file name. The attached image can come from a scanner as a
Bitmap in a BMP format, or you can use any one of the graphic formats,
which appears in the Attach Preview ‘Open List’. The Default format to be
attached is always the last pieces, which were on the working area while the
file was saved. It is not possible to guarantee the following format from any
kind of graphic application. Therefore if you have any difficulties, please send
us a sample file with all relevant information and we will try to find a solution.
Grading Manually by Edit Tool

This command allows you to change grading points manually (without the
grading table) using the “Move Point” tool.
When this command is enabled, user will be able to move grading points
manually with the Move Point tool (only to a selected grading point). Grading
points of larger sizes than the selected size will be move when the Shift Key
and Move Point tool are using together for edited grading points manually.
Grading points of smallest sizes than the selected size will be move when the
Alt Key and Move Point tool are using together for edited grading points
manually. Any point on any size may be moved, interactively changing its
grading values. It is best used in conjunction with the Move Point tool.
Open Move Point Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the Move
Confirmation dialog box. The Move Confirmation dialog box is usually
displayed after moving a point or element of a pattern. The Move
Confirmation dialog box allows elements to be moved a specific distance.
When this dialog box is not displayed, elements are moved free hand, without
specifying a distance. When the command is disabled or unchecked, the Move
Confirmation dialog box does not display.
Open Move Piece Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the Move
Confirmation dialog box. The Move Confirmation dialog box is usually
displayed after moving a piece. The Move Confirmation dialog box allows a
piece to be moved a specific distance. When this dialog box is not displayed,
pieces are moved free hand, without specifying a distance. When the
command is disabled or unchecked, the Move Confirmation dialog box does
not display.
Open Create Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the Edit dialog box.
This dialog box is displayed after using the Draw Internal Line, Draw Internal
Circle, Button, or Notch tools. Disabling the Open Create Dialog box allows
manual editing without confirming the specific location or attributes.
Auto Reseam
Enable the Auto Reseam option in order to adjust the sew line to follow the cut
line when a change is made to the cut line. This option also allows
implementation of a manual seam allowance. See the diagram below for
illustration.
Auto Update Notches

Enable the Auto Update Notches command to automatically update notch
changes on the seam contour (without changing the piece contour).
Lock Piece (F3)

Select the Lock Piece command to lock the selected pattern piece on the
working area. Once this option is selected, changes to other pattern pieces on
working area can not be made. Only the pattern selected prior to choosing this
command is available for editing or outputting until the command is chosen
again or until exiting the program.
! Note: The F3 key can be used to toggle the Lock function on and off
Preferences
The Preferences option displays a dialog box that allows the user to set
multiple default option or preferences.
Preferences Dialog Box:
Snap Distance
Use snap to setup the distance in which the cursor selection will snap onto a
line or a point. A common setting for this option is 5 pixels. When the
computer is set at 5 pixels, the cursor selection will snap to the nearest line or
intersection within 5 pixels of space
Minimum Screen Font Size
This option defines the minimum screen font size text viewed on the screen
such as Piece name, Size name, etc. It allows the user to size the view of the
test. It does not affect the size of text to printed or plotted.
! Note: To view Piece information on screen Display as Plot must be

enabled in the Display Piece Attributes option found under the
Display Menu. See the Display Menu chapter for more information.
Button Radius
Define the default size for all newly created buttons
Internal Text Size
Define the default size for internal text
Grading Rules Tables File Extension
Define the default file extension for grading rules tables.
Enable Auto Reseam
Enable the Auto Reseam option in order to adjust the sew line to follow the cut
line when a change is made to the cut line. See Auto Reseam above for more
information.
Exclude Darts from Segments Length calculation
Enable this option to measure segments without including the dart.
Auto Update Notches
Enable this option to automatically update all notches.

AutoSave (Backup) file
Click the Browse button to direct the backup file (backup.dsn) to a specific
folder. Define the time interval for automatically saving the current opened
file under AutoSave Interval.
AutoSave Interval
Defines the time interval for automatically saving the currently opened file.
This feature creates a backup file titled BACKUP.DSN.
The BACKUP.DSN file can be opened through the Open File dialog box. Use
the backup file if you forget to save a file before shutting the system down or
if the system is shut down incorrectly. After loading the backup and checking
its contents, the file can be saved again under the original file name.
The directory in which your BACKUP.DSN file is saved is determined in your

OPTIKAD.INI file. When installing the program for the first time, you will be
asked where you want to place your \TEXWORK\EXAMPLES directory. This
is where the BACKUP.DSP is located.
The AutoSave command is not intended to make backup copies of all files. It
is designed to create a single backup copy of the file currently open in the
event that the system shuts down unexpectedly.
To Set the AutoSave Interval:
• From the OPTIONS menu choose AutoSave.
• When the AutoSave dialog box is displayed, enter the desired

time. The file is saved every time the determined amount of time
passes.
• Click OK.
Working Units
Click on this button to change the Working Units and setup the default
working units for your file.
Colors
Click on the Colors button to make changes to the Colors options.
Fonts
Click on this button to change the Font options. See the Fonts section above.
Notch Parameters
The Default Notch command determines the default notch size and notch type
for all newly created notches.
To Set the Default Notch Type/Size:
• From the Options Menu select Preferences. The Preferences

• Click on Notch Parameters. The Default Notch Settings dialog

box will display.
• Select the type of notch from the drop down arrow to the right of
the box.
• Enter the desired dimensions in the Length and Width fields.
• Enter an angle if the notch should be placed on an angle. (For

example an outside V notch will have a 180-degree angle.)
• Click OK.
All newly created notches are created as the default notch type.
! Note: A single pattern piece may have more than one type of notch.
Change an existing notch size or type by selecting the notch and
pressing enter, or by using the Notch Attributes command in the Edit
menu.
Import Setup
Click on this button to make changes to the Import settings.
Export Setup
Click on this button to make changes to the Export settings.
Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application
The program Exp2asci.exe is a small application that will enable the user to
read the header information of OptiTex DSN and DSP files. The Exp2asci will
convert the header information to an ASCII format, which will enable it to be
read by electronic spreadsheet (Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro etc.). The program
works in Win95 environment and can be run from DOS prompt and from
Windows Run or Explore. By changing the Properties parameter you can run
this program every time you send a file. The main screen looks like this:
The user should fill two fields (if they are empty) and press Start. The program
keeps the name of your previous output file and uses it next time by default. It
uses the name of current DSP or DSN file. The program reads the input file
and appends the information to the output file. It is possible to convert many
files in one session. In order to end a work session press End. The program
will not start if one of two fields is empty.
Error messages:
Please check that the input file does exist and full path is correct.
The file exists but it is currently used by another application. The Exp2asci
program can’t work with it. Please close the file or select other name for
output file.
To Disable the Post Saving Action uncheck Run this Application after Save.
Chapter 13: Help Menu 459
Chapter 13: Help Menu
The Help menu provides general information and help regarding SGS
software.
Index (F1)
The Index command opens on-line help services provided by SGS. This is a
comprehensive guide to product information including a full glossary. This
command works like other on-line Help files; click on the desired topic to
view related information. Information may be viewed on screen or printed out
for future reference.
To access on-line Help:
• From the Help Menu select Index or press F1.
The Command Summary screen will be displayed which offers a complete

listing of all the topics in the program. This on-line help program also includes
a Search command, which will search by topic, and a History command,
which will show a log of the recently viewed topics.
Keyboard Map
The Keyboard Map command opens a table of shortcuts that can be very
useful to you. A new user can print this table and use it as a reference for all
available keyboard shortcuts.
Scenario (Ctrl + F1)

This option will play a short self-running scenario of how to use a specific
Tool.
To use Scenario:
• Select the desired tool.
• Under the Help Menu select Scenario.
• A dialog box with a list of scenarios is displayed.
• Click on one of the options and a self-running demo will start to

play.
Using Help
Select Using Help to learn the basics of using the on line help program.
Check Plug Protection

The Check Plug Protection option is used to view the plug (key) number. It
may be necessary to look up this number when calling for technical support.
Check Plug Protection also shows the SGS modules that you are entitled to
use. Furthermore, when purchasing a new SGS module, the Check Plug
Protection box is used to enter the codes that activate the new module. In order
to activate a new module, click on the SET button to the right of the new
module listed in the Check Plug Protection dialog, and then enter the two
codes and click OK.
SGS on Line
Enables the user to connect to an Internet browser for access to:
SGS Home Page – Directly links from PDS to SGS Home Page.
SGS Support page – Directly links from PDS to SGS Support Page.
Send File – Sends a DSN file to user’s mailbox without having to attach the
DSN file.
Tip of the Day

Provides you with useful tips on features of PDS.
About OptiTex PDS

Choose the About OptiTex PDS command to find the version of software you
are currently using. This information is necessary when contacting Technical
Support for help with your SGS software.
Send File
This function enables you to sand a file to any e-mail adders. You can sand it
to mailboxes in your company or around the world. An Internet access
required.
To send a file:
• Choose the SEND FILE command from the HELP menu.
• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.
• Enter the e-mail address that you want to send the message to.
• You have the option to attach more files and to add the message
name and subject.
• Click O.K.
• The message with the attached files will be send to the desired
address
How to Contact SGS

SGS Israel for international sales marketing and technical support:
Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS)
Ravnitzky 6
Sgula Industrial Park
Petach-Tikva 49221, Israel
Tel.: 972-3-904-9979
Fax: 972-3-904-2710
SGS USA for inside the US sales and marketing:

ScanVec Garment Systems (SGS)
International Plaza Two, Suite 625
Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518, USA
Tel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI
Fax: 610-521-1564
E-Mail: E-Mail Technical Support: support@optitex.com
E-Mail Sales & Marketing: sales@optitex.com
Web Site: http://www.optitex.com

Chapter 14: Using the Mouse 465
Chapter 14: Using the Mouse
The mouse is the main pointing device and tool and is used for the majority of
all pattern design, grading, and marking operations. How well the mouse is
handled affects user productivity. Therefore, it is important to understand how
to operate the mouse efficiently.
The standard type of mouse used with Microsoft applications has two buttons,
but there are many other compatible mouse devices with three buttons. SGS
software uses only two of the available buttons:
The left button functions as the pointing device and executes most of the
commands. The right mouse button provides quick and easy access to many of
the commands and features in the SGS software.
Right Mouse Button

The right mouse button provides easy access to many SGS commands and
features without having to move the mouse up to the toolbar or up to the pull
down menus. The Right Mouse Button reduces time spent on moving the
cursor around the screen. When used properly, the Right Mouse Button allows
for faster work on a design file.
Anytime while working on a design file, click on the right mouse button to
display a floating pop up menu near the cursor. To activate commands in the
pop up menu, click on the command using the left mouse button.
Select Tool
Use Select Tool to change the cursor back to the normal arrow pointer. This
command reverts back to the normal arrow pointer when another tool is in use.
Edit
Use Edit to quickly access commonly used commands in the Edit pull down
menu such as Undo and Redo.
! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter for more information on Edit commands.
Insert
Use the Insert command to insert components such as notches, points, darts,
fullness, pleats, and lines.
! Note: Refer to the Tools chapter for more information on the commands
within the Insert command.
Tools
Use the Tools command to access many of the tools located on the toolbars
such as Delete, Move, Walk, Circle, Button, and Text.
within the Tools command.
Zoom
Use the Zoom command to access the scaling tools used to scale all pieces in
the working area and to enlarge part of the screen.
within the Zoom command.
Transform
Use the transform command to easily access commands that manipulate

pieces, such as Rotate, Flip, Shrink and Scale.
! Note: Refer to the Piece chapter for more information on the commands
within the Transform command.
Piece
Use the Piece command to remove pieces from the working area either by
Removing Current, Replacing Old, or Making New.
! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter under Clear Pieces.

Move Base Line

Use Move Base Line command to move the base line without having to use
the Edit pull down menu.
! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter under Move Base Line for more
information on this command.
Delete
Use Delete command to delete a piece without having to use delete button on
your keyboard.
Attribute
Use Attribute command to open “piece info” dialog without having to use
Enter Key on your keyboard.
Segment
Use the Segment command to access the entire Segment pull down menu
without having to physically go up to the segment pull down menu.
Grading
Use the Grading command to access the entire Grading pull down menu
without having to physically go up to the Grading pull down menu.
! Note: Refer to the Grading chapter for more information on the commands
within the Grade command.
Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands 477
Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands
The keyboard topics below are shortcut commands. Some are specific to SGS
software, while others are general Windows shortcut commands that can be
used while working in programs.
SGS Keys commands

The following keys are shortcut keys within the SGS software.
Key(s) Function
Ctrl+N New File
Ctrl+O Open File
Ctrl+I or Tab Piece Information
Enter Information
Spacebar Activates the move tool (the hand icon)
Spacebar + Ctrl Activates the move internal tool

(the yellow hand icon)
End Select Tool
Tab Change Piece Selection
Keyboard Arrows Change External Point selection
Right Mouse Disengages tool
Shift + Enter Edit line attributes

This is the list of accelerators that are activated with F keys:
F2:
This key opens the Angle window used with several tools: Cut, Rotate, and
Split.
• Choose Cut icon.
• Click the first point.
• Drag the mouse, moving the cursor toward the opposite contour
line facing the next cut point.
• To define an angle for the cut, click the F2 key. Otherwise, hold
the Ctrl key down and click the left mouse button on the
contour.
F3:
Locks the working tools on to the current piece. A second click on F3 unlocks
the cursor from the current piece. The word “Lock” appears at the bottom right
corner of the screen.
F4:
Switches the display of pieces on the working area between Base only and All
Sizes.
F5:
Flips the current active contour (indicated by a solid line) between the inner
seam line and the outer perimeter.
F6:
Recalculates the seam if a seam exists. F6 is mainly used after moving points
with seam value.
F7:
Forces the cursor to snap to the nearest grid point regardless the tool type.
F8:
Use this key to display external segment length (contour between two grading
points) and use the Shift key (F8 + Shift) to display internal segment length.
F9:
Use this key as a shortcut to ‘Separate’ Tool
F10:
Use this key to display “Piece Attribute” dialog (from View menu).
F11:
Use this key to change “Walk Direction” when you use the “Walk Tool”.
F12:
Use this key to add notches to pieces (moving and stationary) when you work
with “Walk Tool”. Use Ctrl key and F12 key to add notch only to stationary
piece and Shift key and F12 key to add notch to moving piece.
Cursor Movement Keys

Key(s) Function
Direction key Move the cursor left, right, up, or down in

a field.
End, Ctrl+Right Arrow Move to the end of a field.
Home, Ctrl+Left Arrow Move to the beginning of a field.
Page Up, Page Down Move up or down in a field, one

screen at a time.
Tab Move from piece to piece along

the piece bar.
Shift + Tab Move from piece to piece in reverse along

the piece bar.
Dialog Box Keys

Key(s) Function
Tab Move from field to field within a dialog box.
Shift+Tab Move from field to field in reverse order.
Alt+Letter Move to the selected option or group.
Enter Execute a command button.
Esc Close a dialog box without completing the

command.
Alt+Down Arrow Open a drop-down list box.
Spacebar Cancel a selection in a list box.
Ctrl+ Slash Select all the items in a list box.
Ctrl+Backslash Cancel all selections except the current selection.
Shift+ Home Extend selection to first character in a text box.
Shift+ End Extend selection to last character in a text box.
Editing Keys
Key(s) Function
Backspace Delete the character to the left of the cursor.
Delete Delete the character to the right of the cursor.
Help Keys
Key(s) Function
F1 Open the on-line help program.
F1 + Ctrl Open to Scenario program.
F1 + Shift Create accelerator to the “Context Help Tool”.

System Keys
The following keys can be used from any window, regardless of the
application you are using.
Key(s) Function
Ctrl + Esc Switch to the Task List.
Alt + Esc Switch between all open, full screen applications.
Alt + Tab Toggle between all open applications.
Alt + Space Open the Control menu for an application

window.
Alt + Hyphen Open the Control menu for a document window.
Alt + F4 Close a window or open application.
F1 Open the on-line help program.
Text Selection Keys

Key(s) Function
Shift + Arrow Select one character at a time from left to right.
Shift + End Select text to the end of the line.
Shift + Home Select text to the beginning of the line.
Shift + Pg Dn Select text down one full window.
Shift + Pg Up Select text up one full window.

keyboard shortcuts
Key(s) Function
Shift + S (or I) allows snap to Piece internals only.
Ctrl will ignore Snap to any Point objects.
Zoom
Ctrl with Zoom All tool sets Selected Piece on whole screen.
Ctrl with Zoom Real tool sets real scale when current screen center
remains (without the second click)
Shift with Zoom Out increase zoom (Zoom Out counteraction).
Ctrl with Zoom Rectangle works as Zoom Real with center of the rectangle.
Pieces List / Pieces Bar Click
Shift pressed Marks Piece.
Ctrl pressed will Scatter Piece
Ctrl + Shift pressed will remove Scatter copies. From the

board.
Alt pressed will place Piece on its previous on-board

position anyway.
Digitizer
Ctrl key pressed in Point mode creates non-grade curve Point.

Alt + Left-mouse-button provides Undo.
Shift + Left-mouse-button closes Contour.
Drag and Move Tool
Shift + V allows Vertical moving only.
Shift + H allows Horizontal moving only.
Shift + U any moving available.
Grading Manually
Shift during Point Moving will move also all Sizes Greater then current.
Alt during Point Moving will move also all Sizes Less then current.
Round Corner
Shift will solve self-intersection
Shift + Ctrl lets the old (version 7) algorithm to work.
Mirror
Shift sets Notches on mirror line.
Ctrl deletes original Piece after Mirror.
Darts
Alt with Create Dart tool works as Open Dart.
Alt with Move Dart tool allows center rotation do not be center of Dart.
Edit Panel
Tab moves selection to the next Panel field.
Shift + Tab moves selection to the previous Panel field.
Primitive Tool
Shift key pressed will ensure Proportional Scale.
Ctrl key pressed will show Segments Length.
Other
Alt key pressed will ensure appearance of Move Point, Move

Piece and Open Create (for Internals) dialogs
even Preference attribute to view such dialogs is
off.
Shift + Z accelerator to Save CUS-file (for Modulate).
Shift key pressed with Text tool allows changing of Piece

Description position.
Shift key pressed during Build Piece exclude area from

Piece.
Shift key pressed will prevent new element creation in

Button, Circle and Notch tools.
Shift key pressed with Add Point tool will add Grade
Point.
Shift key pressed with Cut Piece tool will add Curve and
Non-Grade Point.
Shift key pressed with Draft tool will add Curve and
Non-Grade Point.
Shift key pressed in Rotate dialog will choose Pieces

group (not current only) to Rotate.
Shift key pressed with Adjust Piece Description in

Global Info dialog will recalculate Description
Center and Angle for all Pieces (regular – for
Pieces without Descriptions only).
Ctrl key pressed creates the new Guideline (instead of

move current).
Ctrl key pressed into in Rules Library and in Sizes

dialog will let to add more then one Size during
Insert / Append command.
Ctrl key pressed allows to Move / Copy more then one

Selected Internals.
Other (alternate actions)
Alt key pressed during Fold In sets Point to Point mode

for folding axe selection
Alt key pressed during Move Internal will Join Internal

contours.
Shift key pressed chooses alternate Paste Grading

Relative algorithm.
Shift key pressed chooses alternate Move Proportional

algorithm.
Shift key pressed changes Move Internals tool to

work as Copy Internals.
Ctrl key pressed changes Delete Points tool to work as

Close Fullness
PDS ShortCut Keys
Key Special Menu Description

keys command
A Alt Zooming Shortcut to ‘Zoom In’ Tool
A Ctrl Draft Tool When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"
dialog dialog is disabled, A + Ctrl will open "Angle From
Segment" dialog.
C Ctrl Edit / Copy Copy piece to Windows clipboard.
Piece
D Ctrl Measure Tool Accelerator
<Insert> Ctrl Edit / Copy Copy piece to Windows clipboard.
Piece
G Letter on Use for hiding guide lines
keyboard
G Ctrl Grading / Popup Menu.
&ldots;
H Shift Draft Tool Locks the tool for dragging in horizontal direction
M Ctrl Draft Tool When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"
dialog dialog is disabled, M + Ctrl will open "Point
Position on Segment " dialog.
I Ctrl Piece / Information & restrictions of selected piece.
Info&ldots;
N Shift Snaps only to Notches
N Ctrl File / New Close the current Style and create a new.
O Ctrl File / Open an existing Style.

Open&ldots;
R Ctrl Grading / Rules Popup Menu.
/ &ldots;
P Shift Snaps only to Points
P Ctrl File / Print the pieces in the working area.
Print&ldots;
Space Ctrl Move Internal Shortcut to ‘Move Internal’ Tool
Key
S Ctrl File / Save Save the current Style.
T Ctrl Draft Tool When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"
dialog dialog is disabled, T + Ctrl will open "Angle To
Segment" dialog.
V Shift Draft Tool Locks the tool for dragging in vertical direction
dialog
V Ctrl Edit / Paste Paste piece from clipboard.
Piece
U Shift Draft Tool Cancel Shift+H and Shift+V commands
<Insert> Shift Edit / Paste Paste piece from clipboard.
Piece
X Alt Zooming Zoom Out
X Ctrl Edit / Cut Piece Remove pieces and put it to Windows clipboard.
<Delete> Shift Edit / Cut Piece Remove pieces and put it to Windows clipboard.
Y Ctrl Edit / Redo Redo.
<backsp Shift + Alt Edit / Redo Redo.
ace>
Z Alt Zooming Zoom In
Z Ctrl Edit / Undo Undo.
Alt Ctrl Zooming Shortcut to Zoom In on a selected piece
<backsp Alt Edit / Undo Undo.
ace>
<Delete> Edit / Delete Delete the selected point or internal element.
<Enter> Edit / Edit Edit the attributes of the selected point or internal
element.
<Left Ctrl Go to the previous point
arrow>
<Right Ctrl Go to the next point
arrow>
<F1> Ctrl Help / Scenario Show the selected tool Scenario.
<F1> Shift Context Help.
<F2> Cutting Line Use the F2 key when you are working with one of
direction dialog the following tools: cut, axis, draft, pleat and add
fullness to create a shortcut to "Cutting Line
direction" dialog.
<F3> Options / Lock Enables only the selected piece to be edited.
Piece
<F4> Display / Base Show base size only on / off.
Only
<F4> Ctrl Grading table Shortcut keys to open Grading table
<F5> Piece / Seam / Switch between sewing and cutting contours of
Switch Cut/Sew the current piece.
<F5> Ctrl Piece / Seam / Switch all pieces to work on Cut contours.
Switch All
Pieces to Cut
<F5> Shift Piece / Seam / Switch all pieces to work on Sew contours.
Switch All
Pieces to Sew
<F6> Piece / Seam / Reseam the selected piece.
Reseam
< F6> Ctrl An Accelerator to changing Seam display mode.
<F6> Shift An Accelerator to Auto update for notch
command.
<F7> Snap to Grid When you are in the Grid mode, use the F7 key to
point snap to Grid point.
<F8> Show Segment Click on F8 key to display Segment Length.
length
<F8> Shift Show Internal Click on F8 with Shift key to display Internal
Segment length Segment Length.
<F9> Separate Tool Shortcut Key to the "Separate Tool".
<F10> Display / Display Piece Attributes dialog.
Display Piece
Attributes&ldots
<F11> Piece / Walk / Change the walk direction.
Switch Direction
<F12> Piece / Walk / Add notches to stationary and moving pieces.
Notch Both
<F12> Ctrl Piece / Walk / Add notches to stationary piece.
Notch Stationary
<F12> Shift Piece / Walk / Add notches to moving piece.
Notch Moving
Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation 491
Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation
Installing the Numonics AccuGrid

There are 3 main steps to configuring any digitizer the Numonics AccuGrid
for use with the SGS software: 1) configuring the digitizing tablets, 2)
Configuring the serial port, 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGS software.
! Note: Do not install the Numonics Software!
Configuring the Tablet
• Turn off the computer.
• Connect the digitizer to a serial port on the computer,

preferably COM1 or COM2. Both the mouse and the digitizer
can be used if they are configured to separate ports.
• Turn on the digitizing tablet and the computer. Tape the Setup
Menu Configuration paper that came with the digitizer on the
tablet. This menu can be found on page A11 in the digitizer
manual or it may be a loose piece of paper shipped with the
digitizer tablet.
! Note: the next few steps require quiet in order to hear the digitizer sounds.
Do not attempt to proceed with these directions in a working
manufacturing environment.
• To activate the Numonics Softkey Setup Menu, press and hold

button #1 in the box below MENU on the digitizer tablet. You
will hear a steady tone, keep the button pressed until the tone
quits. The digitizer will then emit a series of “beeps.”
• Move the crosshair over the MENU ORIGIN mark and press
button #1. The MENU ORIGIN mark is a circle with a cross

located at the lower center of the paper menu that is taped to the
board. The digitizer will emit a confirmation chirp.
! Note: The Menu Origin can be found next to the Numonics phone number
on the Setup Menu Configuration sheet that came with the digitizer
tablet.
• Select each option by positioning the crosshair of the digitizer

over the box next to the desired setting and press button #1. You
will hear a series of confirmation chirps after each selection. The
following settings must be selected for use in the SGS Grade,
SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize Software:
Emulation/Output format
Numonics ASCII
ASCII Options
The following are selected: CR, LF, Sep, and Flag
Interface
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Modes
Modes = Point
Increment size = 0 or OFF
Stream Rate = MAX
Resolution
Lines Per Inch = 1000
• Click “Application 1” in the SAVE CONFIGURATION

portion. You will hear the Confirmation Beeps.
• Click “Confirm Changes” in the EXIT portion to save changes

and exit setup.
Configuring the Serial Port
Serial ports default (for 4 buttons cursor) to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits
and 1 stop bit. The ASCII setting for 16 buttons cursor on the Numonics
requires these settings to be changed to 9600 baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and
2 stop bits.
From File menu select “Digitizer Setup”:
• From “Digitizer Setup” dialog Choose the desired digitizer.
• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected.
• To set the digitizer communication parameters click on

“Communications Parameters…” button in “Digitizer Setup”
dialog.
• Choose the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:
• Bits per second = 9600

Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None
• Click OK to exit and save changes.
Configuring the Digitizer in SGS software
adjusted, configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.
• Start the SGS GRADE, PDS, or DIGITIZE software.
• From the File menu, choose Digitizer Setup. The “Select

Digitizer” Dialog Box will display.
Digitizer Type - Select Numonics
Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel

included with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples
directory. Click Browse to locate the available panels. For more
instructions on the Panel, refer to the Digitizing section of the SGS
User’s manual.
Communication Port - Select the port to which the digitizer is

connected.
Working Units - Select Inches or Millimeters.

Resolution - Set to 1000.00
16 Button Cursor - If using a 16 button digitizer, this option must

be enabled.
Tablet Size - Enable the Set option by clicking in the box next to
SET. An X will display in the box. Enter the actual working area
on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width fields (for
example, 36 X 48). Values will be displayed in either inches or
millimeters depending on which unit was selected in the Working
Units section.
Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be set
to 0.
• Click OK to save the settings and exit.
Tips
If the digitizer will not work, check the possible IRQ conflict with the internal
fax modem. When using a 4-button cursor, the digitizer works best in Binary
mode. When setting the digitizer to binary mode, the communication
parameters should be set to: 9600,8,n,1
Configuring the GTCO Calcomp Drawing Board 3 Digitizer
Call customer support at 480 948 5508
This digitizer does not support the Numonics ASCII format – it is one
coordinate short.
Customers can try to use the GT ASCII Format 9 or 10 (9 is preferred).

Installing the Altek Digitizer For Use With SGS Software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Altek Digitizer for use with the SGS
software: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring the serial port
communications through Windows, and 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGS
software.
! Note: Do not install the Altek Software.
• Connect the digitizer to a serial port on the computer, preferably

COM1 or COM2. Both the mouse and the digitizer can be used
if they are configured to separate ports.
• Turn on the digitizing tablet and the computer. Tape the

Movable Menu that came with the digitizer anywhere on the
tablet. This menu can be found as a loose piece of laminated
paper shipped with the digitizer tablet.
• *Note: the next few steps require quiet in order to hear the
digitizer sounds. Do not attempt to proceed with these
directions in a working manufacturing environment.
• To activate the Setup Menu, press and hold button #0 or the

enter bar on the cursor on the Setup Menu box located in the
fixed bar at the top of the digitizer. You will see flashing lights.
• Move the crosshair over the Moveable Menu and press button
#0 on the dot in the lower left corner and then the dot in the
lower right corner. The digitizer will emit a Confirmation Chirp.
• Select each option by positioning the crosshair of the digitizer

over the desired setting and press button #0. You will hear a
series of Confirmation Chirps after each selection. Some
settings are not used. The MEMORY STORE setting must be
the last function set. The following settings must be selected for
use in the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize Software:
SeriAl Speed
9600 BPS
SERIAL MISC.
Even parity
2 stop bits
7 data bits
FORMAT
F10
RATE
100 PST/SEC
RESOLUTION
.001 INCH
RUN TYPE
Type 2
SOFTWARE
C Numonics
MODE
Point
MISCELLANY
CR on
LF on
Tone on (your option: do you want to hear what you digitize?)
CTS off
MEMORY
Store 1
No confirmation chirp from the controller
• Reselect Setup Menu on the Fixed Bar to exit setup.

Configuring the Serial Port Communications Through Windows
Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. The
ASCII setting on the ALTEK requires these settings to be changed to 9600
baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. The changes must be made
through Windows 95 by completing the following steps.
• Click the Start button.
• Choose Settings, Control Panel. The Control Panel group is

displayed.
• Click System. The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
• Click Device Manager to bring the Device Manager dialog box

to the front.
• Choose Ports. Look for available ports listed below the Ports
heading.
• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected. The

Communications Port Properties dialog box is displayed.
• Click Port Settings. The Port Settings dialog box is displayed.

Choose the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:
Bits per second = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None
• Click OK to exit and save changes. Continue exiting until you

are back at the main Windows 95/98/NT screen.
• Restart the computer in order to initialize the port setting

changes made in the steps above. From the Start button, select
“Shut Down”. Now select “Restart the Computer.”
Configuring the Digitizer in SGS software
adjusted, configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.
• Start the SGS GRADE, PDS, or DIGITIZE software.
• From the File Menu, select Digitizer Setup. The Select Digitizer
Dialog Box is displayed.
Digitizer Type - Select Numonics

directory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels. For more
instructions on the Panel, refer to the Digitizing section of the SGS
User’s manual.

connected.

16 Button Cursor - If using a 16 button digitizer, this option must

be enabled.
SET. An X will display in the box. Enter the Actual Working
Area on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width boxes (for
example, 36 X 48). Values will display in either Inches or
Millimeters depending on which was selected in the Working
Units section.
to 0.
• Exit the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.
Tips
If the digitizer will not work, try removing the internal fax modem.
Installing the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer for use
with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port
communications through Windows and the digitizer in SGS software.
• 1. Turn your computer off.

• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for Bank
A and Bank B. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.
Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BANK-1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
BANK-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
BANK-3 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
• Turn the digitizing tablet and your computer on.

ASCII setting on the GTCO Roll Up requires these settings to be changed to
9600 baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. The changes must be made
through Windows by completing the following steps.
Windows 3.11
• From the MAIN group choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.

The Control Panel group will be displayed.
• Click PORTS. The Ports dialog box will be displayed.
• Click the port you are using. The Port Setting dialog box will be
displayed.
• Select the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None
• Exit the Control Panel.

Windows 95\98
• Click the START button.
• Choose SETTINGS, CONTROL PANEL. The Control Panel

group will be displayed.
• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will be

displayed.
• Click DEVICE MANAGER to bring the Device Manager dialog

box to the front.
• Choose PORTS. The available ports will be listed below the

Ports heading.

Communications Port Properties dialog box will be displayed.
• Click PORT SETTINGS. The Port Settings dialog box will be

displayed. Choose the following settings by clicking the drop
down arrow:
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None

are back at the main Windows 95 screen.
Configuring The Digitizer in SGS software
adjusted, you can configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.
• Start the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.
• From the OPTIONS menu choose DIGITIZER SETUP. The

Select Digitizer Dialog Box will be displayed.
Digitizer Type - Select GTCO DIGI-PAD

directory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.
Communication Port - Select the port to which your digitizer is

connected.
16 Button Cursor - If you are using a 16 button digitizer you must

enable this option.
SET. An X will be placed in the box. Enter the Actual Working
Area on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width boxes.
Values will be displayed in either Inches or Millimeters depending
on which was selected in the Working Units section.
to 0.
• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software..
The next time you enter the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software,
the digitizer will be enabled.
Installing the SummaSketch II For Use In the SGS software
There are 3 main steps to configuring the SummaSketch II for use with the
SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port communications
through Windows and the digitizer in the SGS software.
! Note: It is not necessary to install the Summagraphics Software.

ASCII setting on the SummaSketch II requires these settings to be changed to
9600 baud, Odd parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and none for flow control. The
changes must be made through Windows by completing the following steps.
! Note: The SumaSketch II digitizer is supported in both Windows 3.11 and

Windows 95. Both configuration processes are explained, choose the
one that applies to your Windows version.
Windows 3.11

displayed.
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = Odd
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None
Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Data Bits = 8
Parity = ODD
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None

• Start the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.
• From the FILE or OPTIONS menu choose DIGITIZER SETUP.

The Select Digitizer Dialog Box will be displayed.

Digitizer Type - Select SummaSketch1212

included with the SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples

connected.
Tablet Size - Enter the Actual Working Area on the tablet in the
appropriate Height and Width boxes. Values will be displayed in
either Inches or Millimeters depending on which was selected in
the Working Units section.

enable this option.
to 0.
• Exit the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.
The next time you enter the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software, the
digitizer will be enabled.
Installing the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer For Use In SGS

software
There are 3 main steps to configuring the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer for
use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for Set A,
B, and C. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.
Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SET A 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
SET B 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
SET C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
! Note: The Summagraphics LCL can binary or as ASCII. The above

switches are for ASCII mode.

Summagraphics LCL digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2.
Windows 3.11

displayed.
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None

Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None


Digitizer Type - Select Summasketch Professional.


connected.

enable this option.
Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be

set to 0.
Installing the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer for use
with the SGS software: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring the
serial port communications through Windows, 3) Configuring the digitizer in
SGS software.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices
you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports.
For detailed information on IRQ settings refer, to the DOS and
Windows manuals for your system.
• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for SW 1,

2, and 3. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.
Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW-1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
SW-2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
SW-3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
! Note: Bit number 5 in SW3 should be set to ON when using a 16-button

cursor and OFF when using 4 button.
• Turn on the computer and the digitizing tablet.
Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.
Windows 3.11
• From the MAIN group, choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.

The Control Panel group will display.
• Click PORTS. The Ports dialog box will display.
• Click the port to which the digitizer is connected. The Port

Setting dialog box will display.
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = No
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None

Windows 95/98

group will display.
• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will display.

box to the front.

Ports heading.
• Choose the COM port to which the digitizer is connected. The

Communications Port Properties dialog box will display.
• Click PORT SETTINGS. The Port Settings dialog box will

display. Choose the following settings by clicking the drop
down arrow:
Data Bits = 8
Parity = No
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None

adjusted, the next step is to configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.
• Start the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize program.
• From the OPTIONS menu, choose DIGITIZER SETUP. The

Digitizer Type - Select GTCO DIGI-PAD


connected.
16 Button Cursor - This button must be enabled EVEN if using a

4 button cursor.
to 0.
• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.
Installing the MicroGrid IV Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the MicroGrid IV Digitizer for use with
the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for SW 1,

2, and 3. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.
Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
SW 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
SW 3 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.
Windows 3.11

displayed.
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None
Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None



Digitizer Type -
Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel included

with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples directory.
Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.

connected.

enable this option.
to 0.
Installing the MicroGrid II Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the MicroGrid II Digitizer for use with
the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

! Note: The MicroGrid II should be set up to work in ASCII mode.
Summagrid Pro IV digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2.
Windows 3.11

displayed.

Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None
Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None


Digitizer Type - Numonics or Summagraphics MicroGrid II

Communication Port - Select the port to which your digitizer

is connected.

enable this option.
to 0.
Installing the Summagraphic 4 Button Digitizer For Use In SGS

software
There are 3 main steps to configuring the Summagraphic 4 button Digitizer for
use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

Summagraphics 4 button digitizer requires 9600, O, 8, 1.
Windows 3.11

displayed.

Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = Odd
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None
Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Data Bits = 8
Parity = Odd
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None


Digitizer Type -
Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel included

with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples directory.
Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.

connected.

enable this option.
to 0.
• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.
Installing the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer For Use In SGS

software
There are 3 main steps to configuring the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer
for use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

! Note: The SummaSketch Professional 16 Button Digitizer runs in UIOF

mode. The SummaSketch Professional 4 Button Digitizer runs in
Binary mode.
SummaSketch Professional 16 button digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2. The
SummaSketch Professional 4 button digitizer requires 9600, o, 8, 1.
Windows 3.11


• Click the port you are using. The Port Setting dialog box will
be displayed.
16 Button Cursor settings:
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = Odd or None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None

Windows 95/98


displayed.

box to the front.

Ports heading.


down arrow:
Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 7
Parity = Even
Stop Bits = 2
Flow Control = None

Baud = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = Odd or None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = None


Digitizer Type - Select Summasketch Professional.


connected.

enable this option.
to 0.
Digitizer Manufacturers
The following manufacturers offer digitizing devices that are commonly used
and compatible with OptiTex software. SGS recommends that you confirm
OptiTex compatibility of specific digitizer models and manufacturers before
making your purchase.
Calcomp
2411 West La Palma Avenue
P.O. Box 3250
Anaheim, CA 92801
Phone: 800-458-5888, 714-821-2000
Fax: 714-821-2045
GTCO Corporation
7125 Riverwood Drive
Columbia, Maryland 21046
Phone: 800-344-4723, 410-381-6688
Fax: 410-290-9065
Numonics Corporation
101 Commerce Drive
Box 1005
Montgomeryville, PA 18936
Phone: 800-523-6716, 215-362-2766
Fax: 215-361-0167
Summagraphics Corporation
8500 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754-3999
Phone: 800-444-3425, 512-835-0900
Fax: 512-835-1916
Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation 541
Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation
This chapter will guide how to install and configure a width range of plotters
and cutters types that supported by OptiTex.
Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software

Installing the Algotex Software
• Connect the plotter cable to the parallel port (LPT2) on the

computer.
• Turn on the computer and the plotter.
• Create a directory called C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA
• Copy all the files on the Algotex diskette into the C:\TEXOPLOT
directory.
The Algotex diskette contains the following files:
AUTO_DOT.EXE
AUTO_DOT.CNF
AUTO_DOT.HLP
AUTO_DOT.TXT
RASTEX.EXE
TEXOPLOT.ICO
README.DOC
README.TXT
• Copy the ALGOTEXP.CFG file into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory.

! Note: The ALGOTEXP.CFG file can be found on the diskette attached to

the plotter.
• Create a directory called C:\OPTITEX\HPGL
• Select START, SETTINGS, TASKBAR, START MENU

PROGRAMS, ADD.
• BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.

C:\TEXOPLOT\RASTEX.EXE
• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type RASTER

as the program name and select FINISH.
• Select ADD, BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.

C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.EXE
• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type PLOT as

the program name and select FINISH.
• Select ADVANCED, under Start Menu, select the plus (+) sign to
the left of the word “Programs.” Highlight the OptiTex Program
Group. Copy (hold down the shift key and drag) the RASTER
program and PLOT program on the right side of the screen to the
STARTUP folder on the left side of the screen. You can now
CLOSE.
• Using a text editor, edit the following file.

C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.CNF
• Change the Recovery directory to C:\OPTITEX\HPGL and change

the Raster Data files directory to C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA
• Save the changes to the AUTO_DOT.CNF file and return to the

WINDOWS desktop.
• Restart the computer. Select START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART

COMPUTER.
Configuring the Alogotex Plotter in SGS software.
Once the Algotex software is installed, the SGS software can be configured to
work with the plotter.
• Start the SGS PDS or MARK program.
• From the FILE menu choose PLOTTER SETUP. A Dialog Box is

displayed.
• Uncheck “Use Output Manager.”
• Select OK.
• If in working in PDS, display a piece on the screen. If working in

MARK, display a marker on the screen.
• From the FILE menu select PLOT. Select SETUP from the lower
left side of the dialog box.
• In the Plot Setting Dialog Box select HPGL as the format. In

Plotter Page Size, the X must be _____ and the Y must be the width
of the paper (72 inches is the maximum).
• Select OK, the Plot Dialog Box is once again displayed. Make sure
that the following settings are unchecked while testing: Output
Manager, Use, Alert on Start, Remove on End, Alert on End.
• Select OK.
Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter

Connecting the plotter
• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink

Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an
RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter
distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not
plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HP.
! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.
computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt
Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have
more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting
for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed
information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals
for your system.

Configuring the output manger
Using the Outman as output manger:
• From the START menu click OUTMAN from OptiTex sub-menu.
! Note: The OutMan will be named Outman-1 (or OutMan-2 if you specified
the plotter as pltr2.)
• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The

working units dialog box will display.
• Choose the appropriate setting.
• Click OK.
• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The

Communication dialog box will display. Set the following port
options:
Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.

Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control - XON/XOFF
Protocol - NONE
• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.
• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.
• Click OK.
! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of
the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.
• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the

Outman.
Configuring Qman
• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon in the START

menu. Usually located in START>Optitex 8> Output control>
Qman
• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.
• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match

the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.
OutMan Path Setup
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT SETUP. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will display.
• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:
• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.
• Click OK.
• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

Using the OCC as output manger
• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.
• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.
• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP
• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.
• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.
• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:
Port - the port to which the plotter is connected

Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control - XON/XOFF
Protocol - NONE
• Click NEXT.
Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder
must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on
the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.
! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.
• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.
• Close or minimize the OCC window.
Configuring the SGS programs
Plotter Setup
The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select
the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.
! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
• Place a pattern on the working area.
• From the FILE menu, choose the PLOT command
• Check the Use Output Manager field.
• Select the output manger that you using.
• For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter
number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.
• Click OK.
Plot
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.
area.
Use Output Manager - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the
plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the user’s manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.
• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.
Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number
depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software
installation process.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled
(unchecked).
Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the plot.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length
of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for
unusually long markers.
Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)
! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is
no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.
• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. The pieces on the
working area will be sent to print on the plotter.
Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter

• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink

Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an
RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter
distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not
plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from Hewlett
Packard.
for your system.

• Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked
Area. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick
Reference Guide.
Using the Outman as output manger:
• From the START menu click on the OUTMAN in the OptiTex 8

folder.
• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The

• Click OK.

Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = XON/XOFF
Protocol = NONE
Paper Size

• Click OK.
! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of
the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.
• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the

Outman.
Configuring Qman
• From the START menu click on the QMAN in the OptiTex

directory.
• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match

the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.
• From the FILE menu, choose OPTIONS. The OutMan Setup dialog
box will display.
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as
specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:
• Click OK.
• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

menu.

Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Protocol = NONE
• Click NEXT.
• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.
Configuring the SGS programs
Configuring the plotter through the SGS programs involves selecting a plotter,
configuring the plotter, and configuring the OutMan and the QMan. This
document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for HP 750
plotters. For a detailed description of the plotting options, refer to the Plotting
section of the SGS Grade, Mark, or PDS manual. Also, refer to the plotting
tutorial located at the front of each manual.
Plotter Setup
The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select
the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.
area.
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT command.
• Check the “USE OUTPUT MANGER” options.
• Select the Output manger to use.
• For OutMan users: browse to locate the outman.ini file. And enter
the plotter number.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.
Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number
depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software
installation process.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.

Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled
(unchecked).
Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
of the plot.
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length
of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for
unusually long markers.
Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)
plot at all.
• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.
• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.
Troubleshooting for the HP Ink Jet 750C
Make sure the I/O settings on the plotter have been setup. For instructions,
refer to the HP user manual. Settings should correspond with the port options
used in SGS software when configuring the OutMan. (See section,
“Configuring Outman” under “Communication.”)
Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Please
see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide.
From the HP750C Quick Reference Guide
Front-Panel Menu (On Plotter) Structure
Page Format -> Size -> Oversize -> Inked Area

Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter

The HP Draftmaster II (model #7596A) plotter will not plot more than one
frame. A frame is 46 inches long.
• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.
! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many
for your system.
• Turn the computer on.
• Turn the plotter on.

Configuring SGS Programs
Plotter Setup
! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working
area.
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box
will be displayed.
• Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to

the Use Output Manager option. A small “x” should appear in the
box.
• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the

Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
file.
• Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)
• Click OK.
Plot
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be
displayed.
! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager

Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.
Options -
Plot Continuous - enabled
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1, Y=1.
The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.
Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during your OptiTex
software installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to HPGL
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - enabled
Manual Page Replace - disabled.
Number of Pens - set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - disabled.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.
! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable
cutting between the plots. (Commonly set to 4”)
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should always be set to 46 inches. (Max frame size)
Y - The Y value should always be set to 34.5 inches. (Maximum plot width)
! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time. There is no way to
adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is
set to anything else, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot
at all.
setup.
Using the Outman as output manger
• Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.
• Working Units - From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING

UNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed.
• Choose the setting you wish to use.
• Click OK.
• From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The

Communication dialog box will be displayed.
Communication
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Protocol = NONE
Paper Size
• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.
• Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.
• Click OK.
! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and don’t know the exact length,
estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you
wish to send.
• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.
Configuring Qman
• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon at START manu/

OptiTex 8 / output manger.
Working Units
• From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.
• Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.
OutMan Path Setup
• From the OPTIONS menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan

Setup dialog box will be displayed.
• Click OK.
• Minimize the QMan, keeping it running.

• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably

COM1 or COM2.
! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.
• Open the OCC program from START menu, OptiTex folder.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Protocol = NONE
• Click NEXT.

Ioline 28 Plotter
! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.
Install the Ioline software
• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.
• From the START menu, select RUN.
• Type SETUP: A.
• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.
• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the
Installation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.
Test Plot
Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test
plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test
plot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. For
instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 28, refer to the Ioline user’s
manual.
Calibration Plot
Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has
been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.
Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring
the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The
Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the
plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the
CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration
program, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.
Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline
Plot Setup
will be displayed.

box.
• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the

file.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)
• Click OK.
Plot
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box will
display.
area.
Output Manager
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.
Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves
slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches
as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.
Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.
If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in
C:\OptiTex).
of the marker.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
plot at all.
setup.
The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a
plot file is sent to the plotter.
Use the Outman as output manger.

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working

units dialog box will display.
• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size
• Click OK.
! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.
• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan
Configuring Qman
• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub
folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.
Working Units
• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the

working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.
OutMan Path Setup
• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan

Setup dialog box will display.
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the
Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of
available drive/directories on the right.
• Click OK.
• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.
Hints
If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to
8 alphanumeric characters.

COM1 or COM2.
modem.

menu.

Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.

Ioline 600 Plotter

• Type SETUP: A.

Test Plot
manual.
Calibration Plot
Plot Setup
will be displayed.

box.
• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the

file.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
Plot Setting
installation.
Device Options
Font Options
C:\OptiTex).
of the marker.
Plotter Page Size
using.
plot at all.
setup.
Using the Outman as output manger.

Working Units

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)

Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size
• Click OK.
Configuring Qman
• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub
folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder/ Output Control
Working Units

OutMan Path Setup

same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the
Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available
drive/directories on the right.
• Click OK.
Hints
If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to
8 alphanumeric characters.

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.


Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.

Ioline Studio Plotter

• Type SETUP: A.

Test Plot
manual.
Calibration Plot
Plot Setup
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.
• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in the
box.
• For OutMan users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
(usually C:\Optitex) by clicking the Browse. Select the Plotter
number to be assigned to the Ioline.
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
Plot Setting
installation.
Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Font Options
C:\OptiTex).
of the marker.
Plotter Page Size
Y – The Y value should be 39.5 inches (the maximum plotting & cutting
width).
X – The X value should be 46 inches (the plotter frame size).
plot at all.
• 4. Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved

but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and Qman were
not set.
Using the OutMan as output manger
• In the START menu, click on the OutMan icon at the OptiTex \

OUTPUT CONTROL folder.
• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size

• Click OK.
Configuring Qman
• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.
Working Units

OutMan Path Setup

• Click OK.
• Minimize the Qman keeping it running. Do not close Qman.


COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.
Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.
Close or minimize the OCC window

Ioline Stylist Plotter

Plot Setup
The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini
and the plotter.
display.
• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in the
box.
• Select the output manger that you using
• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by clicking on the

browse button and select the Plotter number to be assigned to the
Ioline.
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Plot Setting
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to DMPL.
Device Options
Font Options
program.
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the width of the paper. The factory setting is 72 inches.
Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using.
X- The X value should always be set to 36 inches.
plot at all.
setup.
• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
Working Units

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
DMPL
DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size

Click OK.
Configuring Qman
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder
Working Units

Path Setup
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as
specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:
• Click OK.


COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.

Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
DMPL
DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.

Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software
• Type SETUP: A.

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to

the Installation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.
Test Plot
instructions on sending a test file to the Summit, refer to the Ioline user’s
manual.
Calibration Plot
Plot Setup
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box will
display.
• Select the Output manger to use.
• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in the
box.
• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the

box, select Browse to locate the outman.ini file. Select the Plotter
number to be assigned to the Ioline.
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
Plot Setting
installation.
Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Font Options
C:\OptiTex).
of the marker.
Plotter Page Size
using.
plot at all.
setup.
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a
plot file is sent to the plotter.
Configuring the output manger.
Using the OutMan as Output manger
• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
Working Units

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and
DMPL.HPGL
DMPL (recommended)

Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size
• Click OK.
Configure the Qman
Working Units

OutMan Path Setup

• Click OK.

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.


Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
HPGL
DMPL (recommended)
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.

Troubleshooting Tips for the Ioline Summit Plotter
Ioline software show’s no plotter:
Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another
cable.
Perform the Serial Test: included with the Ioline Control Center software.
For instructions on performing this test refer to the Summit User’s Guide.
Blinking red light on plotter after plot has been sent:
Communication problems: Check the following:
cable.
Port Configuration - Make sure the port is configured correctly:
Baud rate =9600
Parity =none
Data bits =8
Stop bits =1
Flow control
HPGL = DTR/DSR-enabled
RTS/CTS-enabled
Xon/Xoff- disabled
DMPL = DTR/DSR-disabled
RTS/CTS-disabled
Xon/Xoff- enabled
Port - Have port checked.
Plotter - Run Plotter Port Test, which requires a diagnostic module available
from Ioline.
The Ioline plotter won’t plot:
cable.
OutMan - Make sure it is running, the communication and handshake settings

are correct and the protocol is set to none.
QMan - Make sure it is running. Make sure the OutMan path is specified
correctly.
Ioline is in Stop Mode - Press the Start/Stop key to put the plotter in start
mode (green light).
Test plot - Send a test plot from DOS or Ioline Control Panel software. If the
plotter doesn’t plot from Ioline software, refer to the troubleshooting guide in
the Ioline user’s manual.
The Ioline Plotter Plots Incorrectly, Doesn’t finish the plot, skips parts of
the plot or leaves large gaps between frames:
Frame Size - Frame size is set incorrectly. Frame size should be X = 46, Y =
width of paper, typically 72”.
Plots “garbage”:
Language - Make sure the correct language is being sent. Language for this
plotter is set to either DMPL or HPGL.
Plots too large/small:
Scale Factor - Make sure the Scale Factor in the Plot dialog box is set to X=1
Y=1.
Calibrate - Run the calibration program that comes with the Ioline control
panel. For instructions on the calibration process refer to the Ioline user’s
manual.
Fonts are too small/large in the HEADER of the marker:
• Adjust the font size in the Plot Setting dialog box in the SGS
programs. The plot setting dialog box is accessed by:
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT.
• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the dialog box.
• Enter the desired font size in the Default Font Size box.
• Click OK.
! Note: If you change the font size and the fonts are still plotting incorrectly,
delete the Optikad.ini file located in the Windows directory and re-
configure plot settings.
Piece Information fonts are too large or too small:
• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pulldown Menu,
then select GLOBAL INFO.
• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,
locate the box called, “Adjust Descriptions.”
• Enter in the desired maximum text size. For example, if the text
was previously too large when set to 1”, change the setting to .5”
and click APPLY.
• Create a test plot to make sure the new text size is acceptable. If
further changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.
! Note: This setting adjusts the maximum text size for the standard piece
information (or piece descriptions). On larger pieces, the text will
plot at the maximum set size. On smaller pieces, text will plot smaller
to fit on the piece.
Internal fonts are too large or too small:
• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pull down Menu,
then select GLOBAL INFO.
• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,
locate the box called, “Internal Texts.”
• Enter in the desired minimum and maximum sizes. For example, if

internal text should only be between .25” and 1”, set this box
accordingly. Internal text will plot no smaller than .25” and no
larger than 1”.
• Create a test plot to make sure text is acceptable. If further changes

are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.
! Note: This setting adjusts the text size for internal texts (text added with the
text tool).
Leaves too much or not enough gap between jobs/copies:
Check the Gap after Plotting setting in the Plot Setting dialog box. The Plot
Setting dialog box can be accessed by:
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT.
• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the Plot dialog box.
• Enter in a new value in the Gap After Plotting box.
• Click OK.
Pen rips the paper during plot:
Make sure pen is loaded correctly (it must be lined up on the edges of the roll
feeds).
Check the pen force.
Pen may be out of ink.
Pen may be broken.
Paper pressure roller must not be placed over the two connection points of the
paper advance bar.
Plots very Slowly:
Make sure the file format is set up correctly.
For more troubleshooting tips refer to the Ioline user’s guide.

Plotter Technology Plotter

Configuring SGS Programs
Plot Setup
and the plotter.
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Plot dialog box will display.
• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in the
box.

box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Plotter
Technology Neon plotter.
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager

optional, but are usually checked on. For detailed information on each of these
options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Bulge – Set to .008
Plot Setting
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HP-GL PlotTec.
Device Options

Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled. (Unchecked)
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
program.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Plotter Technology
plotters.
Plotter Page Size
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 20 inches for a 36” Neon
The X value should always be set to 30 inches for a 72” Neon
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 20 or 30 inches.
There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the
plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot
incorrectly or not plot at all.
setup.
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan were added to the Startup
group when SGS software was installed, which means they will start
automatically when Windows is started.
• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the OUTPUT

CONTROL sub directory. It can be found in START > OPTIEX 8>
OUTPUT CONTROL
Working Units

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.
Xon/Xoff is checked
Protocol = None.
Paper Size
• Click OK.

COM1 or COM2.
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on
COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse
and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter
and modem.
menu.
Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.
Xon/Xoff is checked
Protocol = None.
• Click NEXT.
• Close or minimize the OCC window
Hints
Use cardboard for the paper take-up roll – PVC is too heavy.
If using Heat Seal paper, set the plotter speed to low.
When changing to a new roll of Heat Seal paper, swipe the surface that the
paper would touch with a rag lightly dampened with liquid fabric softener.
(This reduces the static electricity that the Heat Seal paper generates).
Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter

• Connect the plotter to COM1 or COM2 on the computer.
! Note: On many computers, COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and
COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3
serial port devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of
the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the
DOS and Windows manuals for the system.
! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter must be set up in AutoSence mode.
Configuring output manger
• In the START menu, click OptiTex, and OUTMAN.
• From the OPTIONS menu, select WORKING UNITS.
• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.
• From the OPTIONS menu, select COMMUNICATION. Set the

following port options.

Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
DTR/DSR - unchecked
RTS/CTS - unchecked
Xon/Xoff - checked
Protocol - NONE.
• Click OK.
• Click SET next to Paper on Roll dialog box.
• Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Click OK.
! Note: The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to
send.
• Minimize the OutMan. (Do not close OutMan).
Configuring QMan
• In the START menu click OPTITEX 8, and QMan.
• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS.
• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.
• From the OPTIONS menu, select OUTMAN PATH.
same as specified in the Plot Setup.
• Minimize the QMan. (Do not close QMan).


COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.

Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
DTR/DSR - unchecked
RTS/CTS - unchecked
Xon/Xoff - checked
Protocol - NONE.
• Click NEXT.
Configuring SGS Software
Plot Setup
area.
• From the FILE menu, select the PLOT command.
• Click Use Output Manager field. Select the output manger that you
using.
• For Outman users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
• Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Calcomp TechJet

720.
• Click OK.
Plot dialog box
• From the FILE menu, select PLOT.
• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:
Use – checked
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, copies - optional.
Plotter Setting -Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.
! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box is displayed.
Plotter Setup dialog box
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2
Format – HPGL
(0,0) in Page Center – unchecked
Manual Page Replace – checked
Use CR/LF in code – checked
Use M70 – unchecked
Use bitefeed offset – unchecked

Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line – 0
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font – checked
Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,
Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen – 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment - .008
Plotter Page Size - X- 48 inches, Y-34.8 or width of paper.
• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.
• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.
! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 plotter model 5436R does not
automatically advance the paper after each frame. The user must
select CONTINUE at the plotter after each frame. A one-inch gap is
placed between each frame (paper advance).
! Note: Calcomp’s technical support number is 1-800-458-5888.
! Note: The Calcomp 907/PCI Vector mode driver sometimes works in the
SGS OptiMark
Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.
• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.
• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:
Port : the port to which the plotter is connected

Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits :8
Parity : None
Stop Bits : 1
Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol : Gerber
• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman.)
Configuring the Qman
• Open the Qman and from the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.
• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN SETUP.
• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in

the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default
directory is C:\Optitex)
• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one
plotter, select the desired plotter number)
• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.
Port : the port to which the plotter is connected

Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits :8
Parity : None
Stop Bits : 1
Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol: Gerber
• Click NEXT.
Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software
Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been
adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.
• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.
• From the FILE menu, select PLOTT.
• Display a pattern piece on the screen.
• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER

section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.
• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog

box, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must
be 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper.
(72 inches is the maximum)
• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

• The following settings should be checked:
Output Manager- Use

Alert on Start
Remove on End
Alert on End
• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.
Troubleshooting
If nothing happens
If you get an error message at the plotter display
If the plotter does not move
It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware

communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or
try replacing the plotter cable.
If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly
Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller
marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.
Tips
The plotter side of the communication cable is a 9 pin female adapter. The
computer side of the cable is a 25 pin female adapter, Gerber part number
055409000 Rev.-A. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach
the cable to the computer.
Gerber AP700 Plotter

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
Power on- Big red button to the right.

Press ENTERS to enable (dot with a circle around it)
Initialize F2 (goes to origin)
F1 (goes on-line)
• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.
• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.
• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:


Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communicate Protocol: Gerber
• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman).
• Open the Qman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.
• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN PATH SETUP.
• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in

the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default
directory is C:\Optitex)
• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one
plotter, select the desired plotter number)
• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.

Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol: Gerber
• Click NEXT.
Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software
Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been
adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.
• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.
• From the FILE menu, select PLOT command
• Display a pattern piece on the screen.
• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER

section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.
• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box,

select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be
16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72
inches is the maximum)
• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

• The following settings should be checked:
Output Manager- Use

Alert on Start
Remove on End
Alert on End
• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.
Troubleshooting
If nothing happens
If you get an error message at the plotter display
If the plotter does not move
It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware

communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or
try replacing the plotter cable.
If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly
Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller
marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.
Tips
The AP700 has the serial port on the INSIDE of the plotter. It is necessary to
remove some screws in order to find the port.
The AP700 plotter cable is a 25 pin female on computer side and 25 pin on
plotter side, Gerber part number 050225-002, E dated 11-89 DSC. A 25 to 9
pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer.
NovaJet Plotter
Configuring SGS Programs for the NovaJet
Plot Setup
and the plotter.
display.
• Enable the “Use Output Manager” A small “x” should appear in the
box.

box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number assigned to the NovaJet
• Click OK.
Plot
display.
area.
Output Manager
Plot Setting
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL
Device Options
Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).
Plotter Font File - Should be grayed out if using plotter’s built in font. If not
using the plotter’s built in font , the Plot-eng.fnt file and it’s directory should
be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the default size of the text on the
plot.
program.
Plotter Page Size
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 35.6”.
*See your NovaJet manual for frame size. The size varies depending on the
model of the NovaJet.
plot at all.
setup.
Using the OutMan as output manger.
• Open the OutMan by clicking on the OutMan icon in the START

menu. The icon can be found in the OUTPUT CONTROL folder at
OptiTex 8 menu.
Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working

• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = HPGL
HPGL
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size
• Click OK.
Configuring Qman
• Click on START > Optitex 8 > OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN
Working Units

• From the FILE menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will display.
Path Setup
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same
as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:
• Click OK.


COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.
Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = HPGL
HPGL
Protocol = NONE.
• Click NEXT.

Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter

Configuring the SGS progrem
Plot Setup
! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working
area.
• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot Select dialog box will
be displayed.
• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A checkmark will be placed in

the box.

box select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. .assign the plotter number.
• Click OK.
Plot
displayed.
area.
Output Manager
chapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.
Plot Setting
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to Design Partner
cutting between the plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should be the frame size.
setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are
using.
! Note: The Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the
plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the frame
size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything
else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not
been setup.
• Click on the OutMan icon at the START menu. It can be found at

START > OptiTex 8 >OUTPUT CONTROL
Working Units

working units dialog box will be displayed.
• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow =
DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)
Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)
Paper Size
• Click OK.
wish to send.
Configuring QueMan
• Click on the Qman icon in the START menu. It can be found at

START> OptiTex 8> OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN
Working Units
OutMan Path Setup
• From the OPTION menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan

Setup dialog box will be displayed.
• Click OK
• Minimize the QueMan keeping it running.

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.
Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow =
DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)
Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)
• Click NEXT.

Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter

Configuring the SGS programs.
Plot Setup
and the plotter you want to use.
area.
displayed.
• Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in the

box.

box select Browse and locate the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini Select the Pltr. number you want to assign to the Ioline.
• Click OK.
Plot
displayed.
area.
Output Manager
chapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.
Options - Should be set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.
Plot Setting
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to DMPL, HPGL/2 or HPGL

Generic. DMPL is recommended.
Font Options
cutting between the plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should always be set to the plotter frame size.
setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are
using.
! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust
the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to
anything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not
been setup.
• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the START

menu. It can be found at START> OPTIETX 8> OUTPUT
CONTROL> OUTMAN.
Working Units

working units dialog box will be displayed.
• Click OK.
Communication

Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Paper Size

• Click OK.
wish to send.
• Open the QueMan by double clicking on the icon at the START

menu. It can be found at START>OPTITEX 8> OUTPUT
CONTROL> QMAN
Working Units
OutMan Path Setup
• From the FILE menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will be displayed.
• Click OK

COM1 or COM2.
modem.
menu.
Port Options
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
• Click NEXT.

Lectra plotter
Connecting Lectra Plotter to your Computer
In order to connect "Lectra" plotter to your computer you need to have a

special cross 25 pins serial cable.
This is the serial cable schema:
"Lectra" Plotter pins number: You Computer pins number:
"Lectra" Plotter is using only 4 pins on the 25 pins serial cable.
Pin number 1 in Lectra go to pin number 1 on your computer.
! Note: Lectra pin number 7 is a ground, on a new PC computer pin number

8 can be the ground connection! This means that to need connect
Lectra pin number 7 to pin number 8 on the PC!!
In order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need create this kind of 25 pins serial
cable!!
Where to connect your serial cable in "Lectra" plotter:

"Lectra" plotter module E32 or E33 has 7 serial COM output connects. One of
those 7 output connectors goes in to "Lectra" terminal. The terminal
connection is a flat serial cable with only 4 pins, you need to disconnect this
terminal cable and connect the terminal connection directly to you computer.
Don't put your cable in the terminal connections on the plotter, connect the
terminal to your computer directly with your special crossed serial cable. Now
you can plot to your "Lectra" plotter.
In order to initialize the plotter you don't need "Lectra" terminal (you can use
"Lectra" terminal if you want to calibrate your plotter). OptiTex
communication driver will initialize the plotter and set the pen position to
point 0.0!
Warnings:
• The default frame size is Y- 180 and X- 35. The frame size can
change (in case you are driving Lectra E-32 machine) from OptiTex
plot dialog box.
• The emergency stop button on the plotter is not supported. Once

you stopped the plotting. With the stop button, you have to re-send
the whole file again.
• The Lectra Terminal is disabled once you use OptiTex.
• OptiTex Lectra driver will initialize automatically before starting to

plot.
How to Create Lectra Plot file in OptiTex version 8:
• After you finish nesting your pieces and you're ready to plot, go to
Plot dialog box.
• Check and enable "Use Output manager" option, select "OCC"

("output manager service") section and press the Setup button.
• "Plotter Setup" dialog will be appearing.

Note: if you are working with Win98 or Win95 you will need to
install OptiTex and reboot the computer in order to replace
msvcrt.dll and msvcp60.dll in your Windows system folder.
Without replacing these *.DLL the "Plotter Setup" dialog will work!
• Press the "Add" button to create a new plotter name and plotter
queue.
• To select a computer: select network or local computer (in order to

select a network computer you need to have a network computer
that already has a shared plotter queue) and then press "Next".
! Note: The enclosed explanation describes a local computer selection track.
• In the next dialog "Communication Setting" select "Lectra protocol"

and the relevant COM port, DO NOT change any others
communication parameters and press the "next" button.
• The next dialog is a "Local Plotter Setting". In the plotter name

Dialog box, write your plotter name. You can use any name but we
suggest using "Lectra".
(Don’t change the queue path for sharing, if your operating system
is not NT, you will need to define the share queue folder manually,
if you want other computers on the network to be able to plot to
your plotter.)
Press "finish" button.
• Now you're back to the main "Plotter Setup" dialog window. Select
your new plotter (Lectra) and press on "default button.
• Close "Plotter Setup" dialog with "Close" button.
• If the plotter queue that you've just created is new, the

"Plotter/Cutter Setup" dialog will open automatically. Select from
the driver format "Lectra Flat Bed Plotter" driver. Don't change the
plotter page size! It's recommended to use OptiTex font and not the
Plotter font (don't use "use build - in font" option).
• Confirm your setting with Ok button. Now you're in "Plot" dialog

box and here you will see "Alert on start" option. If this option is
checked, the job that you are sending to the plotter is in "Hold"
attribute on the “OCC ".
• Confirm your settings and send the job to the plotter by pressing the
Ok button.
Now the “OCC “will open. How to use “OCC "(Output Control
Center):
The " OCC " is the OptiTex new output system and in order to drive
"Lectra" plotter you need to work with the "OCC". The new “OCC
" supports "Lectra" communication driver.
• When the "OCC " is loaded (after you press the "plot" dialog box
"ok" button), you will see your plotter name in the "OCC" left side
under "All queues" header and your current job (the plotting data)
will be in the "OCC" right side under "Jobs".
• If you job status is hold (remember "Alert on start" option in "Plot"

dialog is checked) then in order to send the job to the plotter, press
on the "green flag" icon on the tool bar and your job will be send to
the plotter.
• In order to "re-send" a job you can go to "Done" under the queue

name on the “OCC " left side, select the job and press the "restart"
button on " OCC " tool bar. You can also delete a job, stop a job and
sort jobs.
Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter

Connect the cutter
The cutter must be assembled and installed.
Install the Cutting Edge Software
Cutting Edge uses the Base module software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software
• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.
area.
Use – checked
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies - optional.
Options -Set to Plot Continuous.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format - Cutting Edge

(0,0) In Page Center – unchecked
Manual Page Replace – checked
Use CR/LF in code – checked
Use M70 – unchecked
Use bitefeed offset – unchecked
Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - 0
Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,
Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen – 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008
Plotter Page Size = X- longer than maximum marker
Y- useable width of paper minus margins
! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,
in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area
that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker
size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

Tips
Buttons with drill attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge
cutter.
Using an AUX Drill attribute on buttons will execute a CUT command at the
cutter.
Using a Drill attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.
Using a Cut attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.
Using a Draw attribute on buttons will execute an INK command at the cutter.
I notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge
cutter.
T notches will draw as I notches at the cutter.
U, V, L, and box notches will cut the same shape at the cutter.
Operational Stops insert an M01 command at the cutter that causes the cutter
to pause before or after execution.
Darts will display as INK commands. The way that darts are displayed in the
SGS software determines how darts are displayed at the cutting edge machine.
When requesting the .NC file from the Mark software, Axis lines (pleats)
display as solid INK lines. When requesting the .NC file from the PDS
software, Axis lines (pleats) display as INK notches at the beginning and end
of the line.
Internal lines display as INK or CUT lines depending on how the line
attributes are set in the SGS software.
Piece Descriptions and internal text display as ANNOTATION at the Cutting

Edge machine.
If the Base line is displayed in the SGS software, the baseline will display as
an INK command at the cutting edge machine.
Eastman Cutter
There are several steps to follow when using the Eastman Cutter with the SGS
software:
• Installing the Eastman EasyCut program;
• Creating a .GBR file from Scanvec software;
• Importing the SGS .GBR file into Eastman software and cutting the
file.
This document provides information for step 2 above. For steps 1 and 3, please
refer to Eastman documentation.
Configuring SGS software
This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for
Eastman cutters.
Plot
display.
! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece or a marker in the
working area.
File Name - Type in the name and path of the file. For example, if the file is to
be sent to a floppy diskette, type: A:\filename
If the file is to be sent to a directory on the C drive, type:

C:\directoryname\filename
Output Manager - Use Output Manager, Alert on Start, Alert on End,

Remove on End -Disable all of these options.
Page Format
Single and Multiple- Disable (uncheck).
Fixed Scale - Enable (checked).
Options
Plot Continuous - Enable (checked).
Scale Factor
X=1 Y=1
Check Intersections, Order by Tools, and One Page -Disable all of these
options.
Bulge - Set at .008
Plot Setting
installation.
Format - Plotter Language should be set to Eastman Cutter.

Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Disable (unchecked).
Number of Pens -Set at 0.
Manual Page Replace - Disable (unchecked).
Use CR/LF in code -Enable (checked)
Use M70 - Disable (unchecked).
Use bite feed offset - Disable (unchecked).
Font Options
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font -Enable (checked)
program.
Gap After Plotting - Set at 0.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - Set at 0.
Min. Plot Spline Segment- This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
Plotter Page Size
X =128 The X value represents the frame size or table length.
Y = 43.5 The Y value represents the width of the material.
! Note: Be sure to set this setting correctly. If is set incorrectly, the cutter will
not cut or will cut incorrectly.
• Click OK in the Plot dialog box.
A .GBR file has now been generated and should be located under the path and
file name that was entered at the beginning of this section under “File Name.”
Tips
1/4 inch T notches with a cut and no stop attribute cut best at the Eastman
cutter.
Buttons with a Drill M43 attribute cut best at the cutter.

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250

Connect the cutter
Install the Gerber Software
Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS software
area.
(Use = checked)
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional
Page Format = fixed scale
Options = Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1
Whole pieces in frame only
Check intersections before plotting
Optimize Plot/Cut Order

Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.
Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format = Gerber Cutter
(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked
Manual Page Replace = unchecked
Use CR/LF in code = unchecked
*Use initialization in file header (M70…) = checked
Use Bitefeed Offset = unchecked (if using Version 7.x. If using a lower
version: *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -.50)
Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0
Use Plotter’s Built-in Font = unchecked
Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,
Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen = 0
Plotter Page Size = X- 999

Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)
Tips
I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS
software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)
Connect the cutter
Configuring the SGS Software

area.
(Use = checked)

*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50
Number of Pen = 0
Tips
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS
software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)
Connect the cutter
Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software
area.
(Use = checked)

*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50
Number of Pen = 0
size when creating a NC file, the file will be blank.
Tips
Glossary Terms 685
Glossary Terms
AAMA
Refers to a “neutral” file format created by the American Apparel Manufacturing
Association.
About
Selecting the About icon on the Standard toolbar in OptiTex PDS or the
Marker toolbar in OptiTex Mark activates a dialog box displaying the
version of software currently in use.
Align
A command found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS that repositions

points horizontally, vertically, or at an assigned angle based on the
selection of two or more points.
Array
A command found in the Marker Menu of OptiTex Mark, which allows

selected piece(s) to be arranged into rows and columns automatically on
the marker as specified in the Array dialog box.
Baseline
Baseline, also referred to as a grainline, controls the pattern piece’s

alignment in the working area and on the marker.
Base Size
The pattern size from which the program bases pattern changes and grade.
686 Glossary Terms
Buffer
An assigned area of space placed on a single pattern or patterns in

OptiTex Mark. A buffer is often used to create extra space between
pattern pieces when cutting difficult fabrics.
Bundle
A pattern making term that refers to all patterns pieces necessary to make
one complete item or Set.
Click
The action of pressing down on the left mouse button to select an object
or command on the screen.
Clipboard
A location on the computer where items are stored when they are cut or
copied from a file or document. Items remain on the clipboard until
another item is cut or copied.
Contour
The perimeter of the pattern piece.
Cursor
The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the
mouse on the computer screen.
Dart
Shaped tuck pointed at one or more ends to remove excess material and
Glossary Terms 687
Make a garment fit .
Delta Value
This refers to the X and Y-axis used for directional movement on the
working area. The X-axis represents the horizontal movement and the Y-
axis represents the vertical movement.
Dialog Box
The pop-up window that appears while using editing tools allowing the
user to insert parameters for a specific command.
688 Glossary Terms
Digitizing
The process of converting a two-dimensional object into data points as

digital numbers, which are imputed into the computer to represent the
pattern pieces.
Directory
User-defined sections on the computer were file could be stored. ( e. g.

C:\Optitex7\Examples).
Display File
A marker file, usually containing one or more design files, which has been
nested. (e.g. filename.dsp).
DXF
The graphical Data Exchange Format used by CAD systems to transfer

geometric information.
Drive
The address of the storage media to be accessed: usually A and B for

removable diskettes and C, D for permanent hard disk or CD-ROM drive.
DSN File
DSN is the SGS extension for a OptiTex PDS file.
DSP File
DSP is the SGS extension for a Mark file.

Glossary Terms 689
EXE
Extension denoting a program file. This is a compiled computer program

executable from DOS or from Windows by typing the file name on the
command line and pressing the Enter key (DOS) or by double click on its
name (Windows).
Exit
Normal termination of software program.
Field
The white spaces in a dialog box where information can be entered.
File Extension
The three letters suffix at the end of a filename, which defines the format.
For example: DSP, DSN, EXE, etc.
Flipping
The act of transposing the pattern piece horizontally or vertically while it

is located in the working area.
Global Rule
A grading rule based on the total number of grading points of any pattern.
Also called, “All Points Rule”.
Graded Pattern
A pattern that points have been assigned grading rules to control the way a
piece changes from size to another.
690 Glossary Terms
Grading
The process of assigning measurement increments to a pattern to

determine how each size of the pattern should increase or decrease in
relation to the previous size.
Grading Point
A point on the pattern contour, line and curve, which you can attach a
grading value.
Glossary Terms 691
Grading Rule
The assigned measurement increments to define the grading at a point on

the pattern piece for all sizes. There are three types of grading rules: fixed,
point and global.
Grading Table
A display window activated from the Grading Menu that displays the
assigned measurement increments for previously established grading
rules.
Grainline
Grainline, also referred to as a baseline, controls the pattern piece’s

alignment in the working area and on the marker.
Graphic Standard
The ASCII geometry in CAD/CAM file formats, which renders them

compatible with SGS programs.
Grayed Out
Refers to features or commands that are unavailable at the current time.

Features and commands are typically grayed out when a selected item on
the piece does not correspond to the feature or command.
Group
A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe two or more selected patterns

that have been added to the pattern list and nested on the marker as a
single unit. The Group is established by highlighting the pieces and
selecting Keep in the Grouping Menu of OptiTex Mark.
692 Glossary Terms
Handle Point
Any notch or button with the number 1.

Glossary Terms 693
Hard Drive
A device made of aluminum disks coated with iron oxide permanently

mounted in the computer to store data and programs. Hard disks have
more storage capacity than floppy disks.
Hex
Hexadecimal. A number written in base 16, which contains 16 possible

digits: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A (10), B (11), C (12), D (13), E (14) and
F (15).
Icon
Icons are located on the toolbars and provide the pattern maker with fast
access to the design tools.
Internals
Lines or points which are not located on the contour, and which can be
used for style or cutting purposes.
Intersections
A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe the points where nested patterns
overlap on the marker area.
Invert
To relocate the first point on a selected line segment from one end the
opposite end. This command can be found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex
PDS by selecting Segment and Show.
694 Glossary Terms
Key
A small piece of hardware approximately 1.5” by 2” with 25 small prongs

on one end and 25 small inlets or holes on the other end. This key is
plugged into a parallel port on the back of the computer. If the computer
has a printer attached, the key is plugged into the back of the printer plug
as if to piggyback on the printer plugs. This item is what permits SGS
software to run on your computer. When this key is not plugged into the
back of the computer, a “HASP plug not found” error displays on the
screen in the HASP Error Message dialog box. Authorizer keys are
designed to prevent illegal copying and illegal use of software. An
authorizer key is also referred to as, Plug, Security Lock, Lock or Dangle.
Landscape Mode
The Landscape mode is the opposite of Portrait Mode in printer setup. It

allows output to be printed in the width direction of the paper.
Lock
See “Key ”.
Marker
The physical layout of all the pieces in a style cut from the same material
at the same time.
Marker File
A file created in OptiTex Mark that contains a nested marker.
Marker Size
The dimensions of the marker that have been specified in the Marker
Definitions dialog box of the Marker Menu in OptiTex Mark.
Glossary Terms 695
Mirror
This command creates a symmetrical pattern piece by joining two pieces,

the original and a duplicate inverted piece, at a two-point line segment
that is selected before using the Mirror command from the Piece Menu in
OptiTex PDS.
Nest
A term used to indicate the close placement of pieces on a marker layout.

696 Glossary Terms
Network
A collection of devices such as computers and printers, that are connected

together. A network is a tool for communication that allows users to store
and retrieve information, share printers and exchange information.
Nested Pattern
A pattern that is drawn to show more than one size of the piece stacked on
top of each other also called a stacked piece or graded nest.
Nesting
The placement of pieces on a marker to achieve the most compact and

efficient layout.
Notch
A symbol placed on a pattern to indicate where the piece should be

aligned with another piece when the two are sewn together.
On-line Help
Help accessed by using either the F1 key for general index or Shift F1
keys for specific help when an option or command is selected.
Order
An order is generated in OptiTex Mark to set up the marker. The order

will include information such as the design files to be nested on the
marker, the fabric width, and the number of each piece in the design file.
Output
Refers to data that is either printed or plotted.

Glossary Terms 697
Path
The alphanumeric code that guides the computer to a specific drive/

directory/file based on the default selection defined in Autoexec.bat file.
Piece Display Bar
Refers to a pictorial list of pieces within a design file. The Piece Display
Bar shows a small picture of each piece in a design file.
Piece List
A window that is activated from the Display Menu in OptiTex PDS and
displays the pattern pieces for the current design file.
Plot File
A file created for printing purposes. The resulting plot file can be sent to
the output device from any PC (not necessarily equipped with SGS
software) with the DOS Copy command.
Point
The part of a piece’s boundary lines used to control the shape of the piece.
A point may be a grading point or a non-grading point.
Point Rule
A rule, which is attached to a specific point and is related to the number of

sizes which are currently open, and only to those sizes.
698 Glossary Terms
Polyline
Contour elements with shared attributes. (See also Single Elements).

Pop-up Menu
A list of options that appear on the screen after the right mouse button is
clicked.
Pop-up Window
A window displayed on the working area as a result of user selected option.
Portrait Mode
The Portrait Mode is the opposite of Landscape Mode in printer setup. It

allows output to be printed in a lengthwise direction on the paper.
Remainders
The number of unplaced pieces in a marker file.
Right Mouse Click
The action of pressing down on the right mouse button to select an object
or command on the screen.
Round
The act of modifying an angle into a curve.
Rule Library
A collection of existing grading rules which can be attached to a pattern.
Scroll
When the number of items in a window/dialog box exceeds the amount of

Glossary Terms 699
space for display, an elevator bar appears at the right. By positioning the
mouse on this bar, the user can view all items at one window height.
Security Lock
See “Key ”.
Selected Piece
The piece displayed in the working area with a dashed line around the
piece perimeter.
Selection Tool
The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the
mouse on the computer screen.
Set
A pattern making term that refers to all pattern pieces necessary to make
one complete item or Bundle.
Shrink Factor
The amount a pattern is increased or decreased to allow for the

dimensional of the fabric.
Size List
The box displaying all sizes being produced for a specific design file.
Snap
When using a grid on the working area in OptiTex PDS, this option
causes the cursor to jump to the nearest point, whether it be a contour
700 Glossary Terms
point, grid point or piece’s end point (grid points have priority).
Solution File
A completed order of nested patterns.
Stack Point
One point on a nested pattern where the grading is set at 0,0 for all sizes in
the nest.
Swap Pieces
This icon in OptiTex PDS interchanges the original pattern piece in the
piece display bar with the piece being edited in the working area.
Toggle
Refers to the action of turning a command on/off by checking or

unchecking an item. For example, many options in the Display Menu
toggle between displaying on screen or not displaying on screen.
Tolerance Value
The maximum distance between two points on a contour to treat the

points as a single point.
Toolbar
A collection of icons positioned in a row on the screen. Toolbars provide

easy access to commands and features when using the mouse.
Tools
Design functions in the software that enables the patternmaker to

Glossary Terms 701
manipulate patterns.
Waste Limits
This area is created on the markers edge prevents the cutting of pieces
were the fabric in flawed. The area can be defined in the Marker Menu
under Marker Definitions.
Working Area
The area of the screen where pattern pieces are placed for editing.
WYSIWYG
This stands for, “What You See Is What You Get.” This concept is used
in the SGS software to indicate that what appears on the computer screen
is what will be printed or plotted onto paper.
X, Y Coordinates
A method of defining the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) location of grade
points, notch attributes, and internals. X, Y coordinates also indicate how
much grade points increase in the horizontal and vertical direction.
Index
A
About OptiTex PDS, 33 Baseline Only, 304
Angle, 41 Best Quality, 290
Attributes, 41 Buffer, 290
Advanced Toolbar, 102 Base Only (F4), 429
Axes command and tool, 71 Base size only box, 385
Attaching the digitizer menu., 151 Bitmap Directory, 398
Attaching the Digitizer Panel, 151 Base Size, 347, 348
Actual Size, 247
Alert on Start, 227 C
Annotation, 200, 215
Add Relative, 268 Context Help, 34
Align Points, 274 Copy Grading (Ctrl + G + C), 22, 23,339
Attributes, 265 CCW Folded, 61
Angle, 304 Circle, 64, 65
Apply, 294 Clip Fabric Pattern, 102
All Points, 360 Counter Clockwise, 63
Append, 344 Cut, 112, 113
Apply Rule, 362 Cut Along Internal, 114
Apply Rule Dialog Box, 363 Communication Port, 195
Add To Library, 415 Customizing the Digitizer Panel:, 164
Auto reseam, 451, 454 Cad Files to Import, 203
About OptiTex Grade, 461 Change Log, 229
Copies, 228, 289, 290
B Current Plotter, 244
Box, 60 Curve Points, 213,266
Button, 66, 67 Clear Pieces, 259
Browse, 195 Copy, 278, 434
16 button cursor, 195 Copy Piece, 257
Base Size Mark, 201, 215 Cut Piece, 255, 256
Best Quality, 201, 215 Chapter 6 Piece Menu, 287
Boundary Lines, 212 Clip Fabric Pattern, 331
Bulge (cored Error) Inches, 242 Code, 289
Button Attributes Dialog Box, 271 Copies, 289, 290
Base Parallel to Segment, 315 Chapter 6 Piece Menu, 287
Baseline Only, 304 Clip Fabric Pattern, 331
Best Quality, 290 Code, 289
Buffer, 290 Button Attributes Dialog Box, 71 Chapter 11
Base Parallel to Segment, 315 Clear, 434
Compare Length, 430, 431, 433
Index
Coordinates, 421, 422 Description, 289

Close Rule Library, 356 Direction, 326
Create New Rule Library, 355 Distance Moving, 326
Copy/Paste, 385 Distance Stationary, 326
Countries, 397 Delete 346
Create By Measure, 405 Delete Rule, 361
Create Parallel, 381 Default Notch, 456, 457
Create Parallel Cutting, 410 Design Menu, 381
Curve, 386
Curve length, 404 E
Custom Fit, 392
Engaging a Tool, 21
Custom fit tools, 398
Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E), 24,25
Choose, 417
Equal for All Sizes, 54
Colours, 445, 446
Contour to draft, 440 Edit Panel, 195
Chapter 10Help, 459 Exit (Alt+F4), 253
Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box, 198
Check Plug Protection, 460
Export to CAD/CAM Files, 197
Extend Internal Line, 276
D
Edit Dimension Dialog, 401
Dart, 50 Edit Measure, 398
Delete, 34, 35 Edit/Delete measures, 404
Depth, 40, 53 Expression, 400
Direction, 53 Extend, 386
Disengaging a Tool, 21 Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E), 341,342
Dart rotation according pivot point, 56 Export Rule Library, 364
Depth, 61
Distance, 54 F
Draft, 113, 116
Drill Draw Cut None, 54 Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G + F), 24,341
From Next, 45
Digitizer Communication Setup, 196
From Previous, 43
Digitizer Panel, 163
First, 61
Digitizer Setup, 163
Digitizer Type, 194 Flip Along tool, 120
Digitizing a pattern using a 16 button cursor: Flip Horizontal, 84,305
Flip Vertical, 84,305
161
Folding out tool, 117
Digitizing a pattern using a 4 button cursor:
File Menu, 125
162
File Name and File List Box, 127,146
Drive and Directory, 127
Dictionary Dialog Box, 200, 214 Find now, 138
Drill Holes, 213 Finder Dialog, 135
Index
File Format, 204 Hole By measure, 408

File Name and Browse, 227 Hole to Piece, 387
Fit to Page, 247 Horizontal Fit, 393
Fixed Scale, 240
Format, 198, 212, 231 I
Fabric and Stripes, 327
Ignore CR. / LF, 210
Folding Allowed, 294
Ignore Frame, 211
Fabric and Stripes, 327
Ignore Internals, 205
Folding Allowed, 294
F3, 478 Import CAD files Dialog Box, 203
F6, 479 Import from CAD/CAM Files, 201
Internal Cut, 213
Fonts, 447
Internal Lines (draw), 213
First Diagonal, 386
Info, 287, 289
First Horizontal, 386
First Vertical, 386 Insert 346, 468
Fit to measures, 394 Index (F1), 459
I Show Point Numbers, 429
Fixed Rule, 361
Import Rule library, 355
Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G + L), 341
J
G
Join Pieces, 109
Gap after Plotting, 234
Grain (Base) Lines, 213 Join Pieces Dialog Box, 111
Grading Points, 267
Global Change Internal’s Parameters, 299 K
Global Info, 295 Knife, 60
Global Pattern Information Dialog Box, 295 Keyboard Commands, 477
Grading Manually by Edit Tool, 450
Grid and Stripes, 443 L
Grading Library, 429
Grading Table, 429 Look in subfolders, 136
Group, 397 Layers Table Dialog Box, 200, 212
Lock Piece (F3), 452
H Last Diagonal, 387
Last Horizontal, 386
Height, 248 Last Vertical, 386
History, 131, 132, 133 Length, 385
Hide Fabric Pattern, 102, 331
Holes and Internal Contours, 301 M
How to Contact SGS, 464
Hide/Show measures, 403 Make New, 100
Max All, 96
Index
Measure, 107 Network Plotting, 227

Move, 80, 81,261 No Size, 204
Move Parallel, 76, 77 Notches, 213
Move Point, 73 Note, 229
Move Proportional, 75 Notch Both (F12), 327
Match case, 137 Notch Moving (F12 + Shift), 327
Match whole word only, 137 Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl), 327
Material filter, 137 New Grading Rule Dialog Box, 358
Merge DSN File, 128 New Rule, 356, 357
Make DSN files, 205
Manual Page Replace, 232 O
Marker Boundary, 241
Overlap, 53
Marker Header, 241
Open Dialog Box, 127
Material Code, 201, 215
Max Grade Angle, 210 Open file, 138
Minimal Plot/Cut line, 234 Page in Center, 232
Open Style File, 140
Multiple, 240
Options, 128
Make Circle Dialog Box, 285
Order by Tools, 242
Make New, 260
Orientation, 201, 216
Make Pieces, 283
Make Polygon Dialog Box, 284 Output Manager INI File, 244
Make Rectangle Dialog Box, 284 Optimize Cutter Ordering, 311
Open Rule Library, 355
Make New Base Line, 317
Material, 205, 290, 298
Open Create Dialog, 451
Max Tilt, 291
Open Move Dialog, 450
Mirror, 306
Make Circle Dialog Box, 285 Open move Piece dialog, 451
Move Base Line, 473 Open Library, 413
Optimize Cutter Ordering, 311
Measure Bitmap, 398
Measurements Names, 405
Open (Ctrl+O), 126
Measures setup, 396
P
N Paste Grading (Ctrl + G + P), 23,340
Paste Relative (Ctrl + G + R), 22,339
New (Ctrl + N), 31 Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G + X), 23
Next Point, 30 Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Y), 23
Notch, 37 Pointer, 31
Number of Pleats, 61 Previous Point, 22
Name, 231,289 Proportional, 42
Index
Pattern Group, 405 R

Piece to Hole, 387
Redo (Ctrl+Y), 98, 255
Pleat, 59
Remove Current, 99
Pleat Characteristics Dialog Box, 60
Replace Old, 101,259
Pleats First Distance, 62
Rotate Piece, 83
Panel, 195
Rotate Segment, 82
Piece Code filter, 137
Reconnect, 40
Piece name filter, 136
Report, 142
Preparing patterns for digitizing, 152
Resolution, 195
Printing the Digitizer Panel, 165
Remove Current, 260
Piece Code, 200, 215
Round Corner, 275
Piece Name, 200, 215
Remove on End, 228
Plot, 219, 220
Report to Log, 229
Plot Continuous, 241
Restore Defaults, 201, 214, 216
Plot Setting Dialog Box, 230
Ratio, 325
Plotter (Output Manager) Setup, 221
Relate Piece to Stripes, 332
Plotter Page Size (inches), 234
Reseam (F6), 319
Plotter Setting, 230
Rotate, 301
Plotter Setup Dialog, 244
Rotate Directions, 291
Print, 246
Rotate Left and Rotate Right, 304
Print Dialog Box, 247
Rotate To Initial Base Line, 305
Print selected pieces only, 248
Replace Old, 259
Page in Center, 232
Reseam (F6), 319
Print to file, 248
Rotate, 301
Printer Setup, 248
Rotate Directions, 291
Printer Setup Dialog Box, 249
Rotate Left and Rotate Right, 304
Paste between Two Points, 282
Rotate To Initial Base Line, 305
Paste Segment Proportional, 281
Right Mouse Button, 465
Piece, 304,422,472
Rulers, 422
Point Cleanup, 312
Refresh 385
Print Report, 294, 298
Rename Rule Name, 361
Paste between Two Points, 282
Reshape Variation grading, 338
Piece List, 423
S
Q
Save, 32,144
Quality Lines, 214 Seam, 47, 48, 49, 267, 318
Quantity, 201, 205, 215 Size, 40, 277, 298
Show Control Points, 103
Show Fabric Pattern, 102
Index
Swap Pieces, 99 Sort library by dy, 365

Save As, 145 Sort library by name, 365
Save As Dialog Box, 146 Stack Point, 336
Select, 138 Select Tool, 466
Shift Digitizer 0/0 point, 196 SGS Keys commands, 477
Show file name only, 136 System Keys, 482
Style file name, 136 Status Bar, 438
Style name filter, 137 Save As, 416
Scale, 247 Segment Length, 384
Snap, 453 Sizes, 397
Setup, 206, 248 Scale & Shrink, 308 Standard measures, 396
Selected Element, 304
Set (0) Point, 314 T
Set Group, 334
Show Control Points, 331 The Insert Toolbar, 34
Show Fabric Pattern, 331 The Standard Toolbar, 31
Type, 40
Size Info, 291
Text, 70, 71
Skip Darts, 326
To Make a Pleat:, 59
Start Point, 314
Trace Piece, 108
Step, 326
Style Area and Dimension, 297 Trace Segments, 115
Switch all Pieces to Cut (F5 + Ctrl), 322 Tablet Size, 195
To Access On-Line Help: 459
Switch all Pieces to Sew (F5 + Shift), 322
To Digitize a graded nest, 160
Switch Direction (F11), 326
To Digitize oversized pieces: 160
Switch to Sew (Cut) (F5), 320
To Digitize pieces with Grade rules, 157
Sew Lines, 213
Single, 240 To Digitize: 153
Size Name, 200, 215 To Open a File: 126
To Reset the Grading On a Piece:, 129
Spline Angle, 210
To Output Using the OutMan Print
Style Name, 214
Manager:,222
Segment, 277
Show Segment, 279 Tolerance, 207
Scale & Shrink, 308 Turn (Grade) Points, 212
To Paste between Two Points, 282
Scenario, 460
To Unseam a Piece: 323
Style Area and Dimension, 297 Save AS Rule
Tools, 470
Library, 356
Transform, 471
Save Rule Library, 356
Selected Points, 359 Template Window, 421
Sizes Dialog, 344 Tool bar, 435
Template Menu, 413
Sort library by dx, 365
Taking a measurement. 402
Index
To Unseam a Piece: 323 Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G + O), 343
U
Undo (Ctrl+Z), 97
Update, 140
Units, 211
Use <M70> in File Header, 233
Use Bite Offset, 233
Use CL/LF in Code, 233
Use Output Manager, 227, 244
Undo (Ctrl+Z), 255
Up To the Contour, 277
Ungroup, 334
Unseam, 322
Undo (Ctrl+Z), 255
Use Measurements’, 405
Up To the Contour, 277
Using Help, 460
Update Measurement, 434
V
Variable Pleat, 61
Video, 285
Vertical fit, 393
Verify Rule Connection, 363
W
Width, 40, 247
Walk, 107
Walk,107, 323, 324, 325
Walk Setup, 325
Working Units, 447, 448,195
Z
Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G + Z), 26, 27, 343
Zoom Out, 95
Zoom, 470

OptiTex PDS User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiTex PDS User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SGS Digitize™, PDS™ & Grade™

Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment Systems

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1

Work on Seam (F5) ____________________________________________________320

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

With OptiTex’s digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computer

Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern to

When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual and

With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services we

Thank you choosing OptiTex.

How to Use This Book

The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different training

** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the Security

The OptiTex Program Disk.

OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans

As a registered owner, you’ll be informed of updates, upgrades and training

Help Services Provided

• OptiTex Version Number.

• OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock).

• Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording of

Technical Support offices

Pentium or better processor

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

SVGA 15’’ monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 1 serial port

Pentium II – 350 or better processor

Microsoft Windows ™ 95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

AGP display card with 4 MB of memory

17’’ monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 2 serial ports

In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following:

• Attach the OptiTex Security.

• Install the OptiTex Software.

• Configure your Plotter.

Attach the OptiTex Security Lock

• Turn your computer off.

• Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected to

• Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer into

Install the OptiTex Software

• Start Microsoft Windows 95.

• Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

• The installation screen will display on the screen automatically.

• Select “Install Optitex 8.0.”

• In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT.

• Select the Optitex language.

• The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. The

Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter

Set Up Communication Parameters

! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters for

Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger

To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on the

• On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutMan

• In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication command

• Select the proper communication port and set the correct

OutMan Dialog Box

Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger

The OCC supports plotters in local computer or on any other computer on

The OCC user interface

The Occ application is built mainly from two windows.

The Toolbar is made of buttons which are always the same.

VERY IMPORTANT OptiTex will not operate without the Security